1 #LyX 2.3 created this file. For more info see http://www.lyx.org/
5 \save_transient_properties true
6 \origin /systemlyxdir/doc/
9 % DO NOT ALTER THIS PREAMBLE!!!
11 % This preamble is designed to ensure that the User's Guide prints
12 % out as advertised. If you mess with this preamble,
13 % parts of the User's Guide may not print out as expected. If you
14 % have problems LaTeXing this file, please contact
15 % the documentation team
16 % email: lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org
18 % for correct jump positions whe clicking on a link to a float
19 \usepackage[figure]{hypcap}
21 % the pages of the TOC is numbered roman
22 % and a pdf-bookmark for the TOC is added
23 \let\myTOC\tableofcontents
24 \renewcommand\tableofcontents{%
26 \pdfbookmark[1]{\contentsname}{}
30 % macro for italic page numbers in the index
31 \newcommand{\IndexDef}[1]{\textit{#1}}
33 % for customized page headers/footers
34 % only needed because they are only used in one section of the document
36 % change header rule width
37 \renewcommand{\headrulewidth}{2pt}
39 % used to have extra space in table cells
40 \@ifundefined{extrarowheight}
41 {\usepackage{array}}{}
42 \setlength{\extrarowheight}{2pt}
44 % workaround for a makeindex bug,
45 % see sec. "Index Entry Order"
46 % only uncomment this when you are using makindex
48 %\renewcommand*{\index}[1]{\OrgIndex{#1}}
50 \options refpage,intoc,bibliography=totoc,index=totoc,BCOR7.5mm,captions=tableheading
51 \use_default_options false
56 \maintain_unincluded_children false
58 \language_package default
61 \font_roman "lmodern" "default"
62 \font_sans "lmss" "default"
63 \font_typewriter "lmtt" "default"
64 \font_math "auto" "auto"
65 \font_default_family default
66 \use_non_tex_fonts false
69 \font_sf_scale 100 100
70 \font_tt_scale 100 100
73 \default_output_format pdf2
75 \bibtex_command bibtex
76 \index_command default
80 \pdf_title "The LyX User's Guide"
81 \pdf_author "LyX Team"
85 \pdf_bookmarksnumbered true
86 \pdf_bookmarksopen false
87 \pdf_bookmarksopenlevel 1
92 \pdf_pdfusetitle false
93 \pdf_quoted_options "linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue, pdfpagelayout=OneColumn, pdfnewwindow=true, pdfstartview=XYZ, plainpages=false"
96 \use_package amsmath 1
97 \use_package amssymb 1
100 \use_package mathdots 1
101 \use_package mathtools 0
102 \use_package mhchem 1
103 \use_package stackrel 0
104 \use_package stmaryrd 1
105 \use_package undertilde 0
107 \cite_engine_type default
111 \paperorientation portrait
115 \notefontcolor #0000ff
132 \paragraph_separation skip
134 \quotes_style english
138 \paperpagestyle default
139 \tracking_changes true
140 \output_changes false
144 \author -712698321 "Jürgen Spitzmüller"
145 \author 274215730 "scott"
146 \author 424524441 "rgheck"
157 by the \SpecialChar LyX
162 \begin_layout Plain Layout
164 If you have comments on or error corrections to this documentation, please
165 send them to the \SpecialChar LyX
166 Documentation mailing list:
167 \begin_inset CommandInset href
169 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org"
180 \begin_inset Newline newline
184 \begin_inset Newline newline
188 \begin_inset Note Note
191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
192 The latest PDF-version of this document can be found here:
193 \begin_inset Newline newline
198 http://wiki.lyx.org/\SpecialChar LyX
199 /DocumentationDevelopment#UserGuide
207 \begin_layout Standard
208 \begin_inset CommandInset toc
209 LatexCommand tableofcontents
216 \begin_layout Chapter
220 \begin_layout Section
221 What is \SpecialChar LyX
225 \begin_layout Standard
227 is a document preparation system.
228 It is a tool for producing beautiful manu\SpecialChar softhyphen
229 scripts, publishable books, business
230 letters and proposals, and even poetry.
231 It is unlike most other
232 \begin_inset Quotes eld
236 \begin_inset Quotes erd
239 in the sense that it uses the paradigm of a markup language as its core
241 That means that when you type a section header, you mark it as a
242 \begin_inset Quotes eld
246 \begin_inset Quotes erd
250 \begin_inset Quotes eld
254 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
257 pt type, left justified, 5
258 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
262 \begin_inset Quotes erd
267 takes care of the typesetting for you; so you deal only with concepts,
271 \begin_layout Standard
272 This philosophy is explained in greater detail in the
277 If you haven't read it yet, you need to.
281 \begin_layout Standard
286 manual describes several things in addition to \SpecialChar LyX
287 's philosophy: most importantly,
288 the format of all of the manuals.
289 If you don't read it, you will have a bear of a time navigating this manual.
290 You might also be better served looking in one of the other manuals instead
296 manual describes that, too.
299 \begin_layout Section
304 \begin_layout Standard
305 Like most applications, \SpecialChar LyX
306 has the familiar menu bar across the top of its
308 Below it is a toolbar with a pulldown box and various buttons.
309 There is, of course, a vertical scrollbar and a main work area for editing
313 \begin_layout Standard
314 Note that there is no horizontal scrollbar.
315 This is not a bug or an oversight, but intentional.
316 When you read a book, you expect the end of a line to wrap around to the
318 Text overflows onto new pages in a vertical fashion, hence the need for
319 only a vertical scrollbar.
320 There are three cases where you might want a horizontal scrollbar.
321 The first case is large images.
322 To avoid them being displayed larger than your screen, left click on the
323 image and use the option
334 The second and third cases are tables and equations which are wider than
337 You can use the arrow keys to scroll horizontally through the table, but
338 this doesn't work for equations yet.
341 \begin_layout Standard
342 For a brief description of all \SpecialChar LyX
343 menus and toolbar buttons, have a look at
349 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
351 reference "chap:The-User-Interface"
358 \begin_layout Section
362 \begin_layout Standard
363 The help system consists of the \SpecialChar LyX
365 You can read all of the manuals from inside \SpecialChar LyX
367 Just select the manual you want to read from the
374 \begin_layout Section
375 Basic \SpecialChar LyX
377 \begin_inset CommandInset label
379 name "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
386 \begin_layout Standard
387 Almost all features of \SpecialChar LyX
388 can be configured via the menu
390 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
394 \begin_inset Index idx
397 \begin_layout Plain Layout
404 is able to inspect your system to see what programs, \SpecialChar LaTeX
406 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
407 packages are available.
408 It uses this knowledge to give reasonable defaults for the preferences
410 Although this configuration has already been done when \SpecialChar LyX
412 your system, you might have some items that you installed locally, e.
413 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
417 \begin_inset space \space{}
420 new \SpecialChar LaTeX
421 classes, and which are not seen by \SpecialChar LyX
423 To force \SpecialChar LyX
424 to re-inspect your system, you should use
426 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
430 \begin_inset Index idx
433 \begin_layout Plain Layout
434 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
440 You should then restart \SpecialChar LyX
441 to ensure that the changes are taken into account.
444 \begin_layout Section
447 \begin_inset CommandInset label
449 name "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
456 \begin_layout Standard
457 You can edit documents in \SpecialChar LyX
458 without having \SpecialChar LaTeX
459 installed, but you will not be
460 able to create PDFs or print your documents unless you do have it installed.
461 However, some \SpecialChar LyX
462 documents use DocBook as the “backend” that can produce
463 PDFs and the like, and every \SpecialChar LyX
464 document can always be output as plain text
468 \begin_layout Standard
469 Some document classes may depend upon specific \SpecialChar LaTeX
470 or DocBook classes or packages.
471 Such document classes can be used even if you do not have the required
472 files installed, but you will not be able to produce certain kinds of output.
475 \begin_layout Standard
476 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
477 packages that \SpecialChar LyX
478 has found on your system are listed in a file you can
481 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
489 If you are missing packages you need, then you must install them and then
490 reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
493 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
497 \begin_inset Index idx
500 \begin_layout Plain Layout
501 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
509 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
516 manual for more information on installing additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
520 \begin_layout Chapter
521 How to work with \SpecialChar LyX
525 \begin_layout Section
526 Basic File Operations
527 \begin_inset Index idx
530 \begin_layout Plain Layout
539 \begin_layout Standard
544 menu and in the standard toolbar are basic operations for any word processor
545 in addition to some more advanced operations:
548 \begin_layout Itemize
570 \begin_layout Itemize
586 arg "buffer-new-template"
592 \begin_layout Itemize
614 \begin_layout Itemize
624 \begin_layout Itemize
638 \begin_layout Itemize
660 \begin_layout Itemize
672 arg "buffer-write-as"
678 \begin_layout Itemize
692 \begin_layout Itemize
706 \begin_layout Standard
707 They all do pretty much the same thing as in other word processors, with
708 a few minor differences.
711 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
722 command lists the available templates.
723 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
724 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
725 They can be of use for certain classes, especially those for writing letters
731 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
733 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
740 \begin_layout Standard
741 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
750 \begin_inset Quotes eld
754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
770 \begin_inset Quotes erd
773 Unless you tell \SpecialChar LyX
774 to open a file or create a new one, that big, blank space
775 is just that — a big, blank space.
783 \begin_layout Standard
804 are useful if more people work on the same document at the same time.
808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
809 If you plan to do this, you should check out the Version Control feature
812 Read Additional Features\SpecialChar endofsentence
830 will reload the document from disk.
831 You can of course also use it if you regret that you changed a document
832 and want to restore it to the last save.
841 you can register the changes you made to a document so that others can identify
842 them as your changes.
845 \begin_layout Section
846 Basic Editing Features
847 \begin_inset Index idx
850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
857 \begin_inset CommandInset label
859 name "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
866 \begin_layout Standard
867 Like most modern word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
868 can perform cut and paste operations
869 on blocks of text, can move by character, word, or page of text, and can
870 delete whole words as well as individual characters.
871 The next four sections cover the basic \SpecialChar LyX
872 editing features and how to access
874 We will start with cut and paste.
877 \begin_layout Standard
878 As you might expect, the
882 menu and the standard toolbar has the cut and paste commands, along with
883 various other editing features.
884 Some of these are special and covered in later sections.
888 \begin_layout Itemize
894 \begin_inset Index idx
897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
926 \begin_layout Itemize
932 \begin_inset Index idx
935 \begin_layout Plain Layout
964 \begin_layout Itemize
970 \begin_inset Index idx
973 \begin_layout Plain Layout
998 \begin_layout Itemize
1002 \begin_inset space ~
1008 \begin_layout Itemize
1012 \begin_inset space ~
1018 \begin_layout Itemize
1022 \begin_inset space ~
1026 \begin_inset space ~
1032 \begin_inset Index idx
1035 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1044 \begin_inset Index idx
1047 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1062 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
1072 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
1078 \begin_layout Standard
1079 The first three are self-explanatory.
1080 You can also copy text between \SpecialChar LyX
1081 and other programs by
1102 put text in two versions into the clipboard (formatted and unformatted),
1103 so that other programs can choose the most suitable form.
1108 supports formatted and unformatted text as well, and additionally graphics.
1109 It tries to interpret the clipboard contents in an intelligent way.
1110 For example if the clipboard contains text in the format of comma separated
1111 values (CSV) and the cursor is inside a table, the text will be pasted
1112 into individual cells.
1116 \begin_inset space ~
1121 shows you a list with the last strings you have pasted.
1122 You can insert one at the current cursor position by clicking on a list
1126 \begin_layout Standard
1130 \begin_inset space ~
1135 contains optional items for specific formats, depending on the clipboard
1137 These include HTML, \SpecialChar LaTeX
1139 \begin_inset space ~
1146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1152 , PDF, PNG, JPEG and EMF.
1153 These menu items are useful if the clipboard contains the same contents
1154 in different formats, and you want to select one format explicitly.
1156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1160 \begin_inset space \space{}
1163 some programs put an image into the clipboard as graphics and as a short
1164 text which is often meaningless.) The menu item
1167 \begin_inset space ~
1170 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1172 \begin_inset space ~
1176 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1180 \begin_inset space ~
1189 , with the only difference that it acts on text only.
1190 It will insert the text in the clipboard so that the whole text is inserted
1192 A new paragraph is only started when there is a blank line in the text.
1196 \begin_inset space ~
1201 the text is inserted as paragraphs where the line breaks of the text will
1202 start a new paragraph.
1203 This is for example useful to copy contents of tables from webpages to
1204 a table in \SpecialChar LyX
1209 \begin_inset space ~
1212 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1214 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1218 \begin_inset space ~
1226 \begin_inset space ~
1229 Special\SpecialChar menuseparator
1232 paste from the primary selection.
1233 This is normally the currently selected text.
1236 \begin_layout Standard
1239 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1241 \begin_inset space ~
1245 \begin_inset space ~
1253 \begin_inset space ~
1257 \begin_inset space ~
1263 Once you have found a word or expression, \SpecialChar LyX
1269 button replaces the selected text with the contents of the
1272 \begin_inset space ~
1281 \begin_inset space ~
1286 button to skip the current word.
1290 \begin_inset space ~
1295 to replace all occurrences of the text in the document automatically.
1299 \begin_inset space ~
1304 option can be used if you want the search to consider the case of the search
1306 If the toggle is set, searching for
1307 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1318 will not match the word
1319 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1327 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1333 Match whole words only
1335 option can be used to force \SpecialChar LyX
1336 to only find complete words, e.
1337 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1341 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1361 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1366 offers also an advanced
1369 \begin_inset space ~
1373 \begin_inset space ~
1378 feature that is described in section
1379 \begin_inset space ~
1383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1385 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
1392 \begin_layout Standard
1393 Things like notes, floats, etc.
1394 \begin_inset space \space{}
1398 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1402 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1406 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
1408 Dissolving an inset is done by setting the cursor to the beginning of an
1413 or by setting the cursor to the end and pressing
1420 \begin_layout Standard
1424 arg "inset-select-all"
1427 while the cursor is in normal text selects the whole document.
1428 When the cursor is inside an inset
1431 arg "inset-select-all"
1434 selects the content of the inset.
1438 arg "inset-select-all"
1441 consecutively will increase the selection to the whole inset and then to
1446 arg "command-sequence buffer-begin ; buffer-end-select"
1449 selects the whole document in every case and puts the cursor to the end
1453 \begin_layout Section
1455 \begin_inset Index idx
1458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1465 \begin_inset Index idx
1468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1475 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1477 name "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
1484 \begin_layout Standard
1485 If you make a mistake, you can easily recover from it.
1487 has a large-capacity undo/redo buffer.
1490 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1493 or the toolbar button
1499 to undo some mistake.
1500 If you accidentally undo too much, use
1502 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1505 or the toolbar button
1512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1516 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1519 The undo mechanism is currently limited to 100
1520 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1523 steps to minimize memory overhead.
1526 \begin_layout Standard
1527 Note that if you revert back all changes to arrive at the document as it
1529 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1533 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1536 status of the document is unfortunately not reset.
1537 This is a consequence of the 100
1538 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1541 step undo limit mentioned above.
1544 \begin_layout Standard
1553 work on almost everything in \SpecialChar LyX
1555 But they will not undo or redo text character by character, but by blocks
1559 \begin_layout Section
1561 \begin_inset Index idx
1564 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1573 \begin_layout Standard
1574 These are the most basic mouse operations.
1577 \begin_layout Enumerate
1582 \begin_layout Itemize
1587 once anywhere in the edit window.
1588 The cursor moves to the text under the mouse.
1592 \begin_layout Enumerate
1597 \begin_layout Itemize
1604 marks the text between the old and new mouse positions.
1607 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1610 to create a copy of the text in \SpecialChar LyX
1611 's buffer (and the clipboard).
1614 \begin_layout Itemize
1615 Re-position the cursor and then paste the text back into \SpecialChar LyX
1618 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
1625 \begin_layout Enumerate
1626 Insets (Footnotes, Notes, Floats, etc.)
1630 \begin_layout Standard
1631 Right-click on them to set their properties.
1632 Also check the appropriate section of this manual for more details.
1636 \begin_layout Section
1638 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1640 name "sec:Navigating"
1645 \begin_inset Index idx
1648 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1657 \begin_layout Standard
1659 offers you several ways to navigate in documents:
1662 \begin_layout Itemize
1667 menu lists all sections of the document as submenu entries that you can
1668 click to jump to the corresponding document part.
1671 \begin_layout Itemize
1672 The “Outline”, which is accessed either by the menu
1674 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
1676 \begin_inset space ~
1681 or by the toolbar button
1684 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
1690 \begin_layout Itemize
1691 You can set bookmarks in your document under
1693 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1696 and use the same menu to return to them.
1697 Note that bookmarks are saved between sessions.
1700 \begin_layout Standard
1704 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
1709 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
1710 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
1712 \begin_inset space ~
1717 ) jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
1718 This is useful when you have a large document and have navigated or scrolled
1719 to another document part to look for something, and want to go back to
1720 your last editing position.
1723 \begin_layout Standard
1728 key the cursor will be vertically centered in \SpecialChar LyX
1732 \begin_layout Subsection
1734 \begin_inset CommandInset label
1736 name "subsec:The-Outliner"
1741 \begin_inset Index idx
1744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1745 Navigating ! Outline
1751 \begin_inset Index idx
1754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1763 \begin_layout Standard
1764 In the pull-down box at the top of the outline window, you can choose between
1765 several different lists, including other TOC-like objects, such as lists
1766 of tables and figures, but also lists of footnotes, or labels and cross-referen
1768 \begin_inset space ~
1772 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1774 reference "sec:Cross-References"
1778 ), or notes, or citations (see section
1779 \begin_inset space ~
1783 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
1785 reference "sec:Bibliography"
1790 Clicking on any of these will take you to the corresponding object in your
1794 \begin_layout Standard
1795 Right-clicking on elements in the Outline opens in many cases a context
1796 menu that will allow for direct modification of those elements.
1797 For example, with citations, the context menu allows you to open the citation
1798 dialog and to modify the citation.
1801 \begin_layout Standard
1802 The “Filter” field at the top allows you to restrict which entries appear
1804 For example, if you are displaying the list of Labels and References and
1805 wish to see only references to subsections, you can enter the text
1806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1810 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1813 in the filter, and only entries containing that text will be displayed.
1816 \begin_layout Standard
1817 At the bottom of the outline are several buttons and the like that allow
1818 you further to control the display.
1823 option sorts the current list alphabetically.
1824 Otherwise, the elements appear in the order in which they occur in the
1830 option keeps it in the current view state.
1831 Keeping means that when you have, for example, the subsections of sections
1832 \begin_inset space ~
1835 2 and 4 displayed and click on section
1836 \begin_inset space ~
1839 3, the subsections of sections
1840 \begin_inset space ~
1843 2 and 4 will still be displayed.
1848 option they will be hidden to highlight the clicked section
1849 \begin_inset space ~
1853 Finally, the slider at the left can be used to open the Outline to a given
1855 \begin_inset Quotes eld
1859 \begin_inset Quotes erd
1863 It is best just to experiment with it to see how it works.
1866 \begin_layout Standard
1873 button refreshes the TOC (though this should not usually be necessary).
1874 Next to it are buttons that allow you to change the position of sections
1888 buttons move sections up and down in the document.
1889 So, for example, you can move section
1890 \begin_inset space ~
1894 \begin_inset space ~
1897 2.4 or after section
1898 \begin_inset space ~
1903 will then automatically renumber the sections to the new order.
1916 (or the corresponding key bindings
1924 ) you can change the level of sections.
1925 So you can for example make section
1926 \begin_inset space ~
1930 \begin_inset space ~
1934 \begin_inset space ~
1940 \begin_layout Standard
1941 By right-clicking on a section in the outliner you can select the whole
1942 section to copy, cut or delete it.
1945 \begin_layout Subsection
1946 Horizontal Scrolling
1947 \begin_inset Index idx
1950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
1951 Navigating ! Horizontal Scrolling
1959 \begin_layout Standard
1961 does not have a horizontal scrollbar because the standard output page formats
1963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
1967 \begin_inset space \space{}
1971 \begin_inset space ~
1974 A4 are less wide than PC or laptop screens.
1975 Therefore you will get troubles in the output of your document if document
1976 parts exceed the width of the \SpecialChar LyX
1980 \begin_layout Standard
1981 There are of course exceptions where horizontal scrolling is necessary.
1985 \begin_layout Itemize
1987 is used on a small tablet computer
1990 \begin_layout Itemize
1991 Wide tables that are rotated 90° to fit a whole page
1995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2003 \begin_inset space ~
2016 \begin_layout Itemize
2017 Math constructs with long command names
2020 \begin_layout Standard
2021 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
2022 has an mechanism that scrolls automatically when the cursor
2024 As example shrink the \SpecialChar LyX
2025 windows so that table
2026 \begin_inset space ~
2030 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2032 reference "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2037 You will now see a dotted red line at the right or the left side of the
2039 Put the cursor into the table and move it with the Tab or the arrow keys
2040 to see the horizontal scrolling of the table.
2043 \begin_layout Standard
2044 \begin_inset Float table
2050 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2051 \begin_inset Caption Standard
2053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2056 name "tab:Horizontal-scrollong-test"
2060 Horizontal scrolling test.
2068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2070 \begin_inset Tabular
2071 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="3">
2072 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
2073 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2074 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2075 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="4.7cm">
2077 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2086 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
2089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2095 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
2098 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2117 \begin_layout Section
2118 Input/Word Completion
2119 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2121 name "sec:Input-Completion"
2126 \begin_inset Index idx
2129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2136 \begin_inset Index idx
2139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2170 \begin_layout Standard
2172 provides completion of words by scanning all documents that are currently
2174 Every word that appears in these documents is added to a database that
2175 is used to propose completions.
2178 \begin_layout Standard
2179 Input completion can be activated in the \SpecialChar LyX
2182 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
2187 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2194 \begin_inset space ~
2198 \begin_inset space ~
2203 the proposed completion is shown directly after the cursor.
2207 \begin_inset space ~
2212 the completions are always shown in a popup.
2213 The cursor completion indicator can be turned off by deselecting the option
2217 \begin_inset space ~
2223 With the general options you can define the delay time for the inline and
2224 popup completion, you can set the minimal number of characters a word must
2225 have that it will be taken into account for a completion and you can choose
2226 if long completions should be abbreviated.
2229 \begin_layout Standard
2231 displays a small triangle after the cursor as an indicator that there are
2232 completions available.
2237 key to accept a proposed completion.
2238 If several completions are possible, a popup is opened showing them.
2239 You can select a completion in the popup using the mouse or the arrow keys,
2240 and accept the chosen completion by pressing
2247 \begin_layout Standard
2248 The completion options for math in the preferences do the same as the correspond
2249 ing options for text.
2250 The special math option
2254 enables characters to be composed.
2255 If, for example, you want to insert the character
2256 \begin_inset Formula $\Rightarrow$
2259 , you can then input the characters
2260 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2268 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2271 to a formula to get it.
2272 So this is a quick alternative to the insertion of commands or the use
2273 of the math toolbar.
2274 A list with supported character combinations can be found in the file
2278 that is in \SpecialChar LyX
2279 's installation folder.
2280 Math autocorrection can at any time be turned on by pressing the exclamation
2289 \begin_layout Section
2291 \begin_inset Index idx
2294 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2301 \begin_inset Index idx
2304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2309 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2333 \begin_inset Index idx
2336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2367 \begin_layout Standard
2368 There are at least two different primary binding maps:
2382 , which can be changed in the \SpecialChar LyX
2385 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
2389 (You can list or change any key bindings as explained in section
2390 \begin_inset space ~
2394 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2396 reference "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
2403 \begin_layout Standard
2407 \begin_inset space ~
2415 \begin_inset space ~
2436 , do exactly what you expect them to do.
2440 \begin_layout Labeling
2441 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2445 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2446 LatexCommand nomenclature
2448 description "Tabulator key"
2454 There is no such thing as a tab stop in \SpecialChar LyX
2456 If you do not understand this, go read sections
2457 \begin_inset space ~
2461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2463 reference "sec:Par-indent-intro"
2468 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2470 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
2474 , especially section
2475 \begin_inset space ~
2479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
2481 reference "subsec:Lists"
2487 If you are still confused, look in the
2492 \begin_inset Newline newline
2500 key is only used to accept proposed input completions, to move the cursor
2501 in tables or math matrices or to change the nesting level in Itemize or
2505 \begin_layout Labeling
2506 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2510 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2511 LatexCommand nomenclature
2513 description "Escape key"
2520 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2524 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2527 It is used, generically, to cancel operations.
2528 Other parts of the manual will go into greater detail about this.
2531 \begin_layout Labeling
2532 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2538 \begin_inset space ~
2542 \begin_inset space ~
2549 These move the cursor, respectively, to the beginning and end of a line,
2550 unless you are using the Emacs bindings where they jump to the beginning
2554 \begin_layout Standard
2555 There are three modifier keys:
2558 \begin_layout Labeling
2559 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2565 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2573 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2577 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2578 LatexCommand nomenclature
2580 description "Control key"
2584 in the documentation files) This has a couple of different uses, depending
2585 on which keys it is used in combination with:
2589 \begin_layout Itemize
2598 , it deletes an entire word instead of a single character.
2601 \begin_layout Itemize
2610 , it moves by words instead of characters.
2613 \begin_layout Itemize
2622 , it moves to the beginning and the end of the document, respectively.
2626 \begin_layout Labeling
2627 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2645 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2646 LatexCommand nomenclature
2648 description "Shift key"
2652 in the documentation files) Use this with any of the arrow keys to select
2653 the text between the old and new cursor positions.
2656 \begin_layout Labeling
2657 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
2663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2671 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2675 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
2676 LatexCommand nomenclature
2678 description "Alt or Meta key"
2682 in the documentation files) This is the Alt key on many keyboards, unless
2683 your keyboard has a distinct Meta key.
2684 If you have both keys, you will need to try out which one actually performs
2690 \begin_inset Newline newline
2693 This key does many different things, but it also activates the
2695 menu accelerator keys
2698 If you use this in combination with any of the underlined letters in a
2699 menu or menu item, it selects that menu item.
2703 \begin_layout Standard
2704 For example, the sequence
2705 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2711 \begin_inset space ~
2715 \begin_inset space ~
2721 \begin_inset space ~
2729 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2748 \begin_inset space ~
2754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2764 \begin_layout Standard
2769 manual lists all other things bound to the
2777 \begin_layout Standard
2778 You will learn more and more key bindings and short-cut keys as you use
2780 , because most actions will prompt a small message in the status bar at
2781 the bottom of \SpecialChar LyX
2782 's main window which describes the name of the action you
2783 have just triggered, and any existing key bindings for that action.
2784 The \SpecialChar LyX
2785 menus also list the defined key bindings.
2786 The notation for the key bindings is very similar to the notation used
2787 in this documentation, so you should not have any problems understanding
2789 However, notice that Shift-modifiers are explicitly mentioned, so
2790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2798 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2805 followed by a capital
2812 \begin_layout Chapter
2815 \begin_inset Index idx
2818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2828 \begin_layout Section
2830 \begin_inset Index idx
2833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2842 \begin_layout Subsection
2846 \begin_layout Standard
2847 Before you do anything else, before you ever start writing a document, you
2848 need to decide what type of document you want to edit.
2849 Different types of documents use different types of spacing, headings,
2850 numbering schemes, and so on.
2851 Additionally, different documents use different paragraph environments,
2852 and format the title of your document differently.
2855 \begin_layout Standard
2860 describes a group of properties common to a particular set of documents.
2861 By setting the document class, you automatically select these properties,
2862 making it easier to create the type of document you want.
2863 If you don't choose a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
2864 picks one for you by default.
2865 So it is up to you to change the class of your document.
2868 \begin_layout Subsection
2870 \begin_inset Index idx
2873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2880 \begin_inset CommandInset label
2882 name "sec:Document-Classes"
2889 \begin_layout Standard
2890 You can select a class using the
2892 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
2893 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
2897 \begin_inset Index idx
2900 \begin_layout Plain Layout
2907 Select the class you want to use, and make any fine tunings of the options
2911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
2915 \begin_layout Standard
2916 There are four standard document classes in \SpecialChar LyX
2921 \begin_layout Description
2922 Article for basic articles
2925 \begin_layout Description
2926 Report for basic reports
2929 \begin_layout Description
2930 Book for writing a book
2933 \begin_layout Description
2934 Letter for US-style letters
2937 \begin_layout Standard
2938 There are also some non-standard classes, which \SpecialChar LyX
2939 only uses if you have installed
2940 the corresponding \SpecialChar LaTeX
2941 class files, though most \SpecialChar LaTeX
2942 distributions will include
2944 Here are some of the classes.
2945 The full list with detailed explanations can be found in chapter
2947 Special Document Classes
2956 \begin_layout Description
2957 A&A Journal articles in the style and format used in Astronomy & Astrophysics
2960 \begin_layout Description
2961 ACS For submissions to the journals published by the American Chemistry
2965 \begin_layout Description
2966 AGU For submissions to the journals published by the American Geophysical
2970 \begin_layout Description
2971 AMS Layouts for articles and books in the style and format used by the American
2972 Mathematical Society (AMS).
2973 There are three article layouts available.
2974 The standard one uses a typical numbering scheme for theorems etc., that
2975 prepends the section number to the number of the result.
2976 All result-type statements (propositions, corollaries, and so on) are sequenced
2977 together, but definitions, examples, and the like have their own sequence.
2979 \begin_inset Quotes eld
2982 sequential numbering
2983 \begin_inset Quotes erd
2986 scheme does not place the section number with each result, but numbers
2987 them throughout the article in a single sequence.
2988 Each type of result gets its own sequence.
2989 There is also a layout that dispenses with numbering of statements altogether.
2992 \begin_layout Description
2993 Beamer Layout for presentations
2996 \begin_layout Description
2997 Broadway Layout for writing plays.
2998 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
2999 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3000 with \SpecialChar LyX
3004 \begin_layout Description
3005 Chess Layout to write about chess games
3008 \begin_layout Description
3010 \begin_inset space ~
3013 vitae classes to create curriculum vitae
3016 \begin_layout Description
3017 Elsarticle Layout for journals of the Elsevier publishing group
3020 \begin_layout Description
3021 Foils Used to make transparencies
3024 \begin_layout Description
3025 Hollywood Used to type spec scripts for the US film industry.
3026 It is not an existing \SpecialChar LaTeX
3027 document class, but a new one that is distributed
3028 with \SpecialChar LyX
3032 \begin_layout Description
3033 IEEEtran Layout for the journals published by the Institute of Electrical
3034 and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
3037 \begin_layout Description
3038 IOP Layout for journals of the Institute of Physics publishing group
3041 \begin_layout Description
3042 Kluwer Layout for journals of the Kluwer publishing group
3045 \begin_layout Description
3046 KOMA-Script a replacement for the standard classes, offers many useful features
3047 like caption formatting, automatic print space calculation etc.
3048 (Is used by this document.)
3051 \begin_layout Description
3052 Memoir another replacement for the standard classes
3055 \begin_layout Description
3056 Powerdot Layout for presentations
3059 \begin_layout Description
3064 is used to write articles for the publications of the American Physical
3065 Society (APS), American Institute of Physics (AIP), and Optical Society
3067 This class is not completely compatible with all \SpecialChar LyX
3071 \begin_layout Description
3072 Slides Used to make transparencies
3075 \begin_layout Description
3077 \begin_inset space ~
3080 Proceedings Layout for the journals published by The International Society
3081 for Optical Engineering (SPIE)
3084 \begin_layout Description
3085 Springer Layouts for journals of the Springer publishing group
3088 \begin_layout Standard
3089 We will not go into detail about how to use these different document classes
3091 You can find details about the non-standard classes in chapter
3093 Special Document Classes
3100 Here, we will settle for a list of some of the common properties of all
3101 of the document classes.
3104 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3108 \begin_layout Standard
3109 You will probably find that many of the document classes listed under
3111 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3112 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
3114 \begin_inset Index idx
3117 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3126 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3130 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3134 If you open a document that uses such a class, you will receive a warning
3135 saying that there are files that are required to produce output that are
3137 So it may seem that something is wrong.
3140 \begin_layout Standard
3143 includes many more document classes than you will ever need to use, and
3148 , are highly specialized.
3150 tries to support as many different types of documents as possible, and
3151 it includes almost one hundred different layout files, with a growing number.
3152 No \SpecialChar LaTeX
3153 distribution will install by default all files that might be needed
3154 by some document class.
3155 There are just too many of them.
3156 That is why some of the document classes are unavailable.
3159 \begin_layout Standard
3160 If there is a document class you would like to use that is marked as
3161 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3165 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3168 , you just need to install the appropriate package files.
3169 The easiest way to find out which files you need to install is to use that
3170 document class for a new file.
3172 will display a dialog that will list the missing files.
3175 Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3182 manual for information on how to install them.
3183 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
3189 \begin_layout Standard
3190 Although \SpecialChar LyX
3191 provides support for many different sorts of documents, it does
3192 not include support for every document class people might want to use.
3193 For example, many universities provide \SpecialChar LaTeX
3194 class files to be used for dissertation
3195 s submitted to those universities.
3196 The \SpecialChar LyX
3197 team cannot write layout files to support every one of these.
3199 Fortunately, users can write their own layout files, and many users have
3203 Installing New Document Classes, Layouts, and Templates
3209 manual contains information on how to create layout files.
3212 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3216 name "subsec:Modules"
3221 \begin_inset Index idx
3224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3233 \begin_layout Standard
3234 Modules load additional features that are not by default available in the
3235 chosen document class.
3236 For example you might want to write Braille (embossed printing) in a document.
3237 This is not available in any document class, so you have to load the correspond
3244 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3248 \begin_inset Index idx
3251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3258 Highlighting a module in the dialog will bring up a description of what
3262 \begin_layout Standard
3263 Some modules require \SpecialChar LaTeX
3264 packages or file format converters that are not always
3265 installed by default.
3267 will warn you if you do not have a required package or converter, and
3268 it will tell you what exactly you are missing.
3269 You can still use the module while editing your file, but you will not
3270 be able to export to PDF or print your document, since \SpecialChar LyX
3272 to compile the \SpecialChar LaTeX
3273 file without the missing prerequisites.
3274 If you want to be able to produce this kind of output, then you need to
3275 install the missing prerequisites and then reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
3278 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
3282 \begin_inset Index idx
3285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3286 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
3292 See section Installing new \SpecialChar LaTeX
3297 manual for more information on installing required packages.
3300 \begin_layout Standard
3301 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
3304 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3309 Some modules require other modules, and some pairs of modules are incompatible.
3311 will advise you about these things.
3319 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3323 name "subsec:Local-Layout"
3328 \begin_inset Index idx
3331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3332 Document ! Local Layout
3340 \begin_layout Standard
3341 Modules are to \SpecialChar LyX
3342 much as packages are to \SpecialChar LaTeX
3343 : They are intended to be used in
3344 a variety of different documents.
3345 If you often find yourself needing the same sort of thing in different
3346 documents, you should consider writing a module for this purpose.
3347 Sometimes, however, a particular document has very special needs, but you
3348 need a specific inset or character style only that one time.
3349 You want something that is like a document's own \SpecialChar LaTeX
3351 What you want is \SpecialChar LyX
3353 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3357 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3369 manual for information on how to use it.
3372 \begin_layout Subsubsection
3376 \begin_layout Standard
3377 Each class has a default set of options.
3378 Here's a quick table describing them:
3381 \begin_layout Standard
3382 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3388 \begin_layout Standard
3390 \begin_inset Tabular
3391 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="5">
3392 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
3393 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3394 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3395 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3396 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3397 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
3399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3408 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3426 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3444 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3482 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3517 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3520 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3535 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3553 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3556 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3573 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3576 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3590 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3608 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3626 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3664 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3681 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3684 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3717 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3735 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3755 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3808 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
3811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3826 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
3829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3851 \begin_layout Standard
3852 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
3858 \begin_layout Standard
3859 You're probably also wondering what
3860 \begin_inset Quotes eld
3864 \begin_inset space ~
3868 \begin_inset Quotes erd
3872 There are several paragraph environments used to create section headings.
3873 Different document classes allow different types of section headings.
3878 heading; the rest do not and begin instead with the
3883 Some document classes, such as the ones for letters, don't use any section
3893 headings, there are also
3901 headings, and so on.
3902 We will describe these headings fully in section
3903 \begin_inset space ~
3907 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
3909 reference "subsec:Headings"
3916 \begin_layout Subsection
3918 \begin_inset CommandInset label
3920 name "subsec:Document-Layout"
3925 \begin_inset Index idx
3928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3935 \begin_inset Index idx
3938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
3947 \begin_layout Standard
3948 The most important properties of document classes are set in the menu
3950 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3957 \begin_inset space ~
3965 \begin_inset space ~
3970 , you can enter special options for your document class in a comma-separated
3972 This is only necessary if \SpecialChar LyX
3973 doesn't support special options you want to
3974 use for your document.
3975 To learn more about your favorite \SpecialChar LaTeX
3976 -class and its options, you have to read
3980 \begin_layout Standard
3984 \begin_inset space ~
3991 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
3997 \begin_inset space ~
4002 controls what sorts of headings and page numbers go on a page.
4003 You can choose between the following five options:
4006 \begin_layout Labeling
4007 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4012 Use default page style of current class.
4015 \begin_layout Labeling
4016 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4021 No page numbers or headings.
4024 \begin_layout Labeling
4025 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4033 \begin_layout Labeling
4034 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4039 Page numbers and either the current chapter or section title and number.
4040 Whether \SpecialChar LyX
4041 uses the current chapter or the current section depends on the
4042 maximum sectioning level of the class.
4045 \begin_layout Labeling
4046 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4051 This allows you to define fully customizable headers and footers if you
4052 have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4058 \begin_inset Index idx
4061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4063 -packages ! fancyhdr
4069 How they are defined is explained in section
4070 \begin_inset space ~
4074 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4076 reference "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
4083 \begin_layout Standard
4084 The separation of paragraphs is described in section
4085 \begin_inset space ~
4089 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4091 reference "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4098 \begin_layout Subsection
4099 Paper Size and Orientation
4100 \begin_inset Index idx
4103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4104 Document ! Paper size
4110 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4112 name "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
4119 \begin_layout Standard
4120 You can find the following options in the menu
4123 \begin_inset space ~
4130 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4134 \begin_inset Index idx
4137 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4146 \begin_layout Labeling
4147 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4151 \begin_inset space ~
4156 What size paper to print on.
4161 \begin_layout Itemize
4167 \begin_layout Itemize
4173 \begin_layout Itemize
4179 \begin_layout Itemize
4185 \begin_layout Itemize
4188 US letter, US legal, US executive
4191 \begin_layout Itemize
4197 \begin_layout Itemize
4204 \begin_layout Labeling
4205 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4210 To choose whether to output as
4221 \begin_layout Labeling
4222 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
4226 \begin_inset space ~
4231 Adjusts the print space to print both sides of paper.
4232 That means that the print space for odd- and even-numbered pages is different.
4235 \begin_layout Subsection
4237 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4239 name "subsec:Margins"
4244 \begin_inset Index idx
4247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4254 \begin_inset Index idx
4257 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4266 \begin_layout Standard
4267 Paper margins are set in the menu
4269 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4273 \begin_inset Index idx
4276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4285 \begin_layout Standard
4286 If you use a KOMA-Script document class, you can use the default settings
4287 because KOMA-Script calculates the print space automatically by taking
4288 the paper format and the font size into account.
4291 \begin_layout Subsection
4295 \begin_layout Standard
4296 If you change a document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4302 That includes the paragraph environments.
4303 Some paragraph environments are standard, in so far as all of the document
4304 classes have them; but some classes have special paragraph environments.
4305 If this is the case, and you change the document class, \SpecialChar LyX
4307 paragraphs whose styles it no longer understands as
4308 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4312 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4316 The name of the style is retained, in case you should want to go back to
4318 But these paragraphs will be output with no special formatting, so you
4319 will either need to create a new style yourself or else convert these paragraph
4320 s manually to a style present in your new document class.
4323 \begin_layout Section
4324 Paragraph Indentation and Separation
4325 \begin_inset Index idx
4328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4329 Paragraph ! Indentation
4337 \begin_layout Subsection
4339 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4341 name "sec:Par-indent-intro"
4348 \begin_layout Standard
4349 Before describing all of the various paragraph environments, we'd like to
4350 say a word or two about paragraph indentation.
4353 \begin_layout Standard
4354 Everyone seems to have their own convention for separating paragraphs.
4355 Most Americans indent the first line of a paragraph.
4356 Others don't indent but put extra space between the paragraphs.
4357 If you choose indentation for paragraphs the
4361 paragraph of a section, or after a figure, an equation, a table, a list,
4367 Only a paragraph following another paragraph gets indented.
4368 Note that the indentation behavior is different when you use another document
4369 language than English.
4371 takes care that the indentation follows the rules of the language used.
4374 \begin_layout Standard
4375 The space between paragraphs, like the line spacing, the space between headings
4376 and text — in fact, all the spacing for just about everything —is pre-coded
4377 into \SpecialChar LyX
4379 As we said, you don't worry about how much space to add between what.
4382 In fact, these pre-coded vertical spacings aren't a single number but a
4384 That way, \SpecialChar LyX
4385 can squish or stretch the space between lines to make sure figures
4386 fit on a page with text, so that sections don't start at the bottom of
4391 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4393 does this when \SpecialChar LyX
4394 goes to produce a printable file.
4399 However, pre-coded doesn't mean you can't change them.
4401 gives you the ability globally to change
4405 these pre-coded spacings.
4406 We will explain more later.
4409 \begin_layout Subsection
4410 Paragraph Separation
4411 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4413 name "subsec:Paragraph-Separation"
4418 \begin_inset Index idx
4421 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4422 Paragraph ! Separation
4430 \begin_layout Standard
4438 \begin_inset space ~
4446 \begin_inset space ~
4453 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4457 \begin_inset Index idx
4460 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4466 to indent paragraphs or to add extra space between paragraphs, respectively.
4469 \begin_layout Subsection
4473 \begin_layout Standard
4474 You can also change the separation method of a single paragraph.
4477 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4479 \begin_inset space ~
4484 dialog and toggle the
4487 \begin_inset space ~
4492 option to change the state of the current paragraph (shortcut
4495 arg "paragraph-params \\indent-toggle"
4499 If paragraphs have no indentation but use extra space for separation, this
4500 button will be ignored (you can't indent a single paragraph by toggling
4504 \begin_layout Standard
4505 You should only need to change the indentation method for a single paragraph
4506 if you need to do some fine-tuning.
4509 \begin_layout Subsection
4511 \begin_inset Index idx
4514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4515 Paragraph ! Line spacing
4523 \begin_layout Standard
4526 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4530 \begin_inset Index idx
4533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4542 dialog you can set the line spacing for the whole document in the submenu
4546 \begin_inset space ~
4555 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4556 You need to have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
4562 \begin_inset Index idx
4565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4567 -packages ! setspace
4572 installed to use this feature.
4577 You can set it for a single paragraph in the
4579 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
4581 \begin_inset space ~
4586 dialog but this should be used very exceptionally because vertical spacing
4587 is normally defined in the environment's style.
4590 \begin_layout Section
4591 Paragraph Environments
4592 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4594 name "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
4599 \begin_inset Index idx
4602 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4603 Paragraph ! Environments
4609 \begin_inset Index idx
4612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4613 Paragraph environments|(
4621 \begin_layout Subsection
4625 \begin_layout Standard
4626 Paragraph environments correspond to the
4629 \begin_layout Standard
4638 } \SpecialChar ldots
4648 \begin_inset Newline newline
4651 command sequence in \SpecialChar LaTeX
4653 If you don't know \SpecialChar LaTeX
4654 , or the concept of a paragraph environment is totally
4655 alien to you, we urge you to read the
4664 also contains many more examples than this section does.
4667 \begin_layout Standard
4668 A paragraph environment is simply a
4669 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4673 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4676 for a paragraph which gives that paragraph certain properties.
4677 This can include a particular style of font, different margins, a numbering
4678 scheme, labels, and so on.
4679 Additionally, you can
4680 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4684 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4687 the different environments inside one another, allowing one environment
4688 to inherit some of the properties of another.
4689 The different paragraph environments totally replace the need for messy
4690 tab stops, on the fly margin adjustment, and other hangovers from the days
4692 There are several paragraph environments that are specific to a particular
4694 We will only be covering the most common ones here.
4697 \begin_layout Standard
4698 To choose a new paragraph environment, use the pull-down box
4699 \begin_inset Graphics
4700 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
4706 at the left end of the toolbar.
4708 will change the environment of the
4712 paragraph in which the cursor sits.
4713 You can also change the environment of an entire group of paragraphs if
4714 you select them before choosing the new environment.
4718 \begin_layout Standard
4727 create a new paragraph using the
4731 paragraph environment.
4733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4740 because if you are in one of these environments:
4743 \begin_layout Itemize
4749 \begin_layout Itemize
4755 \begin_layout Itemize
4761 \begin_layout Itemize
4767 \begin_layout Itemize
4773 \begin_layout Itemize
4779 \begin_layout Itemize
4785 \begin_layout Standard
4787 keeps the old paragraph environment when you enter
4791 , rather than resetting it to
4796 Also the nesting depth is preserved (for more on nesting see section
4797 \begin_inset space ~
4801 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
4803 reference "sec:Nesting"
4810 \begin_layout Subsection
4814 \begin_layout Standard
4815 The default paragraph environment is
4820 It creates a plain paragraph.
4822 resets the paragraph environment, this is the one it chooses.
4823 In fact, the paragraph you're reading right now (and most of the ones in
4824 this manual) are in the
4831 \begin_layout Standard
4832 You can nest a paragraph using the
4836 environment in just about anything else, but you can't really nest anything
4844 \begin_layout Subsection
4846 \begin_inset Index idx
4849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4858 \begin_layout Standard
4859 A \SpecialChar LaTeX
4860 title page has three parts: the title itself, the name(s) of the author(s)
4862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4869 for thanks or contact information.
4870 For certain types of documents, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4871 places all of this on a separate page
4872 along with today's date.
4873 For other types of documents, the title
4874 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4878 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4881 goes at the top of the first page of the document.
4885 \begin_layout Standard
4887 provides an interface to the title page commands through the paragraph
4901 Here's how you use them:
4904 \begin_layout Itemize
4905 Put the title of your document in the
4912 \begin_layout Itemize
4913 Put the author name in the
4920 \begin_layout Itemize
4921 If you want the date to have a certain appearance, want to use a fixed date,
4922 or want other text to appear in place of today's date, put that text in
4928 Note that using this environment is optional.
4929 If you don't provide any, \SpecialChar LaTeX
4930 will automatically insert today's date.
4931 If you don't want a date, use the option
4933 Suppress default date on front page
4937 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
4938 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
4940 \begin_inset space ~
4948 \begin_layout Standard
4949 You can use footnotes to insert
4950 \begin_inset Quotes eld
4954 \begin_inset Quotes erd
4957 or contact information.
4960 \begin_layout Subsection
4962 \begin_inset Index idx
4965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4972 \begin_inset CommandInset label
4974 name "subsec:Headings"
4981 \begin_layout Standard
4982 There are several paragraph environments for producing section headings.
4984 takes care of the numbering for you.
4987 \begin_layout Subsubsection
4989 \begin_inset Index idx
4992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
4993 Section headings ! Numbered
5001 \begin_layout Standard
5002 There are 7 numbered types of section headings.
5006 \begin_layout Enumerate
5012 \begin_layout Enumerate
5018 \begin_layout Enumerate
5024 \begin_layout Enumerate
5030 \begin_layout Enumerate
5036 \begin_layout Enumerate
5042 \begin_layout Enumerate
5048 \begin_layout Standard
5050 labels each heading with a series of numbers, separated by periods.
5051 The numbers describe where in the document you are.
5052 Unlike the other headings, parts are numbered with Latin letters.
5055 \begin_layout Standard
5056 Headings all subdivide your document into different pieces of text.
5057 For example, suppose you're writing a book.
5058 You group the book into chapters.
5060 does a similar grouping:
5063 \begin_layout Itemize
5068 is divided into either
5079 \begin_layout Itemize
5091 \begin_layout Itemize
5103 \begin_layout Itemize
5115 \begin_layout Itemize
5127 \begin_layout Itemize
5139 \begin_layout Standard
5140 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
5143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5148 Not all document types use the
5152 heading as the maximum sectioning level.
5157 is the top-level heading.
5165 \begin_layout Standard
5170 environment to label a new sub-subsection, \SpecialChar LyX
5171 labels it with its number,
5172 along with the number of the subsection, section and, if applicable, chapter
5174 For example: the fifth section of the second chapter of this book has the
5176 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5180 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5188 \begin_inset Index idx
5191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5192 Section headings ! Unnumbered
5200 \begin_layout Standard
5201 The unnumbered section headings have a
5202 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5206 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5209 at the end of their name.
5210 They work the same as their numbered counterparts but will not appear in
5211 the table of contents, see section
5212 \begin_inset space ~
5216 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5225 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5226 Changing the Numbering
5227 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5229 name "subsec:Numbering-depth"
5236 \begin_layout Standard
5237 You can also alter which sectioning levels get numbered and which ones appear
5238 in the Table of Contents.
5239 Now, this doesn't remove any of the levels; that's preset in the document
5241 Just as certain classes start with
5255 Similarly, not all document classes number all sectioning levels.
5265 This is something you can change.
5268 \begin_layout Standard
5271 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5275 \begin_inset Index idx
5278 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5287 \begin_inset space ~
5291 \begin_inset space ~
5296 you will see two counters.
5301 controls how far down in the sectioning hierarchy \SpecialChar LyX
5302 numbers a section heading.
5303 The other one controls the appearance of the section headings in the table
5307 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5308 Short Titles of Headings
5309 \begin_inset Index idx
5312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5313 Section headings ! Short titles
5319 \begin_inset Argument 1
5322 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5329 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5331 name "sec:Short-Titles"
5338 \begin_layout Standard
5339 Some section or chapter titles, such as this one, can get quite long.
5340 This can cause trouble when there is limited horizontal space.
5341 For example, if the header of the page is set to show the current section
5342 title, a long title will protrude over the page margins and look awful.
5345 \begin_layout Standard
5347 allows you to specify a short title for section headings.
5348 This short title is used in the header and in the actual table of contents,
5349 avoiding the problem mentioned.
5350 To specify a short title, set the cursor behind the title and use the menu
5353 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
5355 \begin_inset space ~
5361 This will insert a box labeled
5362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
5366 \begin_inset space ~
5370 \begin_inset Quotes erd
5373 which you can use to enter the short title text.
5374 This also works for captions inside floats.
5375 There can only be one short title per title.
5378 \begin_layout Standard
5379 The title of this section is a good example of using this feature.
5382 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5386 \begin_layout Standard
5387 The following information applies to all section headings:
5390 \begin_layout Itemize
5391 You cannot do any nesting with these environments.
5394 \begin_layout Itemize
5395 You cannot use a margin note in any of these environments.
5398 \begin_layout Itemize
5399 You can only use inline math in these environments.
5402 \begin_layout Itemize
5403 You can use labels and cross-references to refer to their numbers.
5406 \begin_layout Subsection
5410 \begin_layout Standard
5412 has three paragraph environments for writing poetry and quotations.
5426 Forget the days of changing line spacing and twiddling with margins.
5427 These three paragraph environments already have those changes built-in.
5428 They all widen the left margin and add a bit of extra space above and below
5429 the text they contain.
5430 They also allow nesting, so you can put a
5438 , as well as in some other paragraph environments.
5441 \begin_layout Standard
5442 There is another feature of these three paragraph environments: they do
5451 when you start a new paragraph.
5452 So, you can type in that poem and merrily enter
5456 without worrying about the paragraph environment changing on you.
5457 Of course, that means that, once you are done typing in that poem, you
5458 have to change back to the
5462 environment yourself.
5465 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5467 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5474 \begin_inset Index idx
5477 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5486 \begin_layout Standard
5487 Now that we've described the similarities of these three environments, it's
5488 time for the differences.
5497 are identical except for one difference:
5501 uses extra spacing to separate paragraphs and never indents the first line.
5510 indents the first line of a paragraph and uses the same line spacing throughout.
5513 \begin_layout Standard
5514 Here's an example of the
5527 I can keep writing, extending this line out further and further until it
5529 See – no indentation!
5533 Here's the second paragraph of this quote.
5534 Again, there's no indentation, but there is extra space between me and
5535 the other paragraph.
5538 \begin_layout Standard
5539 Here's another example, this time in the
5546 \begin_layout Quotation
5552 If I keep writing, you will see the indentation.
5553 If your country uses a writing style that indicates new paragraphs by indenting
5554 the first line, then
5558 is the environment for you! Well, you'd use it
5562 you were quoting other text.
5565 \begin_layout Quotation
5566 Here's a new paragraph.
5567 I could ramble on and on, like a politician at election time.
5568 If I did that, though, you'd get bored.
5571 \begin_layout Standard
5572 As the examples show,
5576 is for those people who use extra space to separate paragraphs.
5577 They should put quotes in the
5582 Those who use indentation to mark a new paragraph should use the
5586 paragraph environment for quoted text.
5589 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5591 \begin_inset Index idx
5594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5601 \begin_inset Index idx
5604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5611 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5620 \begin_layout Standard
5625 is a paragraph environment for poetry, rhymes, verses, and so on.
5631 \begin_inset Newline newline
5634 Which I did not rehearse!
5638 It could be much worse.
5639 This line could be long, very long, oh so long, so very long that it wraps
5641 It looks okay on screen, but in the printed version, the extra lines are
5642 indented a bit more than the first.
5643 Okay, so it's turned to prose and doesn't rhyme anymore.
5649 \begin_inset Newline newline
5652 And make things look fine
5653 \begin_inset Newline newline
5659 arg "newline-insert newline"
5665 \begin_layout Standard
5670 does not indent both margins.
5671 Each stanza of the verse or poem is in its own paragraph.
5672 To separate the individual lines of a stanza, use the shortcut
5675 arg "newline-insert newline"
5681 \begin_layout Subsection
5683 \begin_inset Index idx
5686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5693 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5702 \begin_layout Standard
5704 has four different paragraph environments for creating different kinds
5714 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5715 labels your list items with bullets or numbers, respectively.
5724 environments, \SpecialChar LyX
5725 lets you provide your own label.
5726 We will present the individual details of each type of list next after
5727 describing some general features of all four of them.
5730 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5734 \begin_layout Standard
5735 The four paragraph environments for lists differ from the other environments
5737 First, \SpecialChar LyX
5738 treats each paragraph as a list item.
5747 reset the environment to
5751 but keeps the current environment and creates a new list item.
5752 The nesting depth is thereby kept.
5753 If you want to keep the paragraph environment but reset the current nesting
5757 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
5761 If you do this at the top level of a list, it returns you to the
5768 \begin_layout Standard
5769 You can nest lists of any type inside one another.
5770 In fact, \SpecialChar LyX
5771 changes the labels on some list items depending on how it is
5773 If you intend to use any of the list paragraph environments, we suggest
5774 you read all of section
5775 \begin_inset space ~
5779 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5781 reference "sec:Nesting"
5788 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5790 \begin_inset Index idx
5793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5800 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5809 \begin_layout Standard
5810 The first type of list we will describe in detail is the
5814 paragraph environment.
5815 It has the following properties:
5818 \begin_layout Itemize
5819 Each item has a particular bullet or symbol as its label.
5823 \begin_layout Itemize
5825 uses the same symbol for all of the items in a given nesting level.
5828 \begin_layout Itemize
5829 The symbol appears at the beginning of the first line.
5833 \begin_layout Itemize
5834 The items can have any length.
5836 automatically offsets the left margin of each item.
5837 The offset is always relative to whatever environment the
5844 \begin_layout Itemize
5849 environment inside another
5853 environment, the label changes to a new symbol.
5857 \begin_layout Itemize
5858 There are four different symbols for up to a four-fold nesting.
5861 \begin_layout Itemize
5863 always shows the same symbol on screen.
5866 \begin_layout Itemize
5868 \begin_inset space ~
5872 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5874 reference "sec:Nesting"
5878 for a full explanation of nesting.
5882 \begin_layout Standard
5883 Of course, that explanation was also an example of an
5892 environment is best suited for lists where the order doesn't matter.
5895 \begin_layout Standard
5896 We said that different levels use different symbols as their label.
5897 Here's an example of all four possible symbols.
5900 \begin_layout Itemize
5901 The label for the first level
5905 is a large black dot, or bullet.
5909 \begin_layout Itemize
5910 The label for the second level is a dash.
5914 \begin_layout Itemize
5915 The label for the third is an asterisk.
5919 \begin_layout Itemize
5920 The label for the fourth is a centered dot.
5924 \begin_layout Itemize
5925 Back out to the third level.
5929 \begin_layout Itemize
5930 Back to the second level.
5934 \begin_layout Itemize
5935 Back to the outermost level.
5938 \begin_layout Standard
5939 These are the default labels for an
5944 You can customize how these labels are displayed in the output in the
5946 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
5949 dialog in the submenu
5954 \begin_inset Index idx
5957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5963 These customizations are not displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
5967 \begin_layout Standard
5968 Notice how the space between items decreases with increasing depth.
5969 We will explain nesting and all the tricks you can do with different depths
5971 \begin_inset space ~
5975 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
5977 reference "sec:Nesting"
5984 \begin_layout Subsubsection
5986 \begin_inset Index idx
5989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
5996 \begin_inset CommandInset label
5998 name "sec:Enumerate"
6005 \begin_layout Standard
6010 environment is used to create numbered lists and outlines.
6011 It has these properties:
6014 \begin_layout Enumerate
6015 Each item has a numeral as its label.
6019 \begin_layout Enumerate
6020 The label type depends on the nesting depth.
6024 \begin_layout Enumerate
6026 automatically counts the items for you and updates the label as appropriate.
6029 \begin_layout Enumerate
6034 environment resets the counter to one.
6037 \begin_layout Enumerate
6050 \begin_layout Enumerate
6051 Offsets the items relative to the left margin.
6052 Items can have any length.
6055 \begin_layout Enumerate
6056 Reduces the space between items as the nesting depth increases.
6059 \begin_layout Enumerate
6060 Uses different types of labels depending on the nesting depth.
6063 \begin_layout Enumerate
6064 Allows up to a four-fold nesting.
6068 \begin_layout Standard
6077 shows the different labels for each item in \SpecialChar LyX
6079 Here is how \SpecialChar LyX
6080 labels the four different levels in an
6087 \begin_layout Enumerate
6088 The first level of an
6092 uses Arabic numerals followed by a period.
6096 \begin_layout Enumerate
6097 The second level uses lower case letters surrounded by parentheses.
6101 \begin_layout Enumerate
6102 The third level uses lower-case Roman numerals followed by a period.
6106 \begin_layout Enumerate
6107 The fourth level uses capital letters followed by a period.
6110 \begin_layout Enumerate
6111 Again, notice the decrease in the spacing between items as the nesting depth
6116 \begin_layout Enumerate
6117 Back to the third level
6121 \begin_layout Enumerate
6122 Back to the second level.
6126 \begin_layout Enumerate
6127 Back to the outermost level.
6130 \begin_layout Standard
6131 You can customize the type of numbering used in the
6135 environment, see section
6136 \begin_inset space ~
6140 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6142 reference "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6147 Such customization only shows up in the printed version, not in \SpecialChar LyX
6151 \begin_layout Standard
6152 There is more to nesting
6156 environments than we've stated here.
6157 You should read section
6158 \begin_inset space ~
6162 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6164 reference "sec:Nesting"
6168 to learn more about nesting.
6171 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6173 \begin_inset Index idx
6176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6185 \begin_layout Standard
6186 Unlike the previous two environments, the
6190 list has no fixed label.
6191 Instead, \SpecialChar LyX
6193 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6197 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6200 of the first line as the label.
6204 \begin_layout Description
6205 Example: This is an example of the
6212 \begin_layout Standard
6214 typesets the label in boldface and puts extra space between it and the
6218 \begin_layout Standard
6220 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6224 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6227 it is meant that the first usage of the
6231 key ends the label if you are at the beginning of the first line of an
6233 If you need to use more than one word in a label use a
6241 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
6246 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6247 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
6249 \begin_inset space ~
6255 \begin_inset space ~
6259 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6261 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
6265 for more information.) Here is an example:
6268 \begin_layout Description
6270 \begin_inset space ~
6273 Example: This one shows how to use a
6276 \begin_inset space ~
6288 \begin_layout Description
6289 Usage: You should use the
6293 environment for things like definitions and theorems.
6294 Use it when you need to make one word in particular stand out in the text
6296 It's not a good idea to use a
6300 environment when you have an entire sentence that you want to describe.
6301 You're better off using
6313 paragraphs into them.
6316 \begin_layout Description
6317 Nesting: You can nest
6321 environments inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and
6325 \begin_layout Standard
6326 Notice that after the first line, \SpecialChar LyX
6327 indents subsequent lines, offsetting
6328 them from the first line.
6331 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6333 \begin_inset Index idx
6336 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6345 \begin_layout Standard
6350 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
6351 extension to \SpecialChar LaTeX
6355 \begin_layout Standard
6364 list has user-defined labels for each list item but it provides some additional
6366 Here are its properties:
6369 \begin_layout Labeling
6370 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6372 \begin_inset space ~
6375 labels \SpecialChar LyX
6377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6384 of each line as the item label.
6389 after the beginning of the first line of an item marks the end of the label.
6390 If you need to use more than one word in an item label, use a protected
6391 space as described above.
6394 \begin_layout Labeling
6395 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6396 margins As you can see, \SpecialChar LyX
6397 uses different margins for the item label and the
6398 body of the item text.
6399 The body of the text has a larger left margin, which is equal to the default
6400 label width plus a little extra space.
6404 \begin_layout Labeling
6405 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6407 \begin_inset space ~
6410 width \SpecialChar LyX
6411 uses the width of the label, or the default width, whatever is larger.
6412 If the label width is larger, the label
6413 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6417 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6420 into the first line.
6421 In other words, the text of the first line isn't aligned with the left
6422 margin of the rest of the item text.
6425 \begin_layout Labeling
6426 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6428 \begin_inset space ~
6431 width You can set the default label width to ensure that the text of all
6436 environment has the same left margin.
6437 \begin_inset Newline newline
6440 To change the default width, select all items in the list.
6443 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
6445 \begin_inset space ~
6450 dialog (toolbar button
6453 arg "layout-paragraph"
6460 \begin_inset space ~
6465 determines the default label width.
6466 You can use the text of your largest label here, but you can also use the
6468 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6472 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6475 multiple times instead.
6476 M is the widest character and is a standard unit of widths in \SpecialChar LaTeX
6479 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6483 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6486 as the unit of width you don't need to keep changing the contents of
6489 \begin_inset space ~
6494 every time you alter a label in a
6499 \begin_inset Newline newline
6502 The predefined default width is the length of
6503 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6507 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6511 \begin_inset space ~
6517 \begin_layout Standard
6522 list the same way as the
6526 list: When you need one word to stand out from the text that describes
6532 environment gives you another way to do this, using a different overall
6536 \begin_layout Standard
6541 lists inside one another, nest them in other types of lists, and so on.
6542 They work just like the other list paragraph environments.
6544 \begin_inset space ~
6548 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6550 reference "sec:Nesting"
6554 to learn about nesting.
6557 \begin_layout Standard
6558 There is yet another feature of the
6562 list: As you can see in the examples, \SpecialChar LyX
6563 left-justifies the item labels by
6565 You can use additional
6569 to change how \SpecialChar LyX
6570 justifies the item label.
6575 are documented in section
6576 \begin_inset space ~
6580 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6582 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
6587 Here are some examples:
6590 \begin_layout Labeling
6591 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6592 Left The default for
6599 \begin_layout Labeling
6600 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6601 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6608 at the beginning of the label right justifies it.
6611 \begin_layout Labeling
6612 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
6613 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6617 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
6624 at the beginning of the label and one at the end centers it.
6627 \begin_layout Subsection
6629 \begin_inset CommandInset label
6631 name "subsec:Customized-Lists"
6636 \begin_inset Index idx
6639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6648 \begin_layout Standard
6649 The features described in this section require that the module
6651 Customisable Lists (enumitem)
6653 is loaded in the document settings.
6654 The module uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
6660 \begin_inset Index idx
6663 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6665 -packages ! enumitem
6673 \begin_layout Subsubsection
6674 Custom Enumerate Lists
6675 \begin_inset Index idx
6678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6679 Lists ! Enumerate ! Custom
6687 \begin_layout Standard
6689 The default numbering of numbered lists can be changed by adding an optional
6692 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
6695 ) to the first item of each level in the list.
6696 There you add the command
6699 \begin_layout Standard
6707 \begin_layout Standard
6719 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6720 For more about \SpecialChar TeX
6721 Code, look at section
6722 \begin_inset space ~
6726 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
6728 reference "sec:TeX-Code"
6741 is hereby the first level counter of the enumeration.
6748 outputs the counter as a small Roman numeral.
6749 For capital Roman numerals replace
6761 in the command above.
6762 For Arabic numerals use
6770 \begin_inset Quotes eld
6774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
6777 items with capital or small Latin letters use
6792 \begin_layout Standard
6794 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
6797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6802 You can only number 26
6803 \begin_inset space ~
6806 items with Latin letters, because this numbering is limited to single letters.
6814 \begin_layout Standard
6815 To change the numbering for the list sublevels, replace the 'i' in the command
6816 by the small Roman numeral of the level (enumi, enumii, enumiii, enumiv).
6819 \begin_layout Standard
6820 Here is a list with custom numbering:
6823 \begin_layout Enumerate
6824 \begin_inset Argument 1
6827 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6831 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6853 \begin_layout Enumerate
6854 \begin_inset Argument 1
6857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6861 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6880 \begin_layout Enumerate
6885 \begin_layout Enumerate
6886 \begin_inset Argument 1
6889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6893 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6913 \begin_layout Enumerate
6914 \begin_inset Argument 1
6917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
6943 \begin_layout Standard
6944 For this list these commands were used:
6947 \begin_layout Standard
6958 \begin_inset Newline newline
6966 \begin_inset Newline newline
6974 \begin_inset Newline newline
6984 \begin_layout Standard
6991 makes the label emphasized and
7000 \begin_layout Standard
7001 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7009 When you change the label of a list level, it will be used for all following
7010 lists until you change the definition.
7018 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7020 \begin_inset Index idx
7023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7024 Lists ! Enumerate ! Resumed
7032 \begin_layout Standard
7033 Enumerations can be resumed after intermediate paragraphs:
7036 \begin_layout Enumerate
7037 \begin_inset Argument 1
7040 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7044 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7059 \begin_inset Note Note
7062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7063 goes back to default numbering
7071 \begin_layout Enumerate
7075 \begin_layout Standard
7079 \begin_layout Enumerate-Resume
7083 \begin_layout Standard
7084 To resume an enumeration, use the style
7089 Its numbering appears in blue within \SpecialChar LyX
7090 to indicate that it is a resumed
7091 list and that the numbering will not be correct in \SpecialChar LyX
7092 , but in the output.
7095 \begin_layout Standard
7096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
7099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7104 If there is no previous enumeration to resume, you will get a \SpecialChar LaTeX
7113 \begin_layout Standard
7114 Perhaps you might want to resume the list with a different number from the
7116 Or you want to start a new enumeration with a defined number.
7117 This is possible by adding an optional argument to the first list item
7118 of a normal enumeration.
7119 There, insert the command
7122 \begin_layout Standard
7128 \begin_layout Standard
7133 is the number with which you want to resume the list.
7137 \begin_layout Enumerate
7141 \begin_layout Enumerate
7145 \begin_layout Standard
7146 Enumeration starting at a given value:
7149 \begin_layout Enumerate
7150 \begin_inset Argument 1
7153 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7157 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7169 This enumeration starts at 4
7172 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7174 \begin_inset Index idx
7177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7186 \begin_layout Standard
7187 In some cases you might want less or more vertical space between the items
7189 For example if the default space is too much in your opinion in this case:
7192 \begin_layout Itemize
7196 \begin_layout Itemize
7197 with standard spacing
7200 \begin_layout Standard
7201 You can decrease the space by adding an optional argument to the first item
7203 Add there the command
7207 to get no additional list space like in this example:
7210 \begin_layout Itemize
7211 \begin_inset Argument 1
7214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7233 \begin_layout Itemize
7237 \begin_layout Itemize
7241 \begin_layout Standard
7242 To add space you can use several other commands provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7249 \begin_inset Index idx
7252 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7254 -packages ! enumitem
7260 For more information see its documentation,
7261 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7270 \begin_layout Standard
7271 There are also many commands available to change the horizontal spacing
7273 Here is an example where the indentation was changed to that of the paragraphs
7274 in the document and the label separation was set to 2
7275 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
7278 cm so that the number is in the page margin:
7281 \begin_layout Enumerate
7282 \begin_inset Argument 1
7285 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7293 parindent, labelsep=2cm
7306 \begin_layout Enumerate
7307 with negative indentation
7310 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7311 Further Customization
7312 \begin_inset Index idx
7315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7316 Lists ! Customization
7324 \begin_layout Standard
7325 You can also change the style of description lists.
7329 \begin_layout Standard
7335 \begin_layout Standard
7336 changes the description label font, the command
7339 \begin_layout Standard
7345 \begin_layout Standard
7346 sets the list style.
7349 \begin_layout Standard
7350 An example where the command
7353 \begin_layout Standard
7358 itshape, style=nextline
7361 \begin_layout Standard
7365 \begin_layout Description
7367 \begin_inset space ~
7371 \begin_inset Argument 1
7374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7380 labelindent=0pt, labelsep=1cm, font=
7382 itshape, style=nextline
7392 Ionizing radiation consists of particles or electromagnetic waves that are
7393 energetic enough to detach electrons from atoms or molecules, therefore
7397 \begin_layout Description
7399 \begin_inset space ~
7402 counting: In computer science, reference counting is a technique of storing
7403 the number of references, pointers, or handles to a resource such as an
7404 object, block of memory, disk space or other resource.
7407 \begin_layout Standard
7408 There are many more commands and features provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
7414 \begin_inset Index idx
7417 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7419 -packages ! enumitem
7425 For more information see its documentation
7426 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
7435 \begin_layout Subsection
7437 \begin_inset Index idx
7440 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7449 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7451 \begin_inset space ~
7454 Address: An Overview
7457 \begin_layout Standard
7458 Although \SpecialChar LyX
7459 has document classes for letters, we've also created two paragraph
7467 \begin_inset space ~
7473 To use the letter class, you need to use specific paragraph environments
7474 in a specific order, otherwise \SpecialChar LaTeX
7475 gags on the document.
7476 In contrast, you can use the
7483 \begin_inset space ~
7488 paragraph environments anywhere with no problem.
7489 You can even nest them inside other environments, though you can't nest
7493 \begin_layout Standard
7494 Of course, you're not limited to using
7501 \begin_inset space ~
7510 \begin_inset space ~
7515 , in particular, is useful for creating article titles like those used in
7516 some European academic papers.
7519 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7521 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7523 name "sec:Address-Usage"
7530 \begin_layout Standard
7535 environment formats text in the style of an address, which is also used
7536 for the opening and signature in some countries.
7540 \begin_inset space ~
7545 environment formats text in the style of a right-justified address, which
7546 is used for the sender's address and today's date in some countries.
7547 Here's an example of each:
7550 \begin_layout Right Address
7552 \begin_inset Newline newline
7556 \begin_inset Newline newline
7560 \begin_inset Newline newline
7563 When is it? What is today?
7566 \begin_layout Standard
7570 \begin_inset space ~
7576 Notice that the lines all have the same left margin, which \SpecialChar LyX
7578 the largest block of text on a single line.
7579 Here's an example of the
7586 \begin_layout Address
7588 \begin_inset Newline newline
7591 Where do I send this
7592 \begin_inset Newline newline
7595 Your post office and country
7598 \begin_layout Standard
7599 As you can see, both
7606 \begin_inset space ~
7611 add extra space between themselves and the next paragraph.
7616 in either of these environments, \SpecialChar LyX
7617 resets the nesting depth and sets the
7623 This makes sense, since
7631 function, and the individual lines of an address are not paragraphs.
7632 Thus, you have to use
7639 arg "newline-insert newline"
7644 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
7645 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
7647 \begin_inset space ~
7651 \begin_inset space ~
7656 ) to start a new line in an
7663 \begin_inset space ~
7671 \begin_layout Subsection
7675 \begin_layout Standard
7676 Most academic writing begins with an abstract and ends with a bibliography
7677 or list of references.
7679 contains paragraph environments for both of these.
7682 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7684 \begin_inset Index idx
7687 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7696 \begin_layout Standard
7701 environment is used for the abstract of an article.
7702 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7703 only use it at the beginning of the document, after the title.
7704 Also, don't bother trying to nest
7718 environment is only useful in the article and report document classes.
7719 The book document classes ignores the
7723 completely, and it's utterly silly to use
7727 in a letter document class.
7730 \begin_layout Standard
7735 environment does several things for you.
7736 First, it puts the centered label
7737 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7741 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7745 The label and the text of the abstract are separated by some extra vertical
7747 Second, it typesets everything in a smaller font, just as you'd expect.
7748 Lastly, it adds a bit of extra vertical space between the abstract and
7749 the subsequent text.
7750 Well, that's how it will appear on the \SpecialChar LyX
7752 The actual appearance in the output depends on the document class you are
7756 \begin_layout Standard
7757 Starting a new paragraph by entering
7761 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7762 The new paragraph will still be in the
7767 So, you will have to change the paragraph environment yourself when you
7768 finish entering the abstract of your document.
7771 \begin_layout Standard
7772 \begin_inset Float figure
7777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7779 \begin_inset Graphics
7780 filename clipart/Abstract.pdf
7787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7788 \begin_inset Caption Standard
7790 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7791 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7793 name "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7814 \begin_layout Standard
7815 We would love to demonstrate the
7819 environment, but since this document is in the
7820 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7824 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7827 class, we can't do this.
7828 We inserted it therefore as figure
7829 \begin_inset space ~
7833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7835 reference "fig:Paragraph-in-the"
7840 If you have never heard of an
7841 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7848 before, you can safely ignore this environment.
7851 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7853 \begin_inset Index idx
7856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7863 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7865 name "subsec:Biblio_environment"
7872 \begin_layout Standard
7877 environment is used to list references.
7878 Technically, you could use this environment anywhere, but you really should
7879 only use it at the end of the document.
7891 \begin_layout Standard
7892 When you first open a
7896 environment, \SpecialChar LyX
7897 adds a large vertical space, followed by the heading
7898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
7910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
7913 depending on the document class.
7914 The heading is in a large boldface font.
7915 Each paragraph of the
7919 environment is a bibliography entry.
7924 does not reset the paragraph environment.
7925 Each new paragraph is still in the
7932 \begin_layout Standard
7933 There is another, usually better way to include references in your document
7934 by using a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
7936 For more information on that, and for a detailed description of \SpecialChar LyX
7938 handling, have a look at section
7939 \begin_inset space ~
7943 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
7945 reference "sec:Bibliography"
7952 \begin_layout Subsection
7953 Special Environments
7956 \begin_layout Standard
7958 provides two environments that can be used to emulate the behavior of a
7959 computer console/terminal and a typewriter.
7962 \begin_layout Subsubsection
7967 \begin_inset Index idx
7970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
7978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
7980 name "subsec:LyX-Code"
7987 \begin_layout Standard
7993 environment is a \SpecialChar LyX
7995 It type-sets text in a typewriter-style font.
8000 key as a fixed whitespace.
8004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8017 \begin_inset space ~
8022 instead of an end-of-word marker.
8040 * are the only environments in which you can type multiple whitespaces in
8043 If you need to insert blank lines, you will still need to use
8046 arg "newline-insert newline"
8063 does not reset the paragraph environment.
8064 So, when you finish using the
8069 environment, you will need to change the paragraph environment yourself.
8070 Also, you can nest the
8075 environment inside of others.
8078 \begin_layout Standard
8079 There are a few quirks with this environment:
8082 \begin_layout Itemize
8086 arg "newline-insert newline"
8089 at the beginning of a new paragraph (i.
8090 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
8094 \begin_inset space \space{}
8104 arg "newline-insert newline"
8110 \begin_layout Itemize
8114 arg "newline-insert newline"
8124 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
8130 \begin_layout Itemize
8131 You cannot have an empty paragraph or an empty line.
8132 You must put at least one
8136 in any line you want blank.
8137 Otherwise, \SpecialChar LaTeX
8141 \begin_layout Itemize
8142 You cannot get the typewriter double quotes by typing
8146 since that will insert
8151 You get the typewriter double quotes with
8154 arg "self-insert \""
8160 \begin_layout Standard
8164 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8168 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8172 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8176 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8180 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8181 printf("Hello World!
8186 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8190 \begin_layout LyX-Code
8194 \begin_layout Standard
8195 This is just the standard
8196 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8200 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8207 \begin_layout Standard
8213 has one purpose: to typeset code, such as program source, shell scripts
8215 Use it only in those very special cases where you need to generate text
8216 as if you used a typewriter.
8217 \begin_inset Index idx
8220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8221 Paragraph environments|)
8226 For longer parts of programming code, use the listings inset that is described
8229 Program Code Listings
8234 \begin_inset space ~
8242 \begin_layout Subsubsection
8246 \begin_inset Index idx
8249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8258 \begin_layout Standard
8263 environment is similar to the
8268 environment with the difference that its content will be treated like a
8269 computer console text.
8274 does therefore not have paragraphs so that
8288 key is treated like a normal space in text (not as a protected space) and
8289 you can have empty lines.
8302 \begin_layout Itemize
8303 have a certain language and a text style
8306 \begin_layout Itemize
8307 contain hyperlinks, boxes, foot- and margin notes, notes, math, citations,
8308 index- and nomenclature entries, labels, tables, graphics, listings, floats
8309 and \SpecialChar TeX
8313 \begin_layout Standard
8314 Because of these properties
8318 works like a typewriter.
8322 \begin_layout Verbatim
8326 \begin_layout Verbatim
8329 The following 2 lines are empty:
8332 \begin_layout Verbatim
8336 \begin_layout Verbatim
8340 \begin_layout Verbatim
8341 Almost everything is allowed in Verbatim:"%&$§#~'`
8346 \begin_layout Standard
8351 environment is identical to
8355 with the difference that spaces appear in the output as the character '
8356 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
8363 \begin_layout Verbatim*
8367 \begin_layout Section
8368 Nesting Environments
8369 \begin_inset Index idx
8372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8373 Nesting ! Environments
8379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
8388 \begin_layout Subsection
8392 \begin_layout Standard
8394 treats text as a unified block with a particular context and specific propertie
8396 This allows you to create blocks that inherit some of the properties of
8398 For example you have three main points in an outline, but point #2 also
8400 In other words, you have a list inside of another list, with the inner
8402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8412 \begin_layout Enumerate
8416 \begin_layout Enumerate
8421 \begin_layout Enumerate
8425 \begin_layout Enumerate
8430 \begin_layout Enumerate
8434 \begin_layout Standard
8435 You put a list inside a list by nesting one list inside the other.
8436 Nesting an environment is quite simple: Select
8438 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
8440 \begin_inset space ~
8444 \begin_inset space ~
8452 \begin_inset space ~
8456 \begin_inset space ~
8461 to change the nesting depth (the status bar will tell you how far you are
8463 Instead of the menu, you can also use the toolbar buttons
8466 arg "depth-increment"
8472 arg "depth-decrement"
8486 arg "depth-increment"
8492 arg "depth-decrement"
8496 The change will work on the current selection, if you have made one (allowing
8497 you to change the nesting of several paragraphs at once), or the current
8501 \begin_layout Standard
8502 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
8503 only changes the nesting depth if it can.
8504 If it is invalid to do so, nothing happens if you try to change the depth.
8505 Additionally, if you change the depth of one paragraph, it affects the
8506 depth of every paragraph nested inside of it.
8509 \begin_layout Standard
8510 Nesting isn't limited to lists.
8512 , you can nest just about anything inside anything else, as you're about
8514 This is the real power of nesting paragraph environments.
8517 \begin_layout Subsection
8518 What You Can and Can't Nest
8521 \begin_layout Standard
8522 Before we fire a list of paragraph environments at you, we need to tell
8523 you a little bit more about how nesting works.
8526 \begin_layout Standard
8527 The question of nesting a paragraph environment is a bit more complicated
8528 than a simple yes or no.
8529 There are three types of paragraph environments:
8532 \begin_layout Itemize
8533 Completely unnestable
8536 \begin_layout Itemize
8537 Fully nestable, you can nest them inside things and you can also nest other
8541 \begin_layout Itemize
8542 A third type, you can nest them into other environments, but you can't nest
8546 \begin_layout Standard
8547 Here's a list of the three types of nesting behavior, and which paragraph
8548 environments have them:
8551 \begin_layout Description
8552 Unnestable Can't nest them.
8553 Can't nest into them.
8557 \begin_layout Itemize
8563 \begin_layout Itemize
8569 \begin_layout Itemize
8575 \begin_layout Itemize
8581 \begin_layout Itemize
8588 \begin_layout Description
8590 \begin_inset space ~
8593 Nestable You can nest them.
8594 You can nest other things into them.
8598 \begin_layout Itemize
8604 \begin_layout Itemize
8610 \begin_layout Itemize
8616 \begin_layout Itemize
8622 \begin_layout Itemize
8628 \begin_layout Itemize
8634 \begin_layout Itemize
8640 \begin_layout Itemize
8647 \begin_layout Itemize
8653 \begin_layout Itemize
8660 \begin_layout Description
8661 Nestable-Inside You can nest them inside other things.
8662 You can't nest anything into them.
8666 \begin_layout Itemize
8672 \begin_layout Itemize
8678 \begin_layout Itemize
8684 \begin_layout Itemize
8690 \begin_layout Itemize
8696 \begin_layout Itemize
8702 \begin_layout Itemize
8708 \begin_layout Itemize
8714 \begin_layout Itemize
8720 \begin_layout Itemize
8726 \begin_layout Itemize
8732 \begin_layout Itemize
8738 \begin_layout Itemize
8744 \begin_layout Itemize
8748 \begin_inset space ~
8754 \begin_layout Itemize
8761 \begin_layout Standard
8762 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8770 Although it is possible, for example, to nest numbered section headings
8780 \begin_inset space ~
8783 into lists, it is highly recommended not to do this because the aim is to
8784 create well-structured documents following typesetting guidelines whereas
8785 nested section headings violate this.
8793 \begin_layout Subsection
8794 Nesting Other Things: Tables, Math, Floats, etc.
8795 \begin_inset Index idx
8798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8799 Nesting ! Tables etc.
8807 \begin_layout Standard
8808 There are several things that aren't paragraph environments, but which are
8809 affected by nesting anyhow.
8813 \begin_layout Itemize
8817 \begin_layout Itemize
8821 \begin_layout Itemize
8825 \begin_layout Standard
8827 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
8830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8835 Figures and tables in
8839 are not affected by this.
8844 Have a look at section
8845 \begin_inset space ~
8849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
8851 reference "sec:Floats"
8855 for more information about
8862 \begin_layout Standard
8864 can treat these three objects as either a word or as a paragraph.
8865 If a figure, table, or an equation is inline, it goes wherever the paragraph
8869 \begin_layout Standard
8870 On the other hand, if you have an equation, figure or table in a
8871 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8875 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8878 of its own, it behaves just like a
8879 \begin_inset Quotes eld
8883 \begin_inset Quotes erd
8886 paragraph environment.
8887 You can nest it into any environment, but you obviously can't nest anything
8891 \begin_layout Standard
8892 Here's an example with a table:
8895 \begin_layout Enumerate
8900 \begin_layout Enumerate
8901 This is (a) and it's nested.
8905 \begin_layout Standard
8906 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
8912 \begin_layout Standard
8914 \begin_inset Tabular
8915 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
8916 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
8917 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8918 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
8920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8938 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8941 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8958 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
8961 \begin_layout Plain Layout
8976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
8979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9002 \begin_layout Standard
9003 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9010 \begin_layout Enumerate
9012 The table is actually nested inside (a).
9016 \begin_layout Enumerate
9020 \begin_layout Standard
9021 If we hadn't nested the table at all, the list would look like this:
9024 \begin_layout Enumerate
9029 \begin_layout Enumerate
9030 This is (a) and it's nested.
9034 \begin_layout Standard
9035 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9041 \begin_layout Standard
9043 \begin_inset Tabular
9044 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9045 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9046 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9047 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9067 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9087 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9090 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9131 \begin_layout Standard
9132 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9138 \begin_layout Enumerate
9145 In fact, it's not nested at all.
9148 \begin_layout Enumerate
9152 \begin_layout Standard
9153 Notice how item (b) is not only no longer nested, but is also the first
9157 \begin_layout Standard
9158 There's another trap you can fall into: Nesting the table, but not going
9161 then turns anything after the table into a new sublist.
9164 \begin_layout Enumerate
9169 \begin_layout Enumerate
9170 This is (a) and it's nested.
9173 \begin_layout Standard
9174 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9180 \begin_layout Standard
9182 \begin_inset Tabular
9183 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
9184 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
9185 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9186 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
9188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9206 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9209 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9226 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
9229 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9244 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
9247 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9271 \begin_layout Standard
9272 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
9278 \begin_layout Enumerate
9280 The table is actually nested inside Item One, but
9287 \begin_layout Enumerate
9291 \begin_layout Standard
9292 As you can see, item (b) turned into the first item of a new list, but a
9298 The same thing would have happened to a figure or an equation.
9299 So, if you nest tables, figures or equations, make sure you go to the right
9303 \begin_layout Subsection
9304 Usage and General Features
9307 \begin_layout Standard
9308 Speaking of levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9309 can perform up to a six-fold nesting.
9311 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9315 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9318 is the innermost possible depth.
9319 Here's an example to illustrate what we mean:
9322 \begin_layout Enumerate
9323 level #1 – outermost
9327 \begin_layout Enumerate
9332 \begin_layout Enumerate
9337 \begin_layout Enumerate
9342 \begin_layout Itemize
9347 \begin_layout Itemize
9356 \begin_layout Standard
9357 There are two exceptions to the six-fold nesting limit, and you can see
9358 both of them in the example.
9359 Unlike the other fully-nestable environments, you can only perform a four-fold
9369 For example, if we tried to nest another
9374 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9378 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9381 , we would get errors.
9384 \begin_layout Subsection
9386 \begin_inset Index idx
9389 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9398 \begin_layout Standard
9399 The best way to explain just what you can do with nesting is by illustration.
9400 We have several examples of nested environments.
9401 In them, we explain how we created the example, so that you can reproduce
9405 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9406 Example 1: The Six-fold Way and Mixed Nesting
9409 \begin_layout Labeling
9410 \labelwidthstring MMM
9411 #1-a This is the outermost level.
9420 \begin_layout Labeling
9421 \labelwidthstring MMM
9422 #2-a This is level #2.
9423 We created it by using
9426 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9432 arg "depth-increment"
9439 \begin_layout Labeling
9440 \labelwidthstring MMM
9441 #3-a This is level #3.
9442 This time, we just enter
9449 arg "depth-increment"
9453 We could have also created it the same way as we did the previous level,
9457 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9463 arg "depth-increment"
9470 \begin_layout Standard
9475 environment, nested inside of
9476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9484 So, it's at level #4.
9485 We did this by entering
9488 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9494 arg "depth-increment"
9497 , then changing the paragraph environment to
9502 Do this to create list items with more than one paragraph — it also works
9518 \begin_layout Standard
9523 paragraph, also at level #4, made with just a
9526 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9532 \begin_layout Labeling
9533 \labelwidthstring MMM
9534 #4-a This is level #4.
9538 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9541 and changed the paragraph environment back to
9546 Remember — we can't nest anything inside a
9550 environment, which is why we're still at level #4.
9555 keep nesting things inside
9556 \begin_inset Quotes eld
9560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
9567 \begin_layout Labeling
9568 \labelwidthstring MMM
9569 #5-a This is level #5\SpecialChar ldots
9574 \begin_layout Labeling
9575 \labelwidthstring MMM
9576 #6-a \SpecialChar ldots
9577 and this is level #6.
9578 By now, you should know how we made these two.
9582 \begin_layout Labeling
9583 \labelwidthstring MMM
9584 #5-b Back to level #5.
9588 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9594 arg "depth-decrement"
9601 \begin_layout Labeling
9602 \labelwidthstring MMM
9606 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9612 arg "depth-decrement"
9615 , we're back at level #4.
9619 \begin_layout Labeling
9620 \labelwidthstring MMM
9621 #3-b Back to level #3.
9622 By now it should be obvious how we did this.
9626 \begin_layout Labeling
9627 \labelwidthstring MMM
9628 #2-b Back to level #2.
9633 \begin_layout Labeling
9634 \labelwidthstring MMM
9635 #1-b And last, back to the outermost level, #1.
9636 After this sentence, we will enter
9640 and change the paragraph environment back to
9647 \begin_layout Standard
9648 We could have also used the
9664 environment in place of the
9669 The example would have worked exactly the same.
9672 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9673 Example 2: Inheritance
9676 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9677 This is the LyX-Code environment, at level #1, the outermost
9680 \begin_layout LyX-Code
9689 arg "depth-increment"
9693 \begin_inset Newline newline
9696 which, we will change to the
9704 \begin_layout Enumerate
9709 environment, at level #2.
9712 \begin_layout Enumerate
9713 Notice how the nested
9717 not only inherits its margins from its parent environment (
9721 ), but also inherits its font and spacing!
9725 \begin_layout Standard
9726 We ended this example by entering
9731 After that, we needed to reset the paragraph environment to
9735 and reset the nesting depth by using
9738 arg "depth-decrement"
9744 \begin_layout Subsubsection
9745 Example 3: Labels, Levels, and the
9754 \begin_inset Argument 1
9757 \begin_layout Plain Layout
9758 Example #3: Labels, Levels and other list environments
9766 \begin_layout Enumerate
9767 This is level #1, in an
9771 paragraph environment.
9772 We're actually going to nest a bunch of these.
9776 \begin_layout Enumerate
9781 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9787 arg "depth-increment"
9791 Now, what happens if we nest an
9795 environment inside of this one? It will be at level #3, but what will its
9796 label be? An asterisk?
9800 \begin_layout Itemize
9810 environment, even though it's at level #3.
9811 So, its label is a bullet.
9812 (We got here by using
9815 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9821 arg "depth-increment"
9824 , then changing the environment to
9832 \begin_layout Itemize
9833 Here's level #4, produced using
9836 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9842 arg "depth-increment"
9846 We will do that again\SpecialChar ldots
9851 \begin_layout Enumerate
9854 This time, however, we also changed the paragraph environment back to
9859 Notice the type of numbering, it is
9863 , because we are in the
9871 environment (that is, it is an
9886 \begin_layout Enumerate
9891 change the paragraph environment, but decrease the nesting depth? What
9892 type of numbering does \SpecialChar LyX
9896 \begin_layout Enumerate
9897 Oh, as if you couldn't guess by now, we're just using
9900 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9903 to keep the current environment and depth but create a new item.
9906 \begin_layout Enumerate
9910 arg "depth-decrement"
9913 to decrease the depth after the next
9916 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9923 \begin_layout Enumerate
9925 Look what type of label \SpecialChar LyX
9930 \begin_layout Enumerate
9932 Even though we've changed levels, \SpecialChar LyX
9933 is still using a lowercase Roman numeral
9937 \begin_layout Enumerate
9938 Because, even though the nesting depth has changed, the paragraph is
9947 Notice, however, that \SpecialChar LyX
9952 reset the counter for the label.
9956 \begin_layout Enumerate
9960 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9966 arg "depth-decrement"
9969 sequence, and we're back to level #2.
9970 This time, we not only changed the nesting depth, but we also moved back
9971 into the twofold-nested
9979 \begin_layout Enumerate
9980 The same thing happens if we do another
9983 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
9989 arg "depth-decrement"
9992 sequence and return to level #1, the outermost level.
9995 \begin_layout Standard
9996 Lastly, we reset the environment to
10001 As you can see, the level number doesn't correspond to what type of labeling
10012 The number of other
10016 environments surrounding it determines what kind of label \SpecialChar LyX
10023 The same rule applies for the
10027 environment, as well.
10030 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10031 Example 4: Going Bonkers
10034 \begin_layout Enumerate
10035 We're going to go totally nuts now.
10036 We will not nest as deep as in the other examples, nor will we go into
10037 the same detail with how we did it.
10046 \begin_layout Standard
10054 arg "depth-increment"
10061 : level #2) We will stick an encapsulated description of how we created
10062 the example in parentheses someplace.
10063 For example, the two key bindings are how we changed the depth.
10064 The environment name is the name of the current environment.
10065 Either before or after this, we will put in the level.
10069 \begin_layout Enumerate
10074 : level #1) This is the next item in the list.
10078 \begin_layout Verse
10079 Now we will add verse.
10080 \begin_inset Newline newline
10083 It will get much worse.
10084 \begin_inset Newline newline
10094 arg "depth-increment"
10104 \begin_layout Verse
10105 Fiddle dee, Fiddle doo.
10106 \begin_inset Newline newline
10109 Bippitey boppitey boo!
10110 \begin_inset Newline newline
10116 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10124 \begin_layout Verse
10125 Here comes a table:
10129 \begin_layout Standard
10130 \begin_inset VSpace 0.3cm
10136 \begin_layout Standard
10138 \begin_inset Tabular
10139 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
10140 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
10141 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10142 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
10144 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
10147 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10182 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
10185 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10200 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
10203 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10227 \begin_layout Verse
10231 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10241 arg "depth-increment"
10247 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10253 \begin_inset Newline newline
10261 arg "depth-decrement"
10268 \begin_layout Enumerate
10273 : level #1) This is another item.
10274 Note that selecting a
10278 resets the nesting depth to level #1, so we increased the nesting depth
10279 3 times to put the table inside the
10287 \begin_layout Quotation
10288 We're now ending the
10292 list and changing to
10297 We're still at level #1.
10298 We want to show you some of the things you can do by mixing environments.
10299 The next set of paragraphs is a
10300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10307 We will nest both the
10314 \begin_inset space ~
10319 environments inside of this one, then use another nested
10323 for the letter body.
10327 arg "paragraph-break inverse"
10330 to preserve the depth.
10331 Remember that you need to use
10334 arg "newline-insert newline"
10337 to create multiple lines inside the
10344 \begin_inset space ~
10354 \begin_layout Right Address
10356 \begin_inset Newline newline
10359 Moosegroin, MT 00100
10360 \begin_inset Newline newline
10366 \begin_layout Address
10368 \begin_inset space ~
10374 \begin_layout Quotation
10375 We regret to inform you that we cannot fill your order for 50
10376 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10379 L of compressed methane gas due to circumstances beyond our control.
10380 Unfortunately, several of our cows have mysteriously exploded, creating
10381 a backlog in our orders for methane.
10382 We will place your name on the waiting list and try to fill your order
10383 as soon as possible.
10384 In the meantime, we thank you for your patience.
10387 \begin_layout Quotation
10388 We do, however, now have a special on beef.
10389 If you are interested, please return the enclosed pricing and order form
10390 with your order, along with payment.
10393 \begin_layout Quotation
10394 We thank you again for your patience.
10397 \begin_layout Address
10399 \begin_inset Newline newline
10406 \begin_layout Quotation
10407 That ends that example!
10410 \begin_layout Standard
10411 As you can see, nesting environments in \SpecialChar LyX
10412 gives you a lot of power with just
10414 We could have easily nested an
10435 You have a huge variety of options at your disposal.
10438 \begin_layout Subsection
10440 \begin_inset Index idx
10443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10444 Nesting ! Separation
10450 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10452 name "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
10459 \begin_layout Standard
10460 It is sometimes necessary to have two consecutive environments of the same
10462 For example you need two different enumerations:
10465 \begin_layout Enumerate
10470 \begin_layout Enumerate
10475 \begin_layout Enumerate
10479 \begin_layout Standard
10480 \begin_inset Separator plain
10486 \begin_layout Itemize
10492 \begin_layout Standard
10493 \begin_inset Separator parbreak
10499 \begin_layout Enumerate
10503 \begin_layout Enumerate
10507 \begin_layout Enumerate
10511 \begin_layout Standard
10512 To split an existing list into two lists, set the cursor at the end of a
10513 list item and use the menu
10515 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10516 Start New Environment
10519 This inserts a plain separator (red line in \SpecialChar LyX
10520 ) and behind it the new list.
10523 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
10524 Start New Parent Environment
10526 only appears if the item is nested.
10527 It does not only separate the list but also creates a new one outside the
10531 \begin_layout Standard
10532 By right-clicking on a separator one can change it into a paragraph separator
10533 (red arrow in LyX).
10534 The difference between both separator types is that the plain separator
10535 only splits the list and not the current paragraph.
10538 \begin_layout Standard
10539 In general, you get an environment separator when you press
10542 arg "paragraph-break"
10549 environment immediately after a non-Standard one.
10552 \begin_layout Section
10553 Spacing, pagination and line breaks
10554 \begin_inset Index idx
10557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10566 \begin_layout Standard
10567 What is a space? While you might be used to pressing the space key anytime
10568 you want to separate two words in ordinary word processors, \SpecialChar LyX
10570 more spaces: spaces of different widths and spaces which can or cannot
10571 be broken at the end of a line.
10572 The following sections will show you some examples where those spaces are
10576 \begin_layout Subsection
10578 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10580 name "subsec:Protected-Space"
10585 \begin_inset Index idx
10588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10597 \begin_layout Standard
10598 The protected space: It is used to tell \SpecialChar LyX
10599 (and \SpecialChar LaTeX
10600 ) not to break the line at
10602 This may be necessary to avoid unlucky line breaks, like in:
10605 \begin_layout Quote
10606 Further documentation is given in section
10607 \begin_inset Newline newline
10611 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10613 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10621 \begin_layout Standard
10622 Obviously, it would be a good thing to put a protected space between
10623 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10631 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10635 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10637 reference "sec:Bibliography"
10642 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10646 A protected space is set with
10648 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10649 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10651 \begin_inset space ~
10659 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
10665 \begin_layout Subsection
10667 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10669 name "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
10674 \begin_inset Index idx
10677 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10678 Spacing ! Horizontal
10686 \begin_layout Standard
10687 All horizontal spaces can be inserted with the menu
10689 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10690 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10694 The length units are listed in Appendix
10695 \begin_inset space ~
10699 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10701 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
10708 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10712 name "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
10717 \begin_inset Index idx
10720 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10721 Spaces ! Inter-word
10729 \begin_layout Standard
10730 With the introduction of typewriters, it became conventional in some countries
10731 to type two spaces after a period to mimic the wider spaces used by typesetters
10732 at the ends of sentences.
10733 There is no need to do this as \SpecialChar LyX
10734 automatically takes care about this.
10735 However, you do not want an end of sentence space after an abbreviation
10736 followed by a period; see section
10737 \begin_inset space ~
10741 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
10743 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
10748 To insert a normal space, select
10750 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10751 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10753 \begin_inset space ~
10761 arg "space-insert normal"
10767 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10769 \begin_inset CommandInset label
10771 name "subsec:Thin-Space"
10776 \begin_inset Index idx
10779 \begin_layout Plain Layout
10788 \begin_layout Standard
10790 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10794 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10797 is a blank which has half the size of a normal space (and it is also
10798 \begin_inset Quotes eld
10802 \begin_inset Quotes erd
10806 The typographical conventions in a lot of languages propose the use of
10807 thin spaces in cases where normal spaces would be too wide, for instance,
10808 inside abbreviations:
10811 \begin_layout Quote
10813 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10817 Knuth has developed our beloved typesetting program.
10820 \begin_layout Standard
10821 or between values and units.
10822 Compare for example this:
10823 \begin_inset Newline newline
10827 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10831 \begin_inset Newline newline
10834 10 kg (normal space
10837 \begin_layout Standard
10838 You can insert thin spaces with the menu
10840 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
10841 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
10843 \begin_inset space ~
10851 arg "space-insert thin"
10857 \begin_layout Subsubsection
10861 \begin_layout Standard
10862 You can also insert the following space types:
10865 \begin_layout Description
10867 \begin_inset space ~
10871 \begin_inset space ~
10874 space A line with a
10875 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10879 \begin_inset space \negthinspace{}
10883 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10886 negative thin space between the arrows.
10889 \begin_layout Description
10891 \begin_inset space ~
10895 \begin_inset space ~
10898 space A line with a
10899 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10903 \begin_inset space \negmedspace{}
10907 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10910 negative medium space between the arrows.
10913 \begin_layout Description
10915 \begin_inset space ~
10919 \begin_inset space ~
10922 space A line with a
10923 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10927 \begin_inset space \negthickspace{}
10931 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10934 negative thick space between the arrows.
10937 \begin_layout Description
10939 \begin_inset space ~
10943 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10947 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10951 \begin_inset space \enskip{}
10955 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10959 \begin_inset space ~
10963 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10966 em) space between the arrows.
10969 \begin_layout Description
10971 \begin_inset space ~
10975 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10979 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
10983 \begin_inset space \quad{}
10987 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
10991 \begin_inset space ~
10995 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
10998 em) space between the arrows.
11001 \begin_layout Description
11003 \begin_inset space ~
11007 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11011 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11015 \begin_inset space \qquad{}
11019 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11023 \begin_inset space ~
11027 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11030 em) space between the arrows.
11033 \begin_layout Description
11035 \begin_inset space ~
11039 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11043 \begin_inset space \hspace{}
11048 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11052 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11055 cm space between the arrows.
11058 \begin_layout Standard
11060 \begin_inset space ~
11064 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11066 reference "tab:Width-of-the"
11070 lists the different space sizes.
11073 \begin_layout Standard
11074 \begin_inset Float table
11079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11080 \begin_inset Caption Standard
11082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11083 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11085 name "tab:Width-of-the"
11089 Width of the different horizontal spaces.
11097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11099 \begin_inset Tabular
11100 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
11101 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
11102 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11103 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
11105 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11108 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11116 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11119 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11129 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11132 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11138 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11141 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11143 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11167 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11177 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11186 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11189 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11191 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11201 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11204 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11210 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11215 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11219 \begin_inset Formula $\thinspace=\thinspace$
11223 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11233 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11242 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11245 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11247 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11257 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11260 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11271 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11281 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11284 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11286 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11309 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11312 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11314 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11327 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11337 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
11340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11342 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
11353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11355 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
11376 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11378 \begin_inset Index idx
11381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11390 \begin_layout Standard
11391 Horizontal fills (HFills) are a special \SpecialChar LyX
11392 feature for adding extra space
11393 in a uniform fashion.
11394 An HFill is actually a variable length space, whose length always equals
11395 the remaining space between the left and right margins.
11396 If there is more than one HFill on a line, they divide the available space
11397 equally between themselves.
11400 \begin_layout Standard
11401 Here are a few examples of what you can do with them:
11404 \begin_layout Quote
11406 This is on the left side
11407 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11410 This is on the right
11413 \begin_layout Quote
11416 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11420 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11426 \begin_layout Quote
11429 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11433 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11437 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11443 \begin_layout Standard
11444 That was an example in the
11450 \begin_inset Formula $\to$
11454 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
11458 \begin_inset Formula $\gets$
11461 is one in a standard paragraph.
11462 It may or may not be apparent in the printed text, but it
11466 sitting in-between the two arrows.
11469 \begin_layout Standard
11470 HFills can be made visible when you choose one of the
11473 \begin_inset space ~
11478 s in the space dialog: The following patterns are available:
11481 \begin_layout Standard
11483 \begin_inset space \dotfill{}
11487 \begin_inset space ~
11493 \begin_layout Standard
11495 \begin_inset space \hrulefill{}
11499 \begin_inset space ~
11505 \begin_layout Standard
11507 \begin_inset space \leftarrowfill{}
11511 \begin_inset space ~
11517 \begin_layout Standard
11519 \begin_inset space \rightarrowfill{}
11523 \begin_inset space ~
11529 \begin_layout Standard
11531 \begin_inset space \downbracefill{}
11535 \begin_inset space ~
11541 \begin_layout Standard
11543 \begin_inset space \upbracefill{}
11547 \begin_inset space ~
11553 \begin_layout Standard
11554 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11557 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11562 If an HFill is at the beginning of a line, and
11566 in the first line in a paragraph, \SpecialChar LyX
11568 This prevents HFills from accidentally being wrapped onto a new line.
11569 If you need space in this case anyway, set the
11573 option in the space dialog.
11581 \begin_layout Subsubsection
11583 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11585 name "subsec:Phantom-Space"
11590 \begin_inset Index idx
11593 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11602 \begin_layout Standard
11603 Sometimes you want to insert space with exactly the length of a phrase.
11604 For example, you want to create the following multiple choice question:
11607 \begin_layout Standard
11608 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11611 What is correct English?:
11612 \begin_inset Newline newline
11616 \begin_inset Newline newline
11620 \begin_inset space ~
11623 Edge would have been jumps the gun.
11624 \begin_inset Newline newline
11628 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11639 \begin_inset Newline newline
11643 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
11646 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11654 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
11660 \begin_layout Standard
11662 so that the choices appear exactly after the phrase
11663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11667 \begin_inset space ~
11671 \begin_inset space ~
11675 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11679 To get this, you can use the phantom insets available via the menu
11681 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11682 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11686 In our case insert a horizontal phantom at the beginning of the last two
11688 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11692 \begin_inset space ~
11696 \begin_inset space ~
11700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11703 into the phantom inset (note the space after
11704 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11708 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11712 A phantom insets prints only the space of its content (like a placeholder).
11713 That is why it is named
11714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
11718 \begin_inset Quotes erd
11722 The normal phantom outputs the width and height of the content as space,
11723 while the horizontal and vertical variant only outputs the corresponding
11727 \begin_layout Subsection
11729 \begin_inset CommandInset label
11731 name "subsec:Vertical-Space"
11736 \begin_inset Index idx
11739 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11748 \begin_layout Standard
11749 To add extra vertical space above or below a paragraph, use the
11751 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
11752 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
11754 \begin_inset space ~
11760 There you find the following sizes:
11763 \begin_layout Standard
11776 are \SpecialChar LaTeX
11777 sizes which depend on the font size of the document.
11782 is the skip adjusted in the dialog
11784 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
11785 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
11787 \begin_inset space ~
11793 \begin_inset Index idx
11796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11797 Document ! Settings
11802 for the paragraph separation.
11803 If you use indentation to separate paragraphs
11814 \begin_layout Standard
11820 \begin_inset Index idx
11823 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11829 is a variable space, set so that the space is maximal within one page.
11830 An example: you have only two short paragraphs on one page with a
11835 Then the first paragraph is placed at the top of the page and the second
11836 one at the bottom, because the space between them is then maximal.
11845 s: they fill the remaining vertical space on a page with blank space.
11849 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11854 s are described in section
11855 \begin_inset space ~
11859 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11861 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
11870 If there are several
11874 s on a page, they divide the remaining vertical space equally between themselves.
11875 You can therefore use
11879 s to center text on a page, or even place text 2/3 down a page.
11882 \begin_layout Standard
11887 are custom spaces in units explained in Appendix
11888 \begin_inset space ~
11892 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
11894 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
11901 \begin_layout Standard
11902 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
11905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11912 If the extra vertical space would be in the output at the top/bottom of
11913 a page, the space is only added if you have also checked the option
11925 \begin_layout Subsection
11926 Paragraph Alignment
11927 \begin_inset Index idx
11930 \begin_layout Plain Layout
11931 Paragraph ! Alignment
11939 \begin_layout Standard
11940 You can change the paragraph alignment with the
11942 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
11945 dialog (toolbar button
11948 arg "layout-paragraph"
11952 There are five possibilities:
11955 \begin_layout Itemize
11963 arg "paragraph-params \\align block"
11969 \begin_layout Itemize
11977 arg "paragraph-params \\align left"
11983 \begin_layout Itemize
11991 arg "paragraph-params \\align right"
11997 \begin_layout Itemize
12005 arg "paragraph-params \\align center"
12011 \begin_layout Itemize
12019 arg "paragraph-params \\align default"
12025 \begin_layout Standard
12026 The default in most cases is justified alignment, in which the inter-word
12027 spacing is variable and each line of a paragraph fills the region between
12028 the left and right margins.
12029 The other three alignments should be self-explanatory, and look like this:
12032 \begin_layout Standard
12034 This paragraph is right aligned,
12037 \begin_layout Standard
12039 this one is centered,
12042 \begin_layout Standard
12044 this one is left aligned.
12047 \begin_layout Subsection
12049 \begin_inset Index idx
12052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12053 Page breaks ! Forced
12059 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12061 name "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
12068 \begin_layout Standard
12069 If you don't like the way \SpecialChar LaTeX
12070 does the page breaks in your document, you can
12071 force a page break where you want one.
12072 Normally this will not be necessary, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
12073 is good at page breaking.
12074 Only if you use a lot of
12078 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
12079 's page breaking algorithm can fail.
12082 \begin_layout Standard
12083 We recommend you not to use forced page breaks until the text is finished
12084 and you have checked in the preview to see if you
12088 have to change the page breaking.
12091 \begin_layout Standard
12092 There are two types of page breaks: One that ends the page without any special
12094 This can be inserted above or below a paragraph via the menu
12096 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12097 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12099 \begin_inset space ~
12105 The second type, that is inserted via the menu
12107 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12108 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12110 \begin_inset space ~
12115 , ends a page but stretches the content of the page, so that it fills out
12117 This type is useful to avoid whitespace when a page break produces a page
12118 on which only the last few lines are absent.
12121 \begin_layout Standard
12122 You might try to use a page break to ensure that a figure or table appears
12123 at the top of a page.
12124 This is, of course, the wrong way to do it.
12126 gives you a way of automatically ensuring that your figures and tables
12127 appear at the top of a page (or the bottom, or on their own page) without
12128 having to worry about what precedes or follows your figure or table.
12130 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12132 reference "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
12136 to learn more about
12143 \begin_layout Subsubsection
12145 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12147 name "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
12152 \begin_inset Index idx
12155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12156 Page breaks ! Clear
12164 \begin_layout Standard
12165 Rather than forced page breaks where the content behind the break is placed
12166 directly on the next page, you can also clear pages while breaking them.
12167 That means that the current paragraph is terminated and everything, including
12168 unprocessed floats, from the earlier part of the document are placed after
12169 it, if necessary by adding pages.
12172 \begin_layout Standard
12173 You can insert a clear page break with the menu
12175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12176 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12178 \begin_inset space ~
12184 When you have a two-sided document like a book, you can use the menu
12186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12187 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12189 \begin_inset space ~
12193 \begin_inset space ~
12198 to insert a clear page break that assures that the next page is a right-hand
12199 page (odd-numbered), if necessary by adding a page.
12202 \begin_layout Subsection
12204 \begin_inset Index idx
12207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12214 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12216 name "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
12223 \begin_layout Standard
12224 Similar to page breaks there are two types of line breaks: one simply breaks
12226 You can force this line break within a paragraph by selecting
12228 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12229 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12231 \begin_inset space ~
12235 \begin_inset space ~
12243 arg "newline-insert newline"
12247 Another type that is inserted via the menu
12249 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12250 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12252 \begin_inset space ~
12256 \begin_inset space ~
12264 arg "newline-insert linebreak"
12267 breaks the line and stretches it so that it fills out the whole space between
12269 This is useful to avoid
12270 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12274 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12277 in justified paragraphs due to possible whitespace introduced by line breaks.
12280 \begin_layout Standard
12281 You shouldn't use forced line breaks to correct \SpecialChar LaTeX
12282 's line breaking, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
12284 very good at line breaking.
12285 There are, however, a number of situations where it is necessary to set
12286 a line break actively, for example, in a poem or for an address (see sections
12287 \begin_inset space ~
12291 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12293 reference "sec:Quote"
12298 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12300 reference "sec:Verse"
12305 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12307 reference "sec:Address-Usage"
12314 \begin_layout Subsection
12316 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12318 name "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
12323 \begin_inset Index idx
12326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12335 \begin_layout Standard
12337 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12348 \begin_layout Standard
12352 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12353 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
12355 \begin_inset space ~
12360 you can insert horizontal lines.
12361 The line offset is the vertical distance between the line and the baseline
12362 of the current text line or the paragraph.
12363 The line settings can be changed by left-clicking on the line.
12366 \begin_layout Standard
12368 \begin_inset CommandInset line
12379 \begin_layout Section
12380 Characters and Symbols
12383 \begin_layout Standard
12384 You can directly enter all characters that are available on your keyboard.
12385 You can also use special keyboard maps to be able to enter, for example,
12386 characters needed for French with an English keyboard.
12388 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12392 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12394 reference "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
12398 for information on how this is done.
12401 \begin_layout Standard
12402 For the case where you need a character that is not on your keyboard, you
12407 dialog via the menu
12409 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
12410 Special Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
12416 \begin_layout Standard
12417 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12420 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12425 Maybe not all symbols inserted with the symbols dialog can be displayed
12426 when you are using a special screen font in \SpecialChar LyX
12428 But the inserted symbols will in every case be displayed in the output.
12436 \begin_layout Section
12437 Fonts and Text Styles
12438 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12440 name "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
12447 \begin_layout Subsection
12449 \begin_inset Index idx
12452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12461 \begin_layout Standard
12462 There are two types of fonts:
12465 \begin_layout Description
12467 \begin_inset space ~
12471 \begin_inset Index idx
12474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12480 are built from outlines of the single glyphs (e.
12481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12485 characters) in the font.
12486 This means that each glyph is defined using mathematical curves that are
12487 well suited for scaling to any requested size.
12488 This mathematical definition is interpreted by the font renderer and the
12489 curve is filled out with pixels according to the size and glyph.
12490 This means that vector fonts will look pretty good in all sizes.
12491 Only at very small sizes where each pixel has to be very carefully computed
12492 to provide a good image might it be hard to provide a good rendering.
12493 \begin_inset Newline newline
12496 That could mean that one only needs to define one font size and scale them.
12497 But to achieve a better quality, many fonts define several font sizes.
12498 That improves the appearance because you need more details at large font
12499 sizes than at small ones.
12500 \begin_inset Newline newline
12514 \begin_inset space ~
12522 \begin_layout Description
12524 \begin_inset space ~
12528 \begin_inset Index idx
12531 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12537 on the other hand, are defined by bitmap graphics from the start; so they
12538 will look good at all the sizes they are meant for.
12539 However, they don't scale well, because in order to scale a glyph, each
12540 pixel is enlarged into several pixels.
12541 It is the same effect that happens if you try to enlarge a picture in an
12542 image manipulation program.
12543 In order to mitigate this effect, bitmap fonts are typically provided in
12544 several fixed sizes typically from around 8
12545 \begin_inset space ~
12548 pixels high up to 34
12549 \begin_inset space ~
12552 pixels or so high in steps according to what is believed to be useful.
12553 The advantage of bitmap fonts is that no complicated computations are necessary
12554 to display each glyph; so bitmap fonts display therefore more quickly than
12556 The disadvantage is that sizes that don't exist as fixed versions have
12557 to be scaled by doubling pixels, and thus look bad.
12558 \begin_inset Newline newline
12561 Bitmap fonts are named
12564 \begin_inset space ~
12569 in PostScript- and PDF-documents.
12572 \begin_layout Standard
12573 The result of all this is that bitmap fonts are best for the size they are
12574 designed for, while scalable fonts are good for nearly all sizes.
12575 So one needs fewer font size definitions for scalable fonts.
12576 That's the reason why nearly all text rendering and typesetting programs
12577 use scalable fonts.
12580 \begin_layout Standard
12581 To see which fonts are used in a PDF-document, look at its document properties.
12584 \begin_layout Standard
12585 Many modern typesetting and markup languages have begun to move towards
12586 specifying character styles rather than specifying a particular font.
12587 For example, instead of changing to an italicized version of the current
12588 font to emphasize text, you use an
12589 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12593 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12597 This concept fits in perfectly with \SpecialChar LyX
12599 In \SpecialChar LyX
12600 , you do things based on contexts, rather than focusing on typesetting
12604 \begin_layout Subsection
12607 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12609 name "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12616 \begin_layout Standard
12617 Traditionally, \SpecialChar LaTeX
12618 used its own fonts.
12619 That is to say, you cannot directly access the fonts installed on your
12620 operating system, but you have to use specific fonts provided by your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12623 The reason is that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12624 needs some extra information about the fonts, which
12625 have to be provided by additional files and packages.
12626 The downside of this is that your font choice is somewhat limited compared
12627 to a word processor.
12628 On the other hand this comes with the advantage that the provided fonts
12629 are generally of very good quality, and that \SpecialChar LaTeX
12630 files are very portable across
12631 different machines.
12632 Also, the range of fonts supported by traditional \SpecialChar LaTeX
12633 has increased a lot
12634 in the meantime; so you can find packages for many free and commercial
12637 supports the fonts that are under a free license via the user interface
12639 \begin_inset space ~
12643 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12645 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
12650 Other fonts are available if you enter the relevant \SpecialChar LaTeX
12651 code in the document
12652 preamble (please refer to the documentation of your desired font).
12655 \begin_layout Standard
12656 Recent developments brought some new \SpecialChar LaTeX
12657 engines that are also able directly
12658 to access fonts that are installed for your operating system, namely Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12660 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12662 Both engines are supported by \SpecialChar LyX
12664 By using them, you can theoretically use any OpenType or TrueType font
12665 that is installed on your system.
12666 The next section describes how to use these fonts.
12669 \begin_layout Standard
12670 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
12673 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12678 In practice, some fonts might fail due to bad metrics and other font deficienci
12679 es; so you might have to experiment.
12687 \begin_layout Subsection
12688 Document Font and Font size
12689 \begin_inset CommandInset label
12691 name "subsec:Document-Font"
12696 \begin_inset Index idx
12699 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12706 \begin_inset Index idx
12709 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12718 \begin_layout Standard
12719 You can set the document fonts in the
12721 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
12725 \begin_inset Index idx
12728 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12729 Document ! Settings
12739 section of the dialog, you can specify which font should be used for the
12740 three different font shapes — roman (serif),
12743 \begin_inset space ~
12752 (monospaced) — and you can specify the base font size and scaling factors
12754 \begin_inset space ~
12757 serif and typewriter fonts if this is necessary to fit with the roman font.
12760 \begin_layout Standard
12765 , you will have access to the fonts installed on your operating system.
12766 This requires that you use
12778 as the output format, i.
12779 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
12783 \begin_inset space \space{}
12786 you will have to have either Xe\SpecialChar TeX
12787 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
12788 installed (see section
12789 \begin_inset space ~
12793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
12795 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
12800 You will then not have access to \SpecialChar TeX
12802 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
12803 then lists all available fonts in each of the three lists (roman,
12805 \begin_inset space ~
12808 serif, and typewriter), since \SpecialChar LyX
12809 cannot determine the family.
12810 Also note that the output might fail with some of the listed fonts, due
12811 to the encoding of the fonts and\SpecialChar breakableslash
12814 cannot determine this in advance, so you might need to experiment.
12817 \begin_layout Standard
12818 If you use \SpecialChar TeX
12819 fonts (which is the default), the possible options for the font
12824 and a list of fonts available with your \SpecialChar LaTeX
12830 the font that is preset by the current document class is used.
12831 In most cases, this will be the standard \SpecialChar TeX
12833 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12839 \begin_inset space ~
12845 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12853 \begin_inset Quotes eld
12858 European Computer Modern
12861 \begin_inset Quotes erd
12868 ), but some classes preset different default fonts.
12871 \begin_layout Standard
12880 are bitmap fonts, they often look pixelated in PDF output, especially when
12881 you read the PDF in a zoomed size.
12885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12886 This problem does not appear if you read PDFs in
12889 \begin_inset space ~
12894 version 6 or later, because this program includes a special bitmap font
12900 To get rid of pixelated fonts, you have to use a vector font.
12901 Depending on how your document should look, you can either:
12904 \begin_layout Itemize
12908 \begin_inset space ~
12913 fonts, which is the recommended choice if you want to keep the look of
12926 \begin_inset space ~
12931 was developed for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
12932 community in order to replace
12936 as the default font.
12937 It covers a huge range of glyphs and several font shapes.
12938 Except for some details, where the appearance was improved,
12941 \begin_inset space ~
12954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
12955 One difference is improved kerning.
12963 \begin_layout Itemize
12967 \begin_inset space ~
12971 \begin_inset space ~
12976 fonts in (the rare) case that
12979 \begin_inset space ~
12984 is not available to you or does not work, and you still want to emulate
12999 Virtual means that it
13000 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13004 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13011 -glyphs from other fonts.
13012 This has the disadvantage that some characters are missing, like the French
13014 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13018 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13022 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13026 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13033 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13034 Loading the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13040 \begin_inset Index idx
13043 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13045 -packages ! aeguill
13050 with the document preamble line
13051 \begin_inset Newline newline
13058 usepackage[ec]{aeguill}
13059 \begin_inset Newline newline
13064 will fix the guillemet problem.
13069 and that accented characters are not
13073 glyph, but built of
13077 characters, the accent and the letter.
13078 Therefore you cannot search for words with accented characters in documents
13084 If you search for example for the French word
13085 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13089 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13092 in a PDF, you will not get any result, because the PDF-viewer searches
13094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13101 and not for the glyph
13102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13106 \begin_inset space ~
13110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13116 \begin_layout Itemize
13117 If you do not like the look of
13125 , you can of course select one of the other vector fonts provided, e.
13126 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13130 \begin_inset space ~
13136 \begin_inset space ~
13146 Most roman vector fonts will automatically select matching sans
13147 \begin_inset space ~
13150 serif and typewriter fonts,
13154 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13155 These are sometimes just matching other fonts (e.
13156 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13162 \begin_inset space ~
13171 for sans serif text), or different shapes of the same font, i.
13172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13176 \begin_inset space \space{}
13184 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13188 \begin_inset space \space{}
13194 \begin_inset space ~
13202 \begin_inset space ~
13212 but you can also select your own.
13213 \begin_inset Newline newline
13216 The differences between roman,
13219 \begin_inset space ~
13228 fonts are explained in section
13229 \begin_inset space ~
13233 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13235 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13240 \begin_inset Newline newline
13246 \begin_inset space ~
13251 was originally designed for newspapers.
13252 Its glyphs are thus smaller than glyphs from other fonts in order to fit
13253 into the small newspaper columns.
13257 \begin_inset space ~
13262 is not the optimal choice for larger documents like books.
13265 \begin_layout Standard
13266 For the font size there are generally four possible values:
13279 Some classes provide additional sizes.
13284 depends on the class you are using.
13285 In the standard classes it is equal to the font size 10.
13288 \begin_layout Standard
13289 Note that the font size is the
13294 That means that \SpecialChar LyX
13295 scales all other possible font sizes (such as those used
13296 in footnotes, super-, and subscripts) by this value.
13297 You can fine-tune the font size of text parts via the
13300 \begin_inset space ~
13306 The possible font sizes for text parts are explained in section
13307 \begin_inset space ~
13311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13313 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13320 \begin_layout Standard
13324 \begin_inset space ~
13329 selection lets you specify whether the base font of your document should
13331 \begin_inset space ~
13334 serif or typewriter.
13339 selection uses what is preset by the class, the other selections override
13349 , but some classes (such as presentation classes) use other defaults.
13352 \begin_layout Standard
13357 LaTeX font encoding
13359 selection is an expert setting which lets you change the value passed to
13360 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13366 \begin_inset Index idx
13369 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13371 -packages ! fontenc
13377 \begin_inset space ~
13381 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13383 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
13388 Normally, you do not need to change (or even understand) this.
13389 Unless you have specific reasons, use
13396 \begin_layout Standard
13397 With some fonts, the checkboxes
13399 Use Old Style Figures
13403 Use True Small Caps
13406 These are extra features some fonts provide.
13409 Use Old Style Figures
13411 is checked, old style figures (also known as medieval or text figures)
13413 Old style figures are the numerals (0
13414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13418 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
13421 9) with ascenders and descenders, which makes them fit nicely with lowercase
13425 Use True Small Caps
13427 determines that real small caps are used instead of faked small caps made
13428 of scaled capitals.
13429 Real small caps are often part of expert font sets; they generally look
13430 better than faked small caps but might have to be purchased separately.
13433 \begin_layout Standard
13438 allows users of the languages Chinese, Japanese, Korean (CJK) to specify
13439 a font to display the script characters.
13443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13444 The font will be the argument for the commands of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
13450 \begin_inset Index idx
13453 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13460 So this has no effect for the document language
13474 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
13478 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
13481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13486 When you choose a new font or font size, \SpecialChar LyX
13491 change the screen font! You will only see a difference in the printed output;
13492 this is part of the WYSIWYM concept.
13494 's screen fonts can be adjusted in the
13496 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
13499 dialog, see section
13500 \begin_inset space ~
13504 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
13506 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
13518 \begin_layout Subsection
13522 \begin_layout Standard
13523 In \SpecialChar LaTeX
13524 the font used for characters in equations is different from the document
13526 For the case that you use \SpecialChar TeX
13527 fonts for your document, you can explicitly
13528 choose a math font in the dialog
13530 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
13534 \begin_inset Index idx
13537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13538 Document ! Settings
13544 The default setting is that \SpecialChar LyX
13545 automatically selects a math font.
13546 For most cases this will be \SpecialChar LaTeX
13547 's default – the math variant of \SpecialChar LaTeX
13550 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13556 \begin_inset space ~
13562 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13567 will automatically only load another math font if a math variant of the
13568 document font is available.
13571 \begin_layout Standard
13572 Note that the math font will not be used for
13576 (which is inserted with the shortcut
13582 or by the insertion of the command
13589 Also note that some math fonts are sans
13590 \begin_inset space ~
13594 Your document might therefore look strange when the document text has serifs
13595 while the math characters do not.
13597 \begin_inset space ~
13600 serif math fonts make therefore in most cases only sense if you select
13603 \begin_inset space ~
13611 \begin_inset space ~
13616 in the document font settings.
13619 \begin_layout Standard
13620 If you use non-\SpecialChar TeX
13621 fonts for the document, you can only choose for math to
13622 use either the document's class default \SpecialChar TeX
13623 font (in most cases
13624 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13630 \begin_inset space ~
13636 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13639 ) or to use the non-\SpecialChar TeX
13640 variant of the document's class default font (in most
13642 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13648 \begin_inset space ~
13654 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13660 \begin_layout Subsection
13661 Using Different Character Styles
13662 \begin_inset Index idx
13665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13672 \begin_inset Index idx
13675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13684 \begin_layout Standard
13685 As we've already seen, \SpecialChar LyX
13686 automatically changes the character style for certain
13687 paragraph environments.
13689 supports two character styles,
13698 You can activate both of these styles via key bindings, the menus, and
13702 \begin_layout Standard
13707 style, do one of the following:
13710 \begin_layout Itemize
13711 click on the toolbar button
13720 \begin_layout Itemize
13721 use the key binding
13730 \begin_layout Standard
13731 These commands are all toggles.
13736 style is already active, they deactivate it.
13739 \begin_layout Standard
13740 One typically uses the
13744 style for proper names.
13746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13753 is the original author of \SpecialChar LyX
13755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13761 \begin_layout Standard
13762 A more widely used character style is the
13767 You can activate (or deactivate — it's also a toggle) the
13774 \begin_layout Itemize
13775 clicking on the toolbar button
13784 \begin_layout Itemize
13785 using the keybindings
13794 \begin_layout Standard
13799 style is equivalent to an italic font but some document classes or \SpecialChar LaTeX
13801 use a different font.
13804 \begin_layout Standard
13805 We've been using the
13809 style all over the place in this document.
13810 Here's one more example:
13813 \begin_layout Quotation
13816 Do not overuse character styles!
13819 \begin_layout Standard
13820 It's also a warning in addition to an example.
13821 One's writing should parallel ordinary conversation.
13822 Since we don't all constantly scream at each other, we should also avoid
13823 the common tendency to overuse character styles.
13827 \begin_layout Standard
13828 You can always reset to the default font using the key binding
13836 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13838 \begin_inset space ~
13841 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13847 arg "dialog-show character"
13853 \begin_layout Subsection
13854 Fine-Tuning with the
13859 \begin_inset CommandInset label
13861 name "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
13866 \begin_inset Index idx
13869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
13878 \begin_layout Standard
13879 There are always occasions when you will need to do some fine-tuning; so
13881 gives you a way to create a custom character style.
13882 For example, an academic journal or a corporation may have a style sheet
13883 requiring a sans-serif font be used in certain situations.
13884 Also, writers sometimes use a different font to offset a character's thoughts
13885 from ordinary dialog.
13888 \begin_layout Standard
13889 Before we document how to use custom character style, we want to issue a
13890 warning yet again: Don't overuse character styles!
13891 \begin_inset Newline newline
13894 Documents that overuse different fonts and sizes are not easy to read and
13895 tend to look as if someone has knocked huge holes in them.
13898 \begin_layout Standard
13899 To use custom character styles, open the
13901 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
13903 \begin_inset space ~
13906 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
13909 dialog or press the toolbar button
13912 arg "dialog-show character"
13916 There are several boxes in this dialog, each corresponding to a different
13917 font property that you can choose.
13918 You can choose an option for one of these properties, or select
13921 \begin_inset space ~
13926 , which keeps the current state of that property.
13931 will reset the property to whatever is the default.
13932 You can use this to reset attributes across a bunch of different paragraph
13933 environments all at once.
13936 \begin_layout Standard
13937 The font properties, and their options (in addition to
13940 \begin_inset space ~
13952 \begin_layout Labeling
13953 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13959 \begin_inset Quotes eld
13963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
13967 The possible options are:
13971 \begin_layout Labeling
13972 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13977 This is the Roman font family.
13978 Normally a serif font.
13979 It's also the default family.
13989 \begin_layout Labeling
13990 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
13994 \begin_inset space ~
14001 This is the Sans Serif font family.
14013 \begin_layout Labeling
14014 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14021 This is the Typewriter font family.
14027 arg "font-typewriter"
14036 \begin_layout Labeling
14037 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14042 This corresponds to the print weight.
14047 \begin_layout Labeling
14048 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14053 This is the Medium font series.
14054 It's also the default series.
14057 \begin_layout Labeling
14058 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14065 This is the Bold font series.
14078 \begin_layout Labeling
14079 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14084 As the name implies.
14089 \begin_layout Labeling
14090 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14095 This is the Upright font shape.
14096 It's also the default shape.
14099 \begin_layout Labeling
14100 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14114 s the Italic font shape
14120 \begin_layout Labeling
14121 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14128 This is the Slanted font shape
14130 (although it might not be visible in \SpecialChar LyX
14131 , this is different from italic).
14134 \begin_layout Labeling
14135 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14139 \begin_inset space ~
14146 This is the Small caps font shape
14153 \begin_layout Labeling
14154 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14159 Alters the text color.
14160 Note that not all DVI-viewers are able to display colors.
14164 \begin_inset space ~
14169 , which means that the document default color set in
14171 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
14172 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
14178 \begin_inset space ~
14183 is used, you can choose between
14260 \begin_inset Index idx
14263 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14272 \begin_layout Labeling
14273 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14278 This is used to mark regions of text as having a different language from
14279 the language of the document.
14280 Text marked in this way will be underlined in blue to indicate the change
14281 (only within \SpecialChar LyX
14283 \begin_inset Newline newline
14286 If you have for example, an extract of German text in a non-German document,
14288 respects the German hyphenation rules automatically.
14289 When using the spell checking (see section
14290 \begin_inset space ~
14294 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
14296 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
14300 ) the German-marked text will be checked according to the German dictionary.
14303 \begin_layout Labeling
14304 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14309 Alters the size of the font.
14310 You will find no numerical values here; all possible sizes are actually
14311 proportional to the document font size.
14312 Once again, you don't feed \SpecialChar LyX
14313 the details, but a general description of what
14319 \begin_layout Labeling
14320 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14328 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14332 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14341 arg "font-size tiny"
14347 \begin_layout Labeling
14348 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14356 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14360 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14369 arg "font-size scriptsize"
14375 \begin_layout Labeling
14376 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14384 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14388 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14397 arg "font-size footnotesize"
14403 \begin_layout Labeling
14404 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14412 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14416 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14425 arg "font-size small"
14431 \begin_layout Labeling
14432 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14438 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14442 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14446 It's also the default size.
14450 arg "font-size normal"
14456 \begin_layout Labeling
14457 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14465 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14478 arg "font-size large"
14484 \begin_layout Labeling
14485 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14493 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14506 arg "font-size larger"
14512 \begin_layout Labeling
14513 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14521 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14525 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14534 arg "font-size largest"
14540 \begin_layout Labeling
14541 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14549 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14553 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14562 arg "font-size huge"
14568 \begin_layout Labeling
14569 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14577 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14581 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14590 arg "font-size giant"
14596 \begin_layout Labeling
14597 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14602 This increases the size by one step (for instance, from
14603 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14607 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14622 arg "font-size increase"
14628 \begin_layout Labeling
14629 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14634 This decreases the size by one step (for instance, from
14635 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14639 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14643 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14647 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14654 arg "font-size decrease"
14661 \begin_layout Standard
14666 : don't go crazy with this feature.
14667 You should almost never need to change the font size.
14669 automatically changes the font size for different paragraph environments
14670 — use those instead.
14671 This is here for fine-tuning only!
14674 \begin_layout Labeling
14675 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14680 Here you can change a few other things at the character level.
14685 \begin_layout Labeling
14686 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14693 This is text with emphasize on
14696 This might seem like the same as
14700 , but it is actually a bit different.
14706 That means every document class can define its own font used for emphasized
14708 Normally this font is equal to italic.
14711 \begin_layout Labeling
14712 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14719 This is text with Underbar on.
14725 arg "font-underline"
14731 \begin_inset Newline newline
14736 Avoid using underbar if you can! It is a hangover from the typewriter days,
14737 when you could not change fonts.
14738 One no longer needs to emphasize text by underscoring characters.
14739 This is only possible in \SpecialChar LyX
14740 because some people
14744 need it in order to follow style sheets for journal submissions.
14747 \begin_layout Labeling
14748 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14752 \begin_inset space ~
14759 This is text with Double underbar on.
14765 arg "font-underunderline"
14769 \begin_inset Newline newline
14772 As we just warned you against using underbar, you can imagine what we think
14773 about double underbar.
14776 \begin_layout Labeling
14777 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14781 \begin_inset space ~
14788 This is text with Wavy underbar on.
14794 arg "font-underwave"
14798 \begin_inset Newline newline
14801 Use this only if a journal absolutely insists on it.
14802 Keep antinausea pills handy.
14805 \begin_layout Labeling
14806 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14813 This is text with Strikeout on.
14819 arg "font-strikeout"
14823 \begin_inset Newline newline
14826 This is frequently used to indicate an older version of text that has been
14827 changed in the meantime.
14830 \begin_layout Labeling
14831 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
14838 This is text with Noun on.
14845 , this is a logical attribute.
14846 Normally it's equivalent to
14849 \begin_inset space ~
14858 \begin_layout Standard
14859 So you have a huge number of combinations to choose from.
14860 Once you have chosen a new character style via the
14862 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
14864 \begin_inset space ~
14867 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
14873 arg "dialog-show character"
14876 ) dialog, the settings are saved.
14877 You can activate them by using the toolbar button
14880 arg "textstyle-apply"
14884 The button lets you apply your custom character style even when the dialog
14888 \begin_layout Standard
14889 To completely reset the character style to the default, use
14896 If you want to toggle only those properties that you have just changed
14897 (suppose you just set the shape to
14898 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14902 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14906 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14910 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14916 \begin_inset space ~
14928 \begin_layout Standard
14929 You should also know something about the differences between the three main
14937 \begin_inset space ~
14949 \begin_layout Itemize
14955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14959 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14962 font, which means every character has the same width; the
14963 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14967 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14971 \begin_inset Quotes eld
14975 \begin_inset Quotes erd
14980 \begin_inset Newline newline
14984 \begin_inset Phantom HPhantom
14987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
14998 \begin_inset Note Note
15001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15002 For more on phantoms see section
15003 \begin_inset space ~
15007 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15009 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
15019 \begin_inset Newline newline
15025 \begin_layout Itemize
15030 fonts use characters with serifs.
15031 These are the small
15032 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15036 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15039 at the ends of the strokes that form the character.
15040 The following example shows the difference:
15041 \begin_inset Newline newline
15045 \begin_inset Newline newline
15050 text without serifs
15053 \begin_inset Newline newline
15056 Serifs facilitate quick and easy reading.
15057 These fonts are therefore used as default (named
15064 \begin_layout Itemize
15069 is not recommended for use as a base type.
15070 This font type is therefore often only used for headings and short texts.
15071 We use it in this document to highlight menu names.
15074 \begin_layout Standard
15075 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15079 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15082 refers to applying or removing font properties.
15083 When a property is marked for toggling in the
15086 \begin_inset space ~
15091 dialog, applying the style to text that already has the property will cause
15092 the property to be removed.
15093 If you, for example, apply a style with properties A, B and C to text that
15094 currently has font properties B, C, F and G, and if B is set to toggle
15095 and C is set not to toggle, the text ends up with properties A, C, F and
15098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15106 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15110 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15113 mean that you do not control the toggling behavior.
15114 For the properties on the left side of the dialog (
15115 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15119 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15122 etc.), toggling behavior is up to you.
15126 \begin_inset space ~
15131 is checked, all of the left side properties are toggled; by default, none
15134 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15138 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15142 If you, for example, set
15143 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15147 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15151 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15155 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15161 \begin_inset space ~
15166 , then apply the style to bold face text, the text will revert to the default
15168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15172 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15175 ), no matter how many times you apply the style.
15178 \begin_layout Standard
15179 We conclude with the same warning once again: Do not overuse the fonts!
15180 They are, more often than not, a kludge and a bad substitute for good writing.
15183 \begin_layout Section
15184 Printing and Previewing
15187 \begin_layout Subsection
15191 \begin_layout Standard
15192 Now that we have covered some of the basic features of document preparation
15193 using \SpecialChar LyX
15194 , you probably want to know how to print out your masterpiece.
15195 Before we tell you that, we want to give you a quick explanation of what
15196 goes on behind-the-scenes.
15197 We cover this information in much greater detail in the
15199 Additional Features
15204 \begin_layout Standard
15206 uses the program \SpecialChar LaTeX
15209 is just a macro package for the \SpecialChar TeX
15210 typesetting system, but to prevent confusion,
15211 we will only refer to \SpecialChar LaTeX
15214 is what you use to do your actual writing.
15215 Then, \SpecialChar LyX
15216 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15217 to turn your writing into printable output.
15218 This happens in two stages:
15221 \begin_layout Enumerate
15222 First, \SpecialChar LyX
15223 converts your document to a series of text commands for \SpecialChar LaTeX
15225 a file with the extension,
15226 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15234 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15240 \begin_layout Enumerate
15241 Next, \SpecialChar LyX
15242 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
15243 to use the commands in the
15247 file to produce printable output.
15250 \begin_layout Subsection
15251 Output file formats
15252 \begin_inset Index idx
15255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15262 \begin_inset CommandInset label
15264 name "subsec:Output-file-formats"
15271 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15272 Simple text (ASCII)
15273 \begin_inset Index idx
15276 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15277 File formats ! ASCII
15285 \begin_layout Standard
15286 This file type has the extension
15287 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15295 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15299 It contains your document as plain text following the rules of the
15300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15303 American Standard Code for Information Interchange
15304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15310 \begin_layout Standard
15311 You can export your document to ASCII with the menu
15313 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15314 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15316 \begin_inset space ~
15322 However, this will not export any externally generated material such as
15323 a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
15324 bibliography (section
15325 \begin_inset space ~
15329 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15331 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
15336 If your document includes such material, use
15338 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15339 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15341 \begin_inset space ~
15345 \begin_inset space ~
15349 \begin_inset space ~
15357 \begin_inset space ~
15361 \begin_inset space ~
15367 This will first internally export your document to PostScript (generating
15368 thereby the external material) and then do the conversion to ASCII.
15371 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15374 \begin_inset Index idx
15377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15378 File formats ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
15387 \begin_layout Standard
15388 This file type has the extension
15389 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15400 and contains all commands that are necessary for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15403 If you know \SpecialChar LaTeX
15404 , you can use it to find out \SpecialChar LaTeX
15405 -Errors or to process it manually
15406 with console commands.
15407 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
15408 -file is automatically created in \SpecialChar LyX
15409 's temporary directory whenever you
15410 view or export your document.
15413 \begin_layout Standard
15414 You can export your document as a \SpecialChar LaTeX
15415 -file using the menu
15417 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15418 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15422 The different \SpecialChar LaTeX
15423 export variants are explained in section
15424 \begin_inset space ~
15428 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15430 reference "subsec:Export"
15437 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15439 \begin_inset Index idx
15442 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15451 \begin_layout Standard
15452 This file type has the extension
15453 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15470 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15473 (DVI), because it is completely portable; you can move them from one machine
15474 to another without needing to do any sort of conversion.
15475 DVIs are used for quick previews and as a pre-stage for other output formats,
15479 \begin_layout Standard
15480 DVI files do not contain images, they only link to them.
15481 So don't forget to deliver the images together with your DVIs.
15482 Because the DVI-viewer has to convert the images in the background to make
15483 them visible when you scroll the DVI, this can slow down your computer
15484 when you view the DVI.
15485 So we recommend using PDF for files with many images.
15488 \begin_layout Standard
15489 You can export your document to DVI by the menus
15491 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15492 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15497 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15498 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15500 \begin_inset space ~
15506 The latter option uses the program
15508 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15514 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15517 is an engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15518 font access (see section
15519 \begin_inset space ~
15523 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15525 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15530 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15531 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15536 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15538 \begin_inset Index idx
15541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15542 File formats ! PostScript
15550 \begin_layout Standard
15551 This file type has the extension
15552 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15560 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15564 PostScript was developed by the company
15568 as a printer language.
15569 The file therefore contains commands that the printer uses to print the
15571 PostScript can be seen as a
15572 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15575 programming language
15576 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15579 ; you can calculate with it and draw diagrams and images.
15583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15584 If you are interested in learning more about this, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
15591 \begin_inset Index idx
15594 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15596 -packages ! pstricks
15606 As a result of this, the files are often bigger than PDFs.
15609 \begin_layout Standard
15610 PostScript can only contain images in the format
15611 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15614 Encapsulated PostScript
15615 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15618 (EPS, file extension
15619 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15627 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15631 As \SpecialChar LyX
15632 allows you to use any known image format in your document, it has to
15633 convert them in the background to EPS.
15634 If, for example, you have 50
15635 \begin_inset space ~
15638 images in your document, \SpecialChar LyX
15640 \begin_inset space ~
15643 conversions when you view or export your document the first time.
15644 This might slow down your workflow with \SpecialChar LyX
15646 So if you plan to use PostScript, you can insert your images directly as
15647 EPS to avoid this problem.
15650 \begin_layout Standard
15651 You can export to PostScript using the menu
15653 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15654 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
15660 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15662 \begin_inset Index idx
15665 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15672 \begin_inset Index idx
15675 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15684 \begin_layout Standard
15685 This file type has the extension
15686 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15694 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15699 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15702 Portable Document Format
15703 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15710 was derived from PostScript.
15711 It is more compressed and it uses fewer commands than PostScript.
15713 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15717 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15720 implies, it can be processed on any computer system and the printed output
15721 looks exactly the same.
15724 \begin_layout Standard
15725 PDF can contain images in its own PDF format and in the formats
15726 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15729 Joint Photographic Experts Group
15730 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15733 (JPG, file extension
15734 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15742 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15746 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15754 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15758 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15761 Portable Network Graphics
15762 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15765 (PNG, file extension
15766 \begin_inset Quotes eld
15774 \begin_inset Quotes erd
15778 You can also use any other image format, because \SpecialChar LyX
15779 converts them in the
15780 background to one of these formats.
15781 But as described in the section about PostScript, the image conversion
15782 will slow down your workflow.
15783 So we recommend using images in one of the three formats mentioned above.
15786 \begin_layout Standard
15787 You can export your document to PDF via the menu
15789 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
15795 \begin_layout Description
15797 \begin_inset space ~
15800 (pdflatex) This uses the program
15804 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15807 \begin_layout Description
15809 \begin_inset space ~
15816 ) This uses the program
15818 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15821 which converts your file directly to PDF.
15824 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15827 is a new engine, derived from
15831 , that also provides direct Unicode support and support for direct font
15832 access (see section
15833 \begin_inset space ~
15837 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15839 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15844 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
15845 is still a work in progress, but it might develop into the next standard
15850 \begin_layout Description
15852 \begin_inset space ~
15859 ) This uses the program
15864 that converts your file directly to PDF.
15870 is a new engine that provides direct Unicode support and support for direct
15871 font access (see section
15872 \begin_inset space ~
15876 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
15878 reference "subsec:LaTeX-font-support"
15883 It is particularly good at typesetting different scripts, for example,
15884 vertically written Japanese.
15887 \begin_layout Description
15889 \begin_inset space ~
15892 (cropped) This is the same as
15895 \begin_inset space ~
15900 but the result is a PDF with cropped page margins.
15901 This is for example useful if you want to use \SpecialChar LyX
15902 to generate good-looking
15903 formulas to use them in other programs like for presentations.
15906 \begin_layout Description
15908 \begin_inset space ~
15911 (dvipdfm) This uses the program
15915 that converts your file in the background to DVI and in a second step to
15919 \begin_layout Description
15921 \begin_inset space ~
15924 (ps2pdf) This uses the program
15928 that creates a PDF from a PostScript-version of your file.
15929 The PostScript-version is produced by the program
15933 which uses a DVI-version as intermediate step.
15934 So this export variant consists of three conversions.
15937 \begin_layout Standard
15941 \begin_inset space ~
15950 supports all the features of actual PDF-versions, is quick, stable, and
15951 works without problems.
15952 If you rely on multiscript support and\SpecialChar breakableslash
15953 or specific OpenType fonts, you might
15957 \begin_inset space ~
15965 \begin_inset space ~
15970 instead, bearing in mind that these two programs are not yet as mature
15978 \begin_layout Subsubsection
15980 \begin_inset Index idx
15983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
15984 FileFormats ! XHTML
15990 \begin_inset Index idx
15993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16002 \begin_layout Standard
16003 This file type has the extension
16004 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16012 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16016 It is a file suitable for viewing in web browsers.
16017 It does not itself contain images and the like but only links to them.
16018 When \SpecialChar LyX
16019 produces XHTML, it also generates corresponding images in formats
16020 suitable for the purpose.
16021 For the math output you can choose in the menu
16023 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16024 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
16027 between different formats, which are described in section
16029 Math Output in XHTML
16034 \begin_inset space ~
16042 \begin_layout Standard
16043 XHTML output remains
16044 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16048 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16051 , and not all \SpecialChar LyX
16052 features are supported yet.
16056 and the World Wide Web
16060 Additional Features
16062 manual, for more information.
16065 \begin_layout Standard
16066 You can export your document as an XHTML file using the menu item
16068 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
16069 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
16075 \begin_layout Subsection
16077 \begin_inset Index idx
16080 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16089 \begin_layout Standard
16090 To get a look at the final version of your document, with all of the page
16091 breaks in place, the footnotes correctly numbered, and so on, use the menu
16100 or use the toolbar button
16107 A viewing program will pop up showing the output in the defined default
16108 output format, which is globally set in the preferences (see section
16109 \begin_inset space ~
16113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16115 reference "sec:File-Formats"
16119 ) and can also be altered for single documents in the document settings
16121 \begin_inset space ~
16125 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16127 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
16132 Further output formats can be selected via
16134 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16135 View (Other Formats)
16137 or the toolbar button
16146 \begin_layout Standard
16147 If you have changed your document, you can refresh the output in the same
16148 viewer window using the menu
16150 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16155 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
16156 Update (Other Formats)
16161 \begin_layout Standard
16162 When you preview a file, the output file is only generated in \SpecialChar LyX
16165 To have a real output, export your document.
16168 \begin_layout Section
16169 A few Words about Typography
16170 \begin_inset Index idx
16173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16182 \begin_layout Subsection
16183 Hyphens, Dashes and Minus Signs
16184 \begin_inset Index idx
16187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16194 \begin_inset Index idx
16197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16206 \begin_layout Standard
16207 In \SpecialChar LyX
16209 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16217 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16220 character comes in four lengths: the
16232 , and the minus sign:
16233 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16239 \begin_layout Standard
16240 \begin_inset Tabular
16241 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
16242 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
16243 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16244 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16245 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
16246 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16247 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16250 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16256 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16265 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
16268 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16275 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16285 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16288 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16294 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16298 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16315 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16325 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16340 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16342 \begin_inset space ~
16345 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16352 <row interlinespace="3mm">
16353 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16356 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16362 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16371 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16374 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16377 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16379 \begin_inset space ~
16382 Character\SpecialChar menuseparator
16390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16403 \begin_inset Formula $-$
16411 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
16414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16415 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16423 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16437 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
16443 \begin_layout Standard
16444 You can alternatively generate the en and em dash by inserting the
16445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16456 character multiple times in a row.
16457 They will automatically be converted to the appropriate length dash in
16458 the final output, but not in \SpecialChar LyX
16461 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16465 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16469 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16473 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16477 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16481 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16491 \begin_layout Standard
16492 The three dash types are distinct from the minus sign, which appears in
16493 math mode and has a length of its own.
16494 Here are some examples:
16497 \begin_layout Enumerate
16498 line- and page-breaks
16499 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16509 \begin_layout Enumerate
16511 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16521 \begin_layout Enumerate
16522 Oh — there's a dash.
16523 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16533 \begin_layout Enumerate
16534 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}-y^{2}=z^{2}$
16538 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
16548 \begin_layout Subsection
16550 \begin_inset Index idx
16553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16560 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16562 name "subsec:Hyphenation"
16569 \begin_layout Standard
16570 Words are not hyphenated within \SpecialChar LyX
16571 but automatically in the output.
16572 Hyphenation is done by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
16578 \begin_inset Index idx
16581 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16588 following the rules of the document language.
16591 \begin_layout Standard
16593 hyphenates almost perfectly; it only has problems with text in the
16597 font and with unusual constructs, like
16598 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16602 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16606 If \SpecialChar LaTeX
16607 cannot break a word correctly, you can set hyphenation points manually.
16608 This is done with the menu
16610 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16611 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
16613 \begin_inset space ~
16619 These extra hyphenation points are only recommendations to \SpecialChar LaTeX
16621 If no hyphenation is necessary, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16625 \begin_layout Standard
16626 Sometimes you want to prevent words or constructs from being hyphenated.
16627 Imagine that you are describing keybindings/shortcuts in your document
16629 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16633 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16638 would then see the hyphen
16639 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16643 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16646 as a hyphenation possibility.
16647 Hyphenating at this point would look ugly.
16648 To prevent the shortcut from being hyphenated, you can put it into a makebox
16649 as described in section
16651 Prevent Hyphenation
16656 \begin_inset space ~
16664 \begin_layout Subsection
16666 \begin_inset Index idx
16669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16678 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16679 Abbreviations and End of Sentence
16680 \begin_inset CommandInset label
16682 name "subsec:Abbreviations"
16689 \begin_layout Standard
16690 When \SpecialChar LyX
16691 calls \SpecialChar LaTeX
16692 to generate the final version of your document, \SpecialChar LaTeX
16694 distinguishes between words, sentences, and abbreviations.
16697 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16700 appropriate amount of space.
16701 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16704 That means sentences get a little bit more space between the period and
16706 Abbreviations get the same amount of space after the period that a word
16707 gets after another word.
16710 \begin_layout Standard
16711 Unfortunately, the algorithm for figuring out what's an abbreviation does
16712 not work in all cases.
16714 \begin_inset Quotes eld
16722 \begin_inset Quotes erd
16725 is at the end of a lowercase letter, it's the end of a sentence; if it's
16726 at the end of a capitalized letter, it's an abbreviation.
16729 \begin_layout Standard
16730 Here are some examples of
16734 abbreviations and of the end of a sentence:
16737 \begin_layout Itemize
16742 \begin_layout Itemize
16747 \begin_layout Standard
16748 And here is an example of the algorithm going wrong:
16751 \begin_layout Itemize
16753 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16757 this is too much space!
16760 \begin_layout Itemize
16765 \begin_layout Standard
16766 You will not see anything wrong until you view a final version of your document.
16769 \begin_layout Standard
16770 To fix this problem, use one of the following:
16773 \begin_layout Enumerate
16777 \begin_inset space ~
16782 after lowercase abbreviations (see section
16783 \begin_inset space ~
16787 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16789 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
16794 \begin_inset Index idx
16797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16798 Spaces ! inter-word
16806 \begin_layout Enumerate
16810 \begin_inset space ~
16815 between two tokens of an abbreviation (see section
16816 \begin_inset space ~
16820 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
16822 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
16827 \begin_inset Index idx
16830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16839 \begin_layout Enumerate
16843 \begin_inset space ~
16847 \begin_inset space ~
16851 \begin_inset space ~
16858 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
16860 \begin_inset space ~
16865 menu to force the use of inter-sentence spacing.
16866 This function is also bound to
16869 arg "specialchar-insert end-of-sentence"
16875 \begin_layout Standard
16876 With the corrections, our earlier examples look like this:
16879 \begin_layout Itemize
16881 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
16885 \begin_inset space \space{}
16888 this is too much space!
16891 \begin_layout Itemize
16892 This is I\SpecialChar endofsentence
16896 \begin_layout Standard
16897 Some languages don't use extra spacing between sentences.
16898 If your language is such a language, you don't need to worry, because \SpecialChar LaTeX
16900 will take care of this.
16903 \begin_layout Standard
16904 For those that do need to bother, there is help to catch those sneaky errors:
16908 \begin_inset space ~
16914 feature described in the section
16916 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
16921 Additional Features
16926 \begin_layout Subsubsection
16928 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667523
16930 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669265
16934 \begin_inset Index idx
16937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16939 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669122
16941 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669123
16950 \begin_inset Index idx
16953 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16955 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669129
16957 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669204
16964 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16975 \begin_layout Plain Layout
16990 \begin_layout Standard
16993 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666231
16995 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666233
16999 Specifically, it will
17000 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667043
17002 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667044
17006 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666244
17008 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666245
17011 at the beginning of quoted text, and use a closing
17012 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666248
17014 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666249
17019 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17023 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17027 The keyboard character,
17031 , generates this automatically.
17034 \begin_layout Standard
17035 You can specify what character the
17040 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669340
17044 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667059
17053 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
17057 \begin_inset Index idx
17060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17061 Document ! Settings
17067 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667133
17069 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669342
17075 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667108
17078 (note that \SpecialChar LyX
17079 makes a sensible proposal for the selected main language)
17083 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666221
17085 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756786
17091 \begin_layout Labeling
17092 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17095 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17098 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17102 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17106 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666647
17108 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17112 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17116 \begin_inset space ~
17120 \begin_inset space ~
17124 \begin_inset Quotes els
17128 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17136 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17138 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665592
17142 \begin_inset Quotes eld
17146 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665595
17148 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666593
17152 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665605
17156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
17160 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665637
17162 \begin_inset Quotes els
17166 \begin_inset Quotes ers
17169 quotation marks (as common, e.
17170 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17178 \begin_layout Labeling
17179 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17181 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17184 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17188 \begin_inset Quotes srd
17192 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666671
17194 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17198 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17202 \begin_inset space ~
17206 \begin_inset space ~
17210 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17214 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17222 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666660
17223 Use quotes like ”this”
17224 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665692
17226 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17230 \begin_inset Quotes sld
17234 \begin_inset Quotes sls
17238 \begin_inset Quotes srs
17241 quotation marks (as common, e.
17242 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17250 \begin_layout Labeling
17251 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17253 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17256 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17260 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17264 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666696
17266 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17270 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17274 \begin_inset space ~
17278 \begin_inset space ~
17282 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17286 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17294 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666683
17296 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17300 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17304 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665749
17306 \begin_inset Quotes gld
17310 \begin_inset Quotes grd
17314 \begin_inset Quotes gls
17318 \begin_inset Quotes grs
17321 quotation marks (as common, e.
17322 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17330 \begin_layout Labeling
17331 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17333 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17336 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17340 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17344 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666716
17346 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17350 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17354 \begin_inset space ~
17358 \begin_inset space ~
17362 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17366 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17374 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666707
17376 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17380 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17384 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665786
17386 \begin_inset Quotes pld
17390 \begin_inset Quotes prd
17394 \begin_inset Quotes pls
17398 \begin_inset Quotes prs
17401 quotation marks (as common, e.
17402 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17410 \begin_layout Labeling
17411 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17413 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17416 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17420 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17424 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666730
17426 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17430 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17434 \begin_inset space ~
17438 \begin_inset space ~
17442 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17446 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17454 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666725
17456 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17460 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17464 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665816
17466 \begin_inset Quotes cld
17470 \begin_inset Quotes crd
17474 \begin_inset Quotes cls
17478 \begin_inset Quotes crs
17481 quotation marks (as common, e.
17482 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17485 g., in Switzerland)
17490 \begin_layout Labeling
17491 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17493 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17496 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17500 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17504 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666747
17506 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17510 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17514 \begin_inset space ~
17518 \begin_inset space ~
17522 \begin_inset Quotes als
17526 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17534 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666741
17536 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17540 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17544 \change_inserted -712698321 1482665851
17546 \begin_inset Quotes ald
17550 \begin_inset Quotes ard
17554 \begin_inset Quotes als
17558 \begin_inset Quotes ars
17561 quotation marks (as common, e.
17562 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17568 \begin_layout Labeling
17569 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17571 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666768
17574 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17578 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17582 \begin_inset space ~
17586 \begin_inset space ~
17590 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17594 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17600 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17604 \begin_inset Quotes qrd
17608 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17612 \begin_inset Quotes qls
17615 quotation marks (so-called plain or non-typographical quotation marks)
17618 \begin_layout Labeling
17619 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17621 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666784
17624 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17628 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17632 \begin_inset space ~
17636 \begin_inset space ~
17640 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17644 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17650 \begin_inset Quotes bld
17654 \begin_inset Quotes brd
17658 \begin_inset Quotes bls
17662 \begin_inset Quotes brs
17665 quotation marks (as common, e.
17666 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17669 g., in Great Britain)
17672 \begin_layout Labeling
17673 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17675 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666803
17678 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17682 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17686 \begin_inset space ~
17690 \begin_inset space ~
17694 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17698 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17704 \begin_inset Quotes fld
17708 \begin_inset Quotes frd
17712 \begin_inset Quotes fls
17716 \begin_inset Quotes frs
17719 quotation marks (as common, e.
17720 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17726 \begin_layout Labeling
17727 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17729 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668207
17732 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17736 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17740 \begin_inset space ~
17744 \begin_inset space ~
17748 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17752 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17758 \begin_inset Quotes ild
17762 \begin_inset Quotes ird
17766 \begin_inset Quotes ils
17770 \begin_inset Quotes irs
17773 quotation marks (another style common in France)
17777 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17779 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668407
17780 Maybe you wonder why one does not simply use only outer marks in this case,
17781 since these look identical to the inner marks.
17782 The answer is that you cannot easily switch to another style then (where
17783 the inner marks differ).
17793 \begin_layout Labeling
17794 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17796 \change_inserted -712698321 1482666837
17799 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17803 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17807 \begin_inset space ~
17811 \begin_inset space ~
17815 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17819 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17825 \begin_inset Quotes rld
17829 \begin_inset Quotes rrd
17833 \begin_inset Quotes rls
17837 \begin_inset Quotes rrs
17840 quotation marks (as common, e.
17841 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17847 \begin_layout Labeling
17848 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17850 \change_inserted -712698321 1482756796
17853 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17857 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17861 \begin_inset space ~
17865 \begin_inset space ~
17869 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17873 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17879 \begin_inset Quotes wld
17883 \begin_inset Quotes wrd
17887 \begin_inset Quotes wls
17891 \begin_inset Quotes wrs
17894 quotation marks (another style common in Sweden)
17897 \begin_layout Labeling
17898 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17900 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757086
17901 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17909 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17915 \begin_inset space ~
17919 \begin_inset space ~
17925 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17933 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17937 \begin_inset Quotes jld
17941 \begin_inset Quotes jrd
17945 \begin_inset Quotes jls
17949 \begin_inset Quotes jrs
17952 quotation marks (as common, e.
17953 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
17960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
17962 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757158
17963 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
17964 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
17974 \begin_layout Labeling
17975 \labelwidthstring <<Outer>> and <<inner>>:
17977 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
17978 \begin_inset Quotes kld
17986 \begin_inset Quotes krd
17992 \begin_inset space ~
17996 \begin_inset space ~
18002 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18010 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18014 \begin_inset Quotes kld
18018 \begin_inset Quotes krd
18022 \begin_inset Quotes kls
18026 \begin_inset Quotes krs
18029 quotation marks (as common, e.
18030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18033 g., in North Korea and China)
18037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18039 \change_inserted -712698321 1482757171
18040 Note that these characters are just emulated with similar-looking math symbols
18041 in many encodings that do not cover these glyphs.
18051 \begin_layout Standard
18053 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667281
18055 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667281
18059 \change_deleted -712698321 1482666272
18061 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667398
18066 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18068 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668512
18069 In many writing cultures, these are single quotation marks.
18070 But as the British and French styles show, this is not necessarily the
18071 case (and specifically the British style shows that
18072 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18076 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18079 does not necessarily mean
18080 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18084 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18088 This is why we call them
18089 \begin_inset Quotes els
18093 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18101 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18114 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668702
18115 for quotations inside quotations (and other tasks in some languages, such
18117 \begin_inset Quotes els
18121 \begin_inset Quotes ers
18125 \change_deleted -712698321 1482667343
18127 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667350
18128 can be obtained by means of
18133 arg "quote-insert single"
18137 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668731
18140 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18146 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667602
18150 \begin_layout Standard
18152 \change_inserted -712698321 1482668992
18153 By default, the quotation mark styles are persistent.
18154 That is to say, a quotation mark maintains the style that was current when
18155 it was inserted, even if the document-wide style changes.
18156 This allows you to enter marks of different style.
18157 If you check the setting
18159 Use dynamic quotation marks
18163 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
18164 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
18167 , however, special quotation marks will be inserted (in the LyX window,
18168 they appear in a special color).
18169 These marks will automatically adapt to the main style (and its changes).
18170 Such quotation marks make it easy to alter the quotation mark style in
18172 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18175 g., if your publisher requests a different style).
18178 \begin_layout Standard
18180 \change_inserted -712698321 1482667904
18181 Individual quotation marks (i.
18182 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18185 e., their level [inner, outer], side [opening, closing], and style) can be
18186 easily switched by a context menu that pops up if you right-click on a
18192 \begin_layout Subsection
18194 \begin_inset Index idx
18197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18198 Typography ! Ligatures
18204 \begin_inset Index idx
18207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18212 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18236 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18238 name "subsec:Ligatures"
18245 \begin_layout Standard
18246 It is standard typesetting practice to group certain letters together and
18247 print them as single characters.
18248 These groups are known as
18253 Since \SpecialChar LaTeX
18254 knows about ligatures, your documents will contain them too in the
18256 Here are the standard ligatures:
18259 \begin_layout Itemize
18263 \begin_layout Itemize
18267 \begin_layout Itemize
18271 \begin_layout Itemize
18275 \begin_layout Itemize
18279 \begin_layout Standard
18280 Some languages uses other ligatures if the document font supports them.
18283 \begin_layout Standard
18284 Sometimes, you don't want a ligature in a word.
18285 While a ligature may be okay in the word,
18286 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18290 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18293 it looks really weird in compound words, such as
18294 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18298 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18302 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18306 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18309 To break a ligature, use
18311 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18312 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18314 \begin_inset space ~
18321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18332 cuff\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18334 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18346 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18349 Dorf\SpecialChar ligaturebreak
18351 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18357 \begin_layout Subsection
18359 and \SpecialChar LaTeX
18361 \change_deleted -712698321 1482669270
18363 \change_inserted -712698321 1482669270
18367 \begin_inset Index idx
18370 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18378 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18380 name "subsec:LyX's-Proper-Names"
18387 \begin_layout Standard
18390 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18391 Special Characters\SpecialChar menuseparator
18395 provides the following program logos with special formatting:
18398 \begin_layout Description
18400 The name of the game.
18403 \begin_layout Description
18405 The typesetting engine used by \SpecialChar LyX
18409 \begin_layout Description
18411 The \SpecialChar TeX
18412 macro collection used by \SpecialChar LyX
18416 \begin_layout Description
18417 \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
18418 The current version of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18422 \begin_layout Standard
18423 You might wonder why the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18425 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18429 \begin_inset Formula $\epsilon$
18433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18437 It is an old tradition in the \SpecialChar TeX
18438 world to give programs geek version numbers.
18439 For example the version number of \SpecialChar TeX
18440 converges to the number
18441 \begin_inset Formula $\pi$
18444 : The actual version is
18445 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18450 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18453 , the previous one was
18454 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18459 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18465 \begin_layout Subsection
18467 \begin_inset Index idx
18470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18479 \begin_layout Standard
18480 Generally the space between units and the number is smaller than the normal
18481 space between two words.
18482 As you can see in the example below, it looks better when the space is
18485 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18489 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18492 for units use the menu
18494 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18495 Formatting\SpecialChar menuseparator
18497 \begin_inset space ~
18505 arg "space-insert thin"
18511 \begin_layout Standard
18512 Here is an example to show the differences:
18515 \begin_layout Standard
18516 \begin_inset Tabular
18517 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="2" columns="2">
18518 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
18519 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18520 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
18522 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18525 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18527 \begin_inset space ~
18531 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18539 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18543 space between number and unit
18550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18555 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
18559 \begin_inset Formula $\cdot$
18567 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
18570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18571 half space between number and unit
18584 \begin_layout Subsection
18586 \begin_inset Index idx
18589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18590 Typography ! Widows and orphans
18598 \begin_layout Standard
18599 In the early days of word processors, page breaks went wherever the page
18601 There was no regard for what was actually going on in the text.
18602 For example the heading for a new section was printed at the very bottom
18603 of the page, the first line of a new paragraph all alone at the bottom
18604 of a page, or the last line of a paragraph at the top of a new page.
18605 These bits of text became known as
18616 \begin_layout Standard
18617 Clearly, \SpecialChar LyX
18618 can avoid breaking pages after a section heading.
18619 That's part of the advantage of paragraph environments.
18620 But what about widows and orphans, where the page breaks leave one line
18621 of a paragraph all alone at the top or bottom of a page? There are rules
18622 built into \SpecialChar LaTeX
18623 governing page breaks, and some of those rules are there specifical
18624 ly to prevent widows and orphans.
18625 If they appear nevertheless and you don't like them, you can add the commands
18626 \begin_inset Newline newline
18634 \begin_inset Newline newline
18642 \begin_inset Newline newline
18645 to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
18646 preamble of your document to avoid them.
18647 Some \SpecialChar LaTeX
18649 \begin_inset space ~
18653 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18655 key "latexcompanion"
18660 \begin_inset space ~
18664 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
18670 ) have more information about the technical details of \SpecialChar LaTeX
18671 's page break mechanism.
18674 \begin_layout Chapter
18675 Notes, Graphics, Tables and Floats
18676 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18678 name "chap:Floats-and-Notes"
18685 \begin_layout Standard
18686 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
18689 \begin_inset space ~
18695 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
18698 \begin_layout Section
18700 \begin_inset Index idx
18703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18710 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18719 \begin_layout Standard
18721 offers you a few types of notes to add to your document:
18724 \begin_layout Description
18727 \begin_inset space ~
18730 Note This note type is for internal notes that will not appear in the output.
18731 \begin_inset Newline newline
18735 \begin_inset Note Note
18738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18739 This is text in a note box that doesn't appear in the output.
18747 \begin_layout Description
18748 Comment This note also doesn't appear in the output but it does appear as
18749 a \SpecialChar LaTeX
18750 -comment when you export the document to \SpecialChar LaTeX
18753 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
18754 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
18756 \begin_inset space ~
18762 \begin_inset Newline newline
18766 \begin_inset Note Comment
18769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18770 This is text in a note box that only appears as a comment in \SpecialChar LaTeX
18779 \begin_layout Description
18781 \begin_inset space ~
18784 Out This note will appear in the output as text in a color which you can
18785 set in the document settings under
18787 Colors\SpecialChar menuseparator
18789 \begin_inset space ~
18795 \begin_inset Newline newline
18799 \begin_inset Newline newline
18803 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
18806 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18811 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18812 This is an example footnote within a greyed out note.
18813 In this document the color of this note type is set to blue.
18818 of a comment that appears in the output.
18824 \begin_inset Newline newline
18828 \begin_inset Newline newline
18831 As you can see in the example, greyed out notes can have footnotes.
18834 \begin_layout Standard
18835 Notes are inserted with the toolbar button
18843 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18847 Right-click on the note box that appears to select the note type.
18850 \begin_layout Section
18852 \begin_inset Index idx
18855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18862 \begin_inset CommandInset label
18864 name "sec:Footnotes"
18871 \begin_layout Standard
18873 uses boxes to display footnotes: When you insert a footnote using the menu
18876 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
18879 or the toolbar button
18882 arg "footnote-insert"
18894 \begin_inset Graphics
18895 filename clipart/footnote.png
18904 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
18905 's representation of your footnote.
18915 \begin_inset Quotes eld
18923 \begin_inset Quotes erd
18934 label, the box will
18938 be opened and you can enter the footnote text into it.
18939 Clicking on the box label again will close
18952 If you want to turn existing text into a footnote, simply highlight it
18953 and click on the footnote
18968 \begin_layout Standard
18969 Here is an example footnote:
18977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
18978 To close a footnote, click on the footnote box label.
18986 \begin_layout Standard
18987 The footnote will appear in the output as a superscript number at the text
18988 position where the footnote box is placed.
18989 The footnote text is placed at the bottom of the current page.
18990 The footnote number is calculated by \SpecialChar LyX
18991 according to the document class.
18993 does not yet support a particular numbering scheme, but you can get other
18994 schemes using special \SpecialChar LaTeX
19000 ey are described in the
19003 \begin_inset space ~
19011 \begin_layout Section
19013 \begin_inset Index idx
19016 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19023 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19025 name "sec:Marginal-Notes"
19032 \begin_layout Standard
19033 Marginal notes look and behave just like footnotes in \SpecialChar LyX
19035 When you insert a margin note via the menu
19037 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19039 \begin_inset space ~
19044 or the toolbar button
19047 arg "marginalnote-insert"
19066 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19070 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19073 appearing within your text.
19074 This box is \SpecialChar LyX
19075 's representation of your margin
19084 \begin_layout Standard
19085 At the side of this sentence is an example marginal note.
19089 \begin_inset Marginal
19092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19094 This is a marginal note.
19102 \begin_layout Standard
19103 Marginal notes appear at the right side in single-sided documents.
19104 In double-sided documents they appear in the outer margin – left on even
19105 pages, right on odd pages.
19108 \begin_layout Standard
19109 For further information about marginal notes see the section
19112 \begin_inset space ~
19120 \begin_inset space ~
19128 \begin_layout Section
19129 Graphics and Images
19130 \begin_inset Index idx
19133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19140 \begin_inset Index idx
19143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19150 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19152 name "sec:Graphics"
19159 \begin_layout Standard
19160 To insert an image in your document, place the cursor at the text position
19161 you want and click on the toolbar icon
19164 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
19169 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19173 Then a dialog will appear to choose the file to load.
19176 \begin_layout Standard
19177 This dialog has numerous mostly self-explanatory parameters.
19182 tab allows you to choose your image file.
19183 The image can be transformed by setting a rotation angle and a scaling
19185 The scaling units are explained in Appendix
19186 \begin_inset space ~
19190 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19192 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
19199 \begin_layout Standard
19204 it is possible to set image coordinates to adjust the height and width
19205 of the image in the output.
19206 The coordinates can also be calculated automatically by pressing the button
19210 \begin_inset space ~
19214 \begin_inset space ~
19223 \begin_inset space ~
19227 \begin_inset space ~
19231 \begin_inset space ~
19236 will only print the image region within the given coordinates.
19237 Normally you don't need to take care about image coordinates and can ignore
19245 \begin_layout Standard
19249 \begin_inset space ~
19253 \begin_inset space ~
19258 tab \SpecialChar LaTeX
19259 experts can specify additional \SpecialChar LaTeX
19261 In this tab you can also specify the appearance of the image inside \SpecialChar LyX
19266 \begin_inset space ~
19271 has the effect that the image doesn't appear in the output, only a frame
19272 with the image size is printed.
19275 \begin_layout Standard
19276 The graphics dialog can be called at any time by clicking on an image.
19277 Images will appear in the output exactly at the position where they are
19279 This is an example image within a separate, horizontally centered paragraph:
19282 \begin_layout Standard
19284 \begin_inset Graphics
19285 filename clipart/mobius.eps
19293 \begin_layout Standard
19294 If you need image captions or want to reference images, you have to put
19295 the image into a float, see section
19296 \begin_inset space ~
19300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19302 reference "subsec:Figure-Floats"
19309 \begin_layout Subsection
19311 \begin_inset Index idx
19314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19323 name "subsec:Image-Formats"
19330 \begin_layout Standard
19331 You can insert images in any known file format.
19332 But as we explained in section
19333 \begin_inset space ~
19337 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19339 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19343 , every output document format allows only a few image formats.
19345 therefore uses the program
19349 in the background to convert the images to the right format.
19350 To increase your workflow by avoiding these conversions in the background,
19351 use only the image formats listed in the subsections of section
19352 \begin_inset space ~
19356 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
19358 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
19365 \begin_layout Standard
19366 Similar to fonts there are two types of image formats:
19369 \begin_layout Description
19371 \begin_inset space ~
19374 images consist of pixel values, often in a compressed form.
19375 They are therefore not fully scalable and look pixelated in large zooms.
19376 Well-known bitmap image formats are
19377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19380 Graphics Interchange Format
19381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19384 (GIF, file extension
19385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19393 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19397 \begin_inset Index idx
19400 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19405 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19429 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19432 Portable Network Graphics
19433 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19436 (PNG, file extension
19437 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19445 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19449 \begin_inset Index idx
19452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19481 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19484 Joint Photographic Experts Group
19485 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19488 (JPG, file extension
19489 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19497 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19501 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19509 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19513 \begin_inset Index idx
19516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19547 \begin_layout Description
19549 \begin_inset space ~
19552 images consist of vectors and can therefore be scaled to any size without
19554 The scaling ability is desired if you want to create presentations, because
19555 presentations are always scaled by the beamer.
19556 Scaling is also useful for online documents to let the user zoom into diagrams.
19557 \begin_inset Newline newline
19560 Scalable image formats can be
19561 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19564 Scalable Vector Graphics
19565 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19568 (SVG, file extension
19569 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19577 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19581 \begin_inset Index idx
19584 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19613 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19616 Encapsulated PostScript
19617 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19620 (EPS, file extension
19621 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19633 \begin_inset Index idx
19636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19665 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19668 Portable Document Format
19669 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19672 (PDF, file extension
19673 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19681 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19685 \begin_inset Index idx
19688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19696 \begin_inset Quotes eld
19700 \begin_inset Quotes erd
19703 , because you can convert any bitmap image format to PDF or EPS and the
19704 result will not be scalable.
19705 In this case only a header with the image properties is added to the original
19710 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19711 In the case of PDF, the original image is additionally compressed.
19719 \begin_layout Standard
19720 Normally one cannot convert a bitmap image into a scalable one, only
19727 \begin_layout Subsection
19728 Grouping of Image Settings
19729 \begin_inset Index idx
19732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19733 Images ! Settings grouping
19741 \begin_layout Standard
19742 Each image can define a new group of image settings or join an existing
19744 Images within such a group share their settings, so adjusting one image
19745 of the group automatically also adjusts all other images of the group in
19747 So you can for example change the size for a bunch of images without the
19748 need to manually change each of them.
19752 \begin_layout Standard
19753 A new group can be set by pressing the button
19756 \begin_inset space ~
19760 \begin_inset space ~
19772 \begin_inset space ~
19776 \begin_inset space ~
19782 Joining an existing group can be done using the context menu of the image
19783 and checking the name of the desired group.
19786 \begin_layout Section
19788 \begin_inset Index idx
19791 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19798 \begin_inset CommandInset label
19807 \begin_layout Standard
19808 You can insert a table using either the toolbar button
19811 arg "tabular-insert"
19816 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
19820 A dialog will appear, asking you for the number of rows and columns.
19821 The default table has lines around any cell and the first row appears separated
19822 from the rest of the table.
19823 This separation appears due to a double line: The cells of the first row
19824 have a line below them and the cells of the second row have a line above
19826 Here is an example table:
19829 \begin_layout Standard
19831 \begin_inset Tabular
19832 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="4">
19833 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
19834 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19835 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19836 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
19837 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
19839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19848 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19875 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19878 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19886 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19913 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19922 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19925 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19951 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19960 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19973 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
19976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
19984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
19987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20002 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20011 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20020 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20023 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20037 \begin_layout Subsection
20041 \begin_layout Standard
20042 You can alter a table by clicking on it with the right mouse button and
20045 More\SpecialChar menuseparator
20049 This brings up the table dialog.
20050 Here you can adjust the settings of the cell, row and/or column where the
20051 cursor is placed currently.
20052 Most of the dialog options also work on selections.
20053 This means that if you select more cells, columns or rows the action is
20054 done on all of your selection.
20057 \begin_layout Standard
20058 In addition to the table dialog, the
20061 \begin_inset space ~
20066 helps you in setting table properties.
20067 It appears if the cursor is inside a table.
20070 \begin_layout Standard
20074 \begin_inset space ~
20079 of the table dialog you can set the alignment for the current row.
20080 If you add a row or column, it will be inserted right beside or below the
20081 current cell respectively.
20082 The vertical alignment of a column can only be adjusted when a column width
20084 A given width will allow the cell to have line breaks and multiple paragraphs
20085 of text, see section
20086 \begin_inset space ~
20090 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
20092 reference "subsec:Table-Cells"
20099 \begin_layout Standard
20100 You can mark multiple cells of one row/column as a multicolumn/row cell
20101 using the check box
20110 This will merge the cells to
20114 cell, spread over more than one column/row.
20115 Multicolumn cells are treated as own rows, so that the alignment, width,
20116 and border settings affect only the multicolumn cell.
20117 Here is an example table with a multicolumn cell in the first row and one
20118 in the last row without the upper border:
20121 \begin_layout Standard
20123 \begin_inset Tabular
20124 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="4">
20125 <features firstHeadTopDL="true" firstHeadBottomDL="true" tabularvalignment="middle">
20126 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20127 <column alignment="center" valignment="middle">
20128 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0in">
20129 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20140 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="middle" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20143 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20149 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20152 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20169 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20172 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20187 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20190 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20196 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20199 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20216 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20219 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20225 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20234 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20237 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20243 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20246 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20260 \begin_layout Standard
20261 Adept users can declare special \SpecialChar LaTeX
20262 -arguments for the table.
20263 They are necessary for special table formatting, such as the multirow cells,
20264 explained in the chapter
20271 \begin_inset space ~
20277 You can also rotate the current cell or the whole table.
20278 These rotations are not visible in \SpecialChar LyX
20279 but are visible in the output.
20282 \begin_layout Standard
20283 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
20286 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20291 Most DVI-viewers are
20295 able to display rotations.
20303 \begin_layout Standard
20308 tab allows you to add and delete border lines for the current row/column.
20313 adds lines for all cell borders.
20316 \begin_layout Subsection
20318 \begin_inset Index idx
20321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20322 Tables ! Multi-page
20328 \begin_inset Index idx
20331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20340 \begin_layout Standard
20341 If the table is too long to fit on one page, you can use the option
20344 \begin_inset space ~
20348 \begin_inset space ~
20356 \begin_inset space ~
20361 of the table dialog to split the table automatically over more pages.
20362 Doing this enables some check boxes and you can now define:
20365 \begin_layout Description
20370 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20371 defined, are defined to be the header rows of all pages of the longtable.
20372 Except for the first page, if
20375 \begin_inset space ~
20383 \begin_layout Description
20387 \begin_inset space ~
20392 : The current row and all rows above, that don't have any special options
20393 defined, are defined to be the header rows of the first page of the longtable.
20396 \begin_layout Description
20401 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20402 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of all pages of the longtable,
20403 except for the last page, if
20406 \begin_inset space ~
20414 \begin_layout Description
20418 \begin_inset space ~
20423 : The current row and all rows below, that don't have any special options
20424 defined, are defined to be the footer rows of the last page of the longtable.
20427 \begin_layout Description
20428 Caption: The first row is reset as a single column.
20429 You can now insert there the table caption via the menu
20431 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
20435 More about multi-page table captions can be found in the
20438 \begin_inset space ~
20446 \begin_layout Standard
20447 You can also specify a row where the table is split.
20448 If you set more than one option in the same table row, you should be aware
20449 that then only the first option is used; the others will be defined as
20455 In this context, first means first in this order:
20458 \begin_inset space ~
20470 \begin_inset space ~
20475 ; see the following longtable to see how it works:
20478 \begin_layout Standard
20480 \begin_inset Tabular
20481 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="69" columns="3">
20482 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
20483 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="5cm">
20484 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20485 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="0pt">
20486 <row endfirsthead="true">
20487 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20490 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20493 Example Phone List (ignore the names)
20498 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20501 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20507 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20517 <row endfirsthead="true">
20518 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20521 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20529 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20538 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20550 <row endhead="true">
20551 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20562 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20565 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20571 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20581 <row endhead="true">
20582 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20585 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20593 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20602 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20605 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20614 <row endfoot="true">
20615 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20618 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20626 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20635 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20638 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20646 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20649 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20666 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20677 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20680 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20688 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20691 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20697 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20700 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20708 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20711 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20728 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20750 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20753 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20770 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20773 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20781 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20790 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20801 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20804 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20812 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20815 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20821 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20824 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20832 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20835 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20843 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20852 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20874 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20877 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20883 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20886 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20894 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20897 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20905 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20908 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20914 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20917 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20925 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20928 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20945 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20956 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20959 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20967 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
20970 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20976 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
20979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20987 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
20990 \begin_layout Plain Layout
20998 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21001 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21007 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21018 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21029 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21032 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21049 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21052 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21060 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21069 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21080 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21083 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21091 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21094 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21100 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21111 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21114 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21122 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21125 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21153 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21156 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21173 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21176 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21193 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21204 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21207 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21215 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21218 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21224 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21235 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21246 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21255 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21258 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21266 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21297 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21317 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21320 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21339 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21342 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21348 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21351 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21370 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21373 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21410 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21413 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21421 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21424 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21432 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21435 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21441 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21452 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21455 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21472 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21483 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21486 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21514 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21517 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21525 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21528 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21534 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21537 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21556 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21559 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21565 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21568 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21587 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21590 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21596 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21599 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21607 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21610 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21616 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
21619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21625 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21628 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21636 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21647 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21656 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21667 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21670 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21678 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21681 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21687 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21698 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21709 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21718 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21721 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21729 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21760 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21763 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21771 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21780 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21791 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21802 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21811 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21814 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21822 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21833 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21836 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21842 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21845 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21853 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21884 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21895 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21898 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21904 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21907 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21915 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21926 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21935 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21938 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21946 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21957 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21960 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
21969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21977 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
21980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21988 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
21991 \begin_layout Plain Layout
21997 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22000 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22008 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22019 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22022 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22039 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22059 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22062 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22070 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22090 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22093 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22101 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22121 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22124 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22132 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22152 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22155 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22163 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22166 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22174 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22177 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22183 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22186 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22194 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22197 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22214 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22217 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22225 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22245 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22256 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22259 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22267 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22276 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22279 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22287 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22290 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22298 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22307 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22318 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22321 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22329 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22349 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22352 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22360 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22363 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22380 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22383 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22391 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22411 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22414 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22422 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22425 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22431 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22434 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22442 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22445 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22453 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22462 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22465 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22473 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22476 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22493 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22504 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22524 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22527 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22535 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22538 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22546 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22549 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22555 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22558 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22566 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22577 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
22580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22586 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22589 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22596 <row endlastfoot="true">
22597 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="block" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22608 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
22611 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22617 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22620 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22634 \begin_layout Subsection
22636 \begin_inset Index idx
22639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22646 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22648 name "subsec:Table-Cells"
22655 \begin_layout Standard
22656 A table cell can contain text, inline equations, a figure, or another table.
22657 All these kinds of objects can be placed in the same cell.
22658 Font sizes and shapes can also be altered.
22659 But you can't put a special environment in a cell (like
22663 , etc.), nor set spacing options for the cell's paragraph.
22666 \begin_layout Standard
22667 To have multi-line entries in table cells, you have to declare a fixed width
22668 for the column in the table dialog.
22669 Your text is then automatically split into multiple lines and the cell
22670 is enlarged vertically when the length of the text exceeds the given width.
22674 \begin_layout Standard
22676 \begin_inset Tabular
22677 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="4" columns="3">
22678 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
22679 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22680 <column alignment="block" valignment="top" width="3cm">
22681 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
22683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22701 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22704 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22719 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22739 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22742 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22757 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22760 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22770 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22775 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22778 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22795 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22798 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22813 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22816 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22826 This is longer now.
22831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22851 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22854 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22869 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
22872 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22882 This is a multi-line entry in a table.
22883 This is longer now.
22888 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
22891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22914 \begin_layout Standard
22915 Cutting and pasting between tables and table cells works reasonably well.
22916 You can even cut and paste more than one row.
22920 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22921 Note that you cannot paste into a multicell selection because it would not
22922 be clear what to do when pasting a single word in a selected 2×3.
22928 Selection with the mouse or with
22932 plus the arrow keys works as usual.
22933 You can also copy and paste the entire table as a single unit by starting
22934 the selection from outside the table.
22937 \begin_layout Section
22939 \begin_inset Index idx
22942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
22949 \begin_inset CommandInset label
22958 \begin_layout Subsection
22962 \begin_layout Standard
22963 A float is a block of text associated with some sort of label, which doesn't
22964 have a fixed location.
22966 \begin_inset Quotes eld
22970 \begin_inset Quotes erd
22973 forward or backward a page or two, to wherever it fits best.
22981 \begin_inset space ~
22986 are also floats, because they can float to the next page when there are
22987 too many notes on the current page.
22990 \begin_layout Standard
22991 Floats make it possible to get a high quality layout.
22992 Images and tables can be distributed evenly over the pages to avoid whitespace
22993 and pages without text.
22994 As the floating often destroys the spatial context between the text and
22995 the image/table, every float can be referenced in the text.
22996 Floats are therefore numbered.
22997 Referencing is described in section
22998 \begin_inset space ~
23002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23004 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23011 \begin_layout Standard
23012 To insert a float, use the menu
23014 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23018 A box with a caption will be inserted into your document.
23019 The label will automatically be translated to the document language in
23021 After the label you can insert the caption text.
23022 \begin_inset Index idx
23025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23031 The image or table is inserted above or below the caption in a separate
23032 paragraph within the float.
23033 To keep your \SpecialChar LyX
23034 -document readable, you can open and close the float box by
23035 left-clicking on the box label.
23036 A closed float box looks like this:
23037 \begin_inset Graphics
23038 filename clipart/float.png
23043 – a gray button with a red label.
23046 \begin_layout Standard
23047 You should insert floats in a separate paragraph to avoid possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
23049 that can occur when the surrounding text is specially formatted.
23052 \begin_layout Subsection
23054 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23056 name "subsec:Figure-Floats"
23061 \begin_inset Index idx
23064 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23065 Floats ! Figure floats
23073 \begin_layout Standard
23075 \begin_inset space ~
23079 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23081 reference "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23085 was created using the menu
23087 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23088 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23094 arg "float-insert figure"
23098 The image was inserted by setting the cursor above the caption label and
23101 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23107 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
23111 The image in the float was horizontally centered by putting the cursor
23112 to the left or right of the image and using the menu
23114 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
23116 \begin_inset space ~
23124 arg "layout-paragraph"
23130 \begin_layout Standard
23131 \begin_inset Float figure
23136 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23138 \begin_inset Graphics
23139 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23149 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23151 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23154 name "fig:Platypus-distorted"
23158 A severely distorted platypus in a float.
23171 \begin_layout Standard
23172 This figure float also shows how to set a label and create a cross-reference
23173 to it: Insert a label into the caption using the menu
23175 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23184 ) and refer to it using the menu
23186 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23192 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
23196 It is important to use cross-references to figure floats rather than using
23197 vague references like
23198 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23202 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23205 , because, as \SpecialChar LaTeX
23206 will reposition the floats in the final document, it might
23208 \begin_inset Quotes eld
23212 \begin_inset Quotes erd
23216 For more about cross-references, see section
23217 \begin_inset space ~
23221 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23223 reference "sec:Cross-References"
23230 \begin_layout Standard
23231 Normally only one image is inserted in a figure float, but sometimes you
23232 might want to use two images with separate subcaptions.
23233 This can be done by inserting image floats into existing image floats.
23234 Note that only the main caption of the float is added to the List of Figures
23235 as described in section
23236 \begin_inset space ~
23240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23242 reference "subsec:List-of-Figures"
23248 \begin_inset space ~
23252 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23254 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23258 is an example of a figure float with two images set side by side.
23259 You can also set the images one below the other.
23261 \begin_inset space ~
23265 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23267 reference "fig:Undefinable"
23272 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23274 reference "fig:Platypus"
23278 are the subfigures.
23281 \begin_layout Standard
23282 \begin_inset Float figure
23287 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23288 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23292 \begin_inset Float figure
23297 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23298 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23300 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23301 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23303 name "fig:Undefinable"
23315 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23316 \begin_inset Graphics
23317 filename clipart/escher-lsd.eps
23328 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23332 \begin_inset Float figure
23337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23338 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23340 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23341 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23343 name "fig:Platypus"
23355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23356 \begin_inset Graphics
23357 filename clipart/platypus.eps
23369 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23376 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23378 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23379 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23381 name "fig:Two-distorted-images"
23385 Two distorted images.
23398 \begin_layout Subsection
23400 \begin_inset Index idx
23403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23404 Floats ! Table floats
23412 \begin_layout Standard
23413 Table floats can be inserted using the menu
23415 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23416 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
23419 or the toolbar button
23422 arg "float-insert table"
23426 They have the same properties as figure floats except that the table in
23427 the float is normally placed below the caption and not above like for figures
23428 and that the label begins with “tab:”.
23430 \begin_inset space ~
23434 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23436 reference "tab:Table-float"
23443 \begin_layout Standard
23444 \begin_inset Float table
23449 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23450 \begin_inset Caption Standard
23452 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23453 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23455 name "tab:Table-float"
23467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23469 \begin_inset Tabular
23470 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="3" columns="3">
23471 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
23472 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23473 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23474 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
23476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23568 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23571 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23588 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23591 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23601 \begin_inset Formula $\int x^{2}dx$
23609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
23612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23622 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
23625 \end{array}\right]$
23633 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
23636 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23646 \begin_inset Formula $1+1=2$
23667 \begin_layout Subsection
23669 \begin_inset Index idx
23672 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23681 \begin_layout Standard
23683 offers you further float types as well as rotated floats.
23684 It also allows you to change the float numbering scheme, to control the
23685 float placement and to change the formatting and placement of the float
23687 All these features are explained in detail with many examples in the chapter
23695 \begin_inset space ~
23703 \begin_layout Section
23705 \begin_inset Index idx
23708 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23717 \begin_layout Standard
23719 provides a mechanism essentially to produce a page within a page, called
23721 Within a minipage, all the usual rules of indentation, line wrapping, etc.
23722 \begin_inset space \space{}
23729 \begin_layout Standard
23730 Minipages in \SpecialChar LyX
23731 have their own collapsible box inserted via the menu
23733 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23737 Right-clicking on the box label allows you to alter the width of the minipage
23738 and its alignment within the page.
23741 \begin_layout Standard
23743 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23753 height_special "totalheight"
23758 backgroundcolor "none"
23761 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23764 This is a minipage.
23765 The text is set in an italic style.
23768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23771 Minipages are often used for text in another language or text that needs
23772 another formatting.
23780 \begin_layout Standard
23781 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23784 If you place two minipages side-by-side, you can use
23788 as described in section
23789 \begin_inset space ~
23793 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
23795 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
23800 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
23806 \begin_layout Standard
23807 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23817 height_special "totalheight"
23822 backgroundcolor "none"
23825 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23826 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23827 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23833 \begin_inset space \hfill{}
23837 \begin_inset Box Frameless
23847 height_special "totalheight"
23852 backgroundcolor "none"
23855 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23856 This is a minipage with some stupid dummy text.
23857 This dummy text is used to increase the size of the minipage.
23865 \begin_layout Standard
23866 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
23872 \begin_layout Standard
23873 When you right-click on a minipage box, you can transform the box to another
23875 All box types and their settings are explained in detail in chapter
23882 \begin_inset space ~
23890 \begin_layout Chapter
23891 Mathematical Formulas
23892 \begin_inset Index idx
23895 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23902 \begin_inset Index idx
23905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23910 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23921 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23934 \begin_inset CommandInset label
23936 name "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
23943 \begin_layout Standard
23944 The issues of this chapter are described in detail in the
23949 There you will also find tips and tricks for special cases.
23952 \begin_layout Section
23954 \begin_inset Index idx
23957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
23966 \begin_layout Standard
23967 To create a math formula, you can just click on the toolbar icon
23980 That will create a little blue rectangle, with purple markers around its
23982 That blue rectangle is the formula itself; the purple markers indicate
23983 what level of nesting within the formula you are at.
23984 You can also choose a particular formula type to insert via the
23986 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
23992 \begin_layout Standard
23993 Editing the parameters of a formula and adding math constructs can be done
23997 \begin_inset space ~
24002 , that appears if the cursor is in a formula.
24005 \begin_layout Standard
24006 There are two main types of formulas, inline formulas and display formulas.
24007 Inline formulas appear within a text line, like this one:
24010 \begin_layout Standard
24011 This is a line with an inline formula
24012 \begin_inset Formula $A=B$
24018 \begin_layout Standard
24019 Displayed formulas appear outside the text like if they were in a separate
24020 paragraph, like this one:
24021 \begin_inset Formula
24028 You can only number and reference displayed formulas.
24031 \begin_layout Standard
24033 also supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
24035 For example, typing
24036 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24049 , followed by a space, in a formula will create the Greek letter
24050 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha$
24054 Typing commands might sometimes be faster than using the
24057 \begin_inset space ~
24065 \begin_layout Subsection
24066 Navigating in Formulas
24067 \begin_inset Index idx
24070 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24079 \begin_layout Standard
24080 The best control over the cursor position within an existing formula is
24081 achieved with the arrow keys.
24083 uses small rectangles to indicate places where something can be inserted.
24084 The arrow keys can be used to navigate between parts of a formula.
24089 will leave a formula construct (a square root
24090 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2}$
24094 \begin_inset Formula $\left(f\right)$
24098 \begin_inset Formula $\left[\begin{array}{cc}
24101 \end{array}\right]$
24109 will leave the formula, placing the cursor after the formula.
24114 can be used to move horizontally in a formula; for example, through the
24115 cells of a matrix or the positions in a multi-line equation.
24118 \begin_layout Standard
24123 , printed in this document as
24124 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24128 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24132 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24135 , seems to do nothing in a formula, since it does not add a space between
24136 characters, but it does exit a nested structure.
24137 For this reason, you have to be careful about using
24142 For example, if you want
24143 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x+1}$
24151 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24161 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24165 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24170 , since in the latter case only the
24173 \begin_inset Formula $2x$
24178 will be under the square root sign:
24179 \begin_inset Formula $\sqrt{2x}+1$
24185 \begin_layout Standard
24186 You can leave many parts of a formula, like this matrix, partially filled
24188 \begin_inset Formula
24190 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
24199 If you leave a fraction only partially filled in, or a subscript with nothing
24200 in it, the results will be unpredictable, but most constructs don't mind.
24203 \begin_layout Subsection
24207 \begin_layout Standard
24208 You can select text within a formula in two different ways.
24209 Place the cursor at one end of the string of text you want, and press
24213 and a cursor movement key to select text.
24214 It will be highlighted as with regular text selection.
24215 Alternatively, you can select text with the mouse in the usual way.
24216 That text can then be cut or copied, and then pasted within any formula,
24217 but not in a normal text region in \SpecialChar LyX
24221 \begin_layout Subsection
24222 Exponents and Subscripts
24223 \begin_inset Index idx
24226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24233 \begin_inset Index idx
24236 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24245 \begin_layout Standard
24246 You can use the math panel to add super- or subscripts (buttons
24249 arg "math-superscript"
24255 arg "math-subscript"
24258 ), but it is often much easier to use a command.
24260 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
24263 , type in a formula
24266 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24276 puts the cursor back down on the base line of the expression.
24282 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2y}$
24286 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}y$
24292 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24298 If you use characters in the superscript, that could be accented with the
24300 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24304 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24307 , you have to use an extra
24311 to separate the circumflex and the character.
24312 For example, if you want
24313 \begin_inset Formula $x^{a}$
24319 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24325 Subscripts are similar: To get
24326 \begin_inset Formula $a_{1}$
24332 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24340 \begin_layout Subsection
24342 \begin_inset Index idx
24345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24354 \begin_layout Standard
24355 Create a fraction either with the command
24361 or by using the icon
24364 arg "math-insert \\frac"
24370 \begin_inset space ~
24376 You will be presented with an empty fraction.
24377 The cursor is above the fraction line.
24378 To move it to the bottom, simply press
24383 To move back up, press
24388 Any math structure can be placed in a fraction, as this example shows:
24389 \begin_inset Formula
24391 \left[\frac{1}{\left(\begin{array}{cc}
24394 \end{array}\right)}\right]
24402 \begin_layout Subsection
24404 \begin_inset Index idx
24407 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24416 \begin_layout Standard
24417 Roots can be created using the
24420 \begin_inset space ~
24428 arg "math-insert \\sqrt"
24434 arg "math-insert \\root"
24456 you can produce roots of higher orders, like cube roots, while
24462 always produces a square root.
24465 \begin_layout Subsection
24466 Operators with Limits
24467 \begin_inset Index idx
24470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24477 \begin_inset Index idx
24480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24487 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24489 name "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24496 \begin_layout Standard
24498 \begin_inset Formula $\sum$
24502 \begin_inset Formula $\int$
24505 ) operators are very often decorated with limits.
24506 These limits can be entered in \SpecialChar LyX
24507 by entering them as you would enter a super-
24508 or subscript, directly after the symbol.
24509 The sum operator will automatically place its
24510 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24514 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24517 over and under the symbol in displayed formulas, and to the side in inline
24519 \begin_inset Formula $\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e$
24523 \begin_inset Formula
24525 \sum\nolimits _{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}=e
24530 Integral signs, however, will place the limits to the side in both formula
24534 \begin_layout Standard
24535 All operators with limits will be automatically re-sized when placed in
24537 The placement of the limits can be changed by placing the cursor directly
24538 behind the operator and using the menu
24540 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
24541 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
24543 \begin_inset space ~
24547 \begin_inset space ~
24561 \begin_layout Standard
24562 Certain other mathematical expressions also have this
24563 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24567 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24571 \begin_inset Index idx
24574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24581 \begin_inset Formula
24583 \lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x),
24588 which will place the
24589 \begin_inset Formula $x\rightarrow\infty$
24593 \begin_inset Quotes eld
24597 \begin_inset Quotes erd
24601 In inline formulas it looks like this:
24602 \begin_inset Formula $\lim_{x\rightarrow\infty}f(x)$
24608 \begin_layout Standard
24609 Note that the lim-function was entered as the function macro
24616 Have a look at section
24617 \begin_inset space ~
24621 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24623 reference "subsec:Functions"
24627 for an explanation of function macros.
24630 \begin_layout Subsection
24632 \begin_inset Index idx
24635 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24644 \begin_layout Standard
24645 Most math symbols can be found in the
24648 \begin_inset space ~
24653 under one of several categories; including
24670 There are also the additional symbols provided by the American Mathematical
24674 \begin_layout Standard
24675 If you know the \SpecialChar LaTeX
24676 -command for a construct or symbol you wish to use, you
24677 don't have to use the
24680 \begin_inset space ~
24685 ; you can type the command directly into the formula.
24687 will convert it to the corresponding symbol or construct.
24690 \begin_layout Subsection
24692 \begin_inset Index idx
24695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24704 \begin_layout Standard
24705 You may want to create spaces that differ from the standard spacing that
24711 arg "command-alternatives math-space ; space-insert protected"
24717 \begin_inset space ~
24725 arg "math-insert \\space"
24729 This generates a small space, and shows a small marker on the screen.
24730 For example, the sequence
24735 \begin_inset Formula $a\,b$
24738 appears in \SpecialChar LyX
24740 \begin_inset Graphics
24741 filename clipart/SpaceMarker.png
24746 You can change the space to different sizes when you set the cursor behind
24747 the space marker and enter space again several times.
24748 With every space enter the size will be changed.
24749 Some markers for the space size appear red in \SpecialChar LyX
24750 , because they are negative
24752 Here are two examples:
24755 \begin_layout Standard
24765 \begin_inset Formula $a\quad b$
24771 \begin_layout Standard
24781 \begin_inset Formula $a\!b$
24787 \begin_layout Subsection
24789 \begin_inset Index idx
24792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24799 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24801 name "subsec:Functions"
24808 \begin_layout Standard
24812 \begin_inset space ~
24817 contains under the button
24820 arg "math-insert \\functions"
24823 a number of function macros, such as
24824 \begin_inset Formula $\sin$
24828 \begin_inset Formula $\lim$
24836 (you can also insert them in a formula by typing
24843 Standard mathematical practice is that functions are printed upright to
24844 avoid confusions, because
24845 \begin_inset Formula $sin$
24849 \begin_inset Formula $s\cdot i\cdot n$
24855 \begin_layout Standard
24856 Using the function macros will also produce correct spacing around the function:
24858 \begin_inset Formula $a\sin x$
24862 \begin_inset Formula $asinx$
24868 \begin_layout Standard
24869 For some mathematical objects, like limits, the macro changes where subscripts
24870 are placed, as described in section
24871 \begin_inset space ~
24875 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24877 reference "subsec:Operators-with-Limits"
24884 \begin_layout Subsection
24886 \begin_inset Index idx
24889 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24898 \begin_layout Standard
24899 In a formula you can insert accented characters in the same way as in text
24901 This may depend on your keyboard, or the bindings file you use.
24902 You can also use \SpecialChar LaTeX
24903 commands, for example, to enter
24904 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
24907 even if your keyboard doesn't have the circumflex enabled.
24908 Our example is entered by typing
24913 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
24920 \begin_inset space ~
24924 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
24926 reference "tab:Accent-names-and"
24930 shows the equivalences between the accent names and the commands.
24933 \begin_layout Standard
24934 \begin_inset Float table
24939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24940 \begin_inset Caption Standard
24942 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24943 \begin_inset CommandInset label
24945 name "tab:Accent-names-and"
24949 Accent names and the corresponding commands.
24957 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24959 \begin_inset Tabular
24960 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="11" columns="3">
24961 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
24962 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24963 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24964 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
24966 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24969 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24975 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
24978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
24984 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
24987 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25004 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25007 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25022 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25025 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25035 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25038 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25048 \begin_inset Formula $\hat{a}$
25058 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25061 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25076 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25079 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25089 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25092 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25102 \begin_inset Formula $\grave{a}$
25112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25130 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25133 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25143 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25156 \begin_inset Formula $\acute{a}$
25166 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25169 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25184 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25187 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25197 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25200 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25210 \begin_inset Formula $\ddot{a}$
25220 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25223 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25238 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25241 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25251 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25264 \begin_inset Formula $\tilde{a}$
25274 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25277 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25305 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25308 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25318 \begin_inset Formula $\dot{a}$
25328 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25331 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25346 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25349 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25359 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25362 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25372 \begin_inset Formula $\breve{a}$
25382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25400 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25403 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25413 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25426 \begin_inset Formula $\check{a}$
25436 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25454 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25457 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25467 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25480 \begin_inset Formula $\bar{a}$
25490 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25493 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25499 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
25502 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
25515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25525 \begin_inset Formula $\vec{a}$
25546 \begin_layout Standard
25547 You can choose one of the accents by selecting an item from the
25550 \begin_inset space ~
25558 arg "math-insert \\hat"
25561 in the math panel; this will apply to any selection you have made within
25565 \begin_layout Section
25566 Brackets and Delimiters
25567 \begin_inset Index idx
25570 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25577 \begin_inset Index idx
25580 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25587 \begin_inset CommandInset label
25589 name "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25596 \begin_layout Standard
25597 There are several brackets available through \SpecialChar LyX
25599 For some purposes, using just the keys
25604 But if you want to surround a large structure, like a matrix or a fraction,
25605 or if you have several layers of brackets, it is better to use the math
25606 toolbar delimiter icon
25609 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25613 For example, if you construct the brackets around a matrix in this way:
25614 \begin_inset Formula
25616 \left[\begin{array}{cc}
25624 it makes it easier to see the layers of parentheses.
25625 Below, the expression on the left was entered using the delimiter icon
25629 arg "dialog-show mathdelimiter"
25632 and the expression on the right was entered using the
25638 \begin_inset Formula
25640 \frac{1}{\left(1+\left(\frac{1}{1+\left(\frac{1}{1+x}\right)}\right)\right)}\qquad\qquad\frac{1}{(1+(\frac{1}{1+(\frac{1}{1+x})}))}
25648 \begin_layout Standard
25649 If you use the delimiter icon, the parentheses, and other brackets from
25650 that menu will automatically re-size to accommodate the size of what is
25654 \begin_layout Standard
25655 To construct brackets click on the button for the bracket you want on the
25656 left side and right side.
25657 If you use the option
25660 \begin_inset space ~
25665 , the selected bracket type will be used for the left and the right side.
25666 The selection will be shown as \SpecialChar TeX
25668 If you want one side not to have a bracket, use
25673 It will appear in \SpecialChar LyX
25674 with a dotted line, but nothing will be printed.
25677 \begin_layout Standard
25678 If you want to place brackets around existing math structures, like a square
25679 root, you can do so by first highlighting (selecting) the structure that
25680 is to go inside the brackets.
25681 Then choose the appropriate brackets for left and right and click on
25686 The most common bracket combinations (parentheses, square brackets, and
25687 braces, on both sides) can be entered more quickly using keyboard shortcuts.
25688 For example, to insert a pair of parentheses, select the structure and
25692 arg "math-delim ( )"
25698 \begin_layout Section
25699 Arrays and Multi-line Equations
25700 \begin_inset Index idx
25703 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25710 \begin_inset Index idx
25713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25720 \begin_inset Index idx
25723 \begin_layout Plain Layout
25724 Math ! Multi-line Equations
25732 \begin_layout Standard
25733 Matrices are entered in \SpecialChar LyX
25737 \begin_inset space ~
25745 arg "dialog-show mathmatrix"
25749 It will open a dialog for you to choose the number of rows/columns.
25750 Here is an example:
25751 \begin_inset Formula
25753 \left(\begin{array}{ccc}
25762 The parentheses aren't automatic, but you can add them as described in section
25763 \begin_inset space ~
25767 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25769 reference "sec:Brackets-and-Delimiters"
25774 When you construct the matrix, you can decide whether the column entries
25775 will be left-, right-, or center-justified.
25776 This alignment is set in the box
25781 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25789 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25793 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25801 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25813 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25819 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25827 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25830 for every column as default.
25831 For example, the sequence
25832 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25840 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25843 means that the first column will be left-justified, the second will be
25844 centered, and the third column will be right-justified, because each letter
25845 corresponds to the relevant column.
25846 The result will look like this:
25847 \begin_inset Formula
25850 this & this\,column & this\,column\\
25851 column & has & has\,right\\
25852 has\,left\,alignment & center\,alignment & alignment
25861 \begin_layout Standard
25862 You can add more rows to an existing matrix by entering
25865 arg "newline-insert newline"
25868 while the cursor is in the matrix.
25869 Adding or deleting columns can be done via the menu
25871 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
25874 or the math toolbar.
25877 \begin_layout Standard
25878 There are other arrays used in formulas, such as distinctions of cases.
25879 It can be created with the menu
25881 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
25882 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
25884 \begin_inset space ~
25896 Here is an example:
25897 \begin_inset Formula
25911 \begin_layout Standard
25912 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
25915 Multi-line formulas are created when you press
25918 arg "newline-insert newline"
25922 In an empty formula you can see that three blue boxes appear, one for each
25927 arg "newline-insert newline"
25930 in a non-empty formula, the part before the relation sign (equal sign
25931 \begin_inset Quotes eld
25935 \begin_inset Quotes erd
25938 etc.) will be inserted automatically in the first column, the relation sign
25939 is in the second column, and the rest in the third column.
25940 A new row is created by every further entry of
25943 arg "newline-insert newline"
25947 Multi-line formulas are always displayed formulas.
25948 Here is an example:
25949 \begin_inset Formula
25951 a^{2} & = & (b^{2}+c^{2})(b^{2}-c^{2})\nonumber \\
25952 a & = & \sqrt{b^{4}-c^{4}}\label{eq:asquared}
25957 Note that the middle column is designed for relation signs so structures
25958 in this column will be printed in a smaller size:
25959 \begin_inset Formula
25961 \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B} & \frac{A}{B}
25969 \begin_layout Standard
25970 The multi-line formula type described here is called
25977 There are other multi-line types more suitable for certain situations,
25978 for example if you want a better inter-line spacing than in formula
25979 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25981 reference "eq:asquared"
25986 The other types are described in section
25987 \begin_inset space ~
25991 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
25993 reference "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
26000 \begin_layout Section
26001 Formula Numbering and Referencing
26002 \begin_inset Index idx
26005 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26006 Math ! Formula numbering
26012 \begin_inset Index idx
26015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26016 Math ! Referencing formulas
26022 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26024 name "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
26031 \begin_layout Standard
26032 To number a formula, set the cursor in the formula and use the menu
26034 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26035 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26037 \begin_inset space ~
26041 \begin_inset space ~
26049 arg "math-number-toggle"
26053 The formula number appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26054 within parentheses.
26055 The number shown is temporary and may be different when the output is generated.
26056 The placement and format of the formula number in the output depends on
26057 the document class.
26058 In this document the number is printed together with the chapter number,
26059 separated by a dot:
26060 \begin_inset Formula
26070 arg "math-number-toggle"
26073 in a numbered formula will switch off the numbering.
26074 You can only number displayed formulas.
26077 \begin_layout Standard
26078 Multi-line formulas can be numbered line by line: Using the menu
26080 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26081 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26083 \begin_inset space ~
26087 \begin_inset space ~
26095 arg "math-number-line-toggle"
26098 will only toggle the numbering of the line where the cursor is:
26099 \begin_inset Formula
26102 2 & = & 4-2\nonumber \\
26108 To number all lines use the shortcut
26111 arg "math-number-toggle"
26117 \begin_layout Standard
26118 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
26121 Every displayed formula can be referenced by its number using a label.
26122 A label is inserted with the menu
26124 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26133 ) when the cursor is in the formula.
26134 This opens a dialog to enter the label.
26135 It is recommended that you use the suggested
26136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26147 as the first part of the label, because this helps later to identify the
26148 label type when you have many labels in your document.
26149 We inserted in the following example the label
26150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26157 in the second line:
26158 \begin_inset Formula
26160 \tanh(x) & = & \frac{\sinh(x)}{\cosh(x)}\nonumber \\
26161 & = & \frac{\mathrm{e}^{2x}-1}{\mathrm{e}^{2x}+1}\label{eq:tanhExp}
26166 Every labeled line is automatically numbered.
26167 Therefore the label is shown behind the formula number.
26168 You can reference a labeled formula using the menu
26170 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
26172 \begin_inset space ~
26180 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
26184 A dialog appears to choose a label you want to refer to.
26185 The reference appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26186 as a gray cross-reference box and in the output
26187 as the formula number:
26190 \begin_layout Standard
26191 This is a cross-reference to equation (
26192 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26194 reference "eq:tanhExp"
26201 \begin_layout Standard
26202 The properties of \SpecialChar LyX
26203 's cross-reference box are described in section
26204 \begin_inset space ~
26208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26210 reference "sec:Cross-References"
26215 To delete a label, set the cursor at the end in the labeled formula and
26223 \begin_layout Section
26224 User defined math macros
26225 \begin_inset Index idx
26228 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26237 \begin_layout Standard
26239 allows you to define macros for formulas which is very useful when you
26240 have equations of the same form in a document several times.
26241 Math macros are explained in section
26244 \begin_inset space ~
26256 \begin_layout Section
26260 \begin_layout Subsection
26262 \begin_inset Index idx
26265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26274 \begin_layout Standard
26275 The standard font for text is italic, for numbers the standard is roman.
26276 To set a font in a formula, use the
26279 \begin_inset space ~
26287 arg "math-insert \\font"
26290 , or enter its command, listed in table
26291 \begin_inset space ~
26295 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
26297 reference "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26304 \begin_layout Standard
26305 \begin_inset Float table
26310 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26311 \begin_inset Caption Standard
26313 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26314 \begin_inset CommandInset label
26316 name "tab:Typefaces-and-the"
26320 Typefaces and the corresponding commands.
26328 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26330 \begin_inset Tabular
26331 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="9" columns="2">
26332 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
26333 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26334 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="0pt">
26336 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26339 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26345 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26348 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26356 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26359 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26366 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{Roman}$
26374 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26377 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26389 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26392 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26393 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbf{Bold}}$
26401 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26404 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26416 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26420 \begin_inset Formula $\mathit{Italic}$
26428 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26443 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26446 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26453 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{Typewriter}$
26461 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26476 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26479 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26480 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbf{\mathbb{BLACKBOARD}}$
26488 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26491 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26503 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26506 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26507 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{Fraktur}$
26515 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26518 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26541 \begin_inset Formula $\mathcal{CALLIGRAPHIC}$
26549 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26552 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26568 \begin_inset Formula $\mathsf{SansSerif}$
26576 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
26579 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26602 \begin_layout Standard
26603 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
26606 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26611 You can only print capital letters in the typefaces
26627 \begin_layout Standard
26628 When you use a typeface, a blue box is inserted in the formula.
26629 Every character in this box will be printed in this typeface.
26634 within the box will set the cursor outside, so that you have to use a protected
26635 space when you need a space in the box.
26636 Here is an example where
26637 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26641 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26648 denotes the set of numbers:
26649 \begin_inset Formula
26651 f(x)=\sqrt{x}\:;\:x\in\mathbb{N}
26659 \begin_layout Standard
26660 The typefaces are nestable, which can cause confusion.
26661 You can, for example, put a character in
26670 \begin_inset Formula $\mathtt{abc\mathfrak{d}e}$
26674 \begin_inset Newline newline
26677 So it is better not to use this feature.
26680 \begin_layout Standard
26681 The typefaces have no effect on Greek letters:
26682 \begin_inset Formula $\mathfrak{abc\delta e}$
26686 \begin_inset Newline newline
26689 You can only print them emboldened using the command
26695 , which works like the other typeface commands:
26696 \begin_inset Formula $\alpha\beta\gamma\boldsymbol{\alpha\beta\gamma}$
26702 \begin_layout Standard
26709 works for all symbols, letters, and numbers.
26712 \begin_layout Standard
26713 A number of other font options are available as well, in the menu
26715 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26716 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
26718 \begin_inset space ~
26726 \begin_layout Subsection
26728 \begin_inset Index idx
26731 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26740 \begin_layout Standard
26741 Typefaces are useful for entering some characters in some given font, but
26743 For typing longer pieces of text use the math text, which is obtained using
26747 \begin_inset space ~
26751 \begin_inset space ~
26759 \begin_inset space ~
26767 arg "math-insert \\font"
26771 Math text appears in \SpecialChar LyX
26772 in black instead of blue.
26773 You can use spaces and accents in math text as in normal text.
26774 Here is an example:
26775 \begin_inset Formula
26778 x & \mbox{if I say so}\\
26779 -x & \mbox{under Umständen}
26788 \begin_layout Subsection
26790 \begin_inset Index idx
26793 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26802 \begin_layout Standard
26803 There are four font styles (relative sizes) used in math-mode, which are
26804 automatically chosen in most situations.
26822 For most characters,
26830 are actually the same size, but fractions, superscripts and subscripts,
26831 and certain other structures, are set larger in
26836 Except for some operators, which resize themselves to accommodate various
26837 situations, all text will be set in the styles that \SpecialChar LaTeX
26838 thinks are appropriate.
26839 These choices can be overridden by using the math panel button
26842 arg "math-insert \\style"
26846 A box for the size will be created in which you can insert the math structure.
26847 For example, you can set
26848 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{1}{2}$
26851 , which is normally in
26860 \begin_inset Formula ${\displaystyle \frac{1}{2}}$
26864 The four styles are used in the following example:
26867 \begin_layout Standard
26868 \begin_inset Formula $displaystyle$
26872 \begin_inset Formula ${\textstyle textstyle}$
26876 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptstyle scriptstyle}$
26880 \begin_inset Formula ${\scriptscriptstyle scriptscriptstyle}$
26886 \begin_layout Standard
26887 All these math-mode font sizes are relative so that if the whole math inset
26888 is set in a particular size with the menu
26890 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
26892 \begin_inset space ~
26897 , all sizes in the formula will be adjusted relative to this size.
26898 Similarly, if the base font size of the document is changed, all fonts
26899 will be adjusted to correspond.
26900 As an example here is a formula in the font size
26901 \begin_inset Quotes eld
26905 \begin_inset Quotes erd
26911 \begin_layout Standard
26915 \begin_inset Formula $\mathrm{e}=\sum_{n=0}^{\infty}\frac{1}{n!}$
26921 \begin_layout Section
26922 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
26924 \begin_inset Index idx
26927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26934 \begin_inset Index idx
26937 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26946 \begin_layout Standard
26948 supports the packages provided by the American Mathematical Society (AMS)
26949 that are in common use.
26952 \begin_layout Subsection
26953 Enabling AMS-Support
26956 \begin_layout Standard
26957 You can make the facilities of the AMS-packages explicitly available in
26958 the document by selecting the checkbox
26961 \begin_inset space ~
26965 \begin_inset space ~
26969 \begin_inset space ~
26976 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
26980 \begin_inset Index idx
26983 \begin_layout Plain Layout
26984 Document ! Settings
26992 \begin_inset space ~
26998 AMS is needed for many math-constructs; so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
26999 -errors in formulas,
27000 ensure that you have enabled AMS.
27003 \begin_layout Subsection
27005 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27007 name "subsec:AMS-Formula-Types"
27012 \begin_inset Index idx
27015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27016 Math ! Multi-line Equations
27024 \begin_layout Standard
27025 AMS-\SpecialChar LaTeX
27026 provides a selection of different formula types.
27028 allows you to choose between
27049 We refer you to the AMS-documentation,
27050 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27056 , for an explanation of these formula types.
27059 \begin_layout Chapter
27063 \begin_layout Section
27065 \begin_inset Index idx
27068 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27075 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27077 name "sec:Cross-References"
27084 \begin_layout Standard
27085 One of \SpecialChar LyX
27086 's strengths is cross-references.
27087 You can reference every section, float, footnote, formula, and list in
27089 To reference a document part, you have to insert a label into it.
27090 The label is used as an anchor and a name for the reference.
27091 We want for example to refer to the second item of the following list:
27094 \begin_layout Enumerate
27098 \begin_layout Enumerate
27099 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27101 name "enu:Second-item"
27108 \begin_layout Enumerate
27112 \begin_layout Standard
27113 First we insert a label into the second item with the menu
27115 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27118 or by pressing the toolbar button
27125 A gray label box like this:
27126 \begin_inset Graphics
27127 filename clipart/label.png
27131 is inserted and the label window pops up asking for the label text.
27133 offers as text the first words of the item with a prefix, in our case
27135 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27143 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27148 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27156 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27160 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27164 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27168 The prefix depends on the document part where the label is inserted; for
27169 example, if you insert a label into a section heading, the suggested prefix
27171 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27179 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27185 \begin_layout Standard
27186 To reference the item, we refer to its label using the menu
27188 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27191 or the toolbar button
27194 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
27198 A gray cross-reference box like this:
27199 \begin_inset Graphics
27200 filename clipart/reference.png
27204 is inserted and the cross-reference window appears showing all the labels
27206 We can now sort the labels alphabetically and then choose the entry
27207 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27215 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27219 At the position of the cross-reference box the item number will appear
27223 \begin_layout Standard
27224 As an alternative to
27226 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27229 , you can right-click on a label and in the popup menu select
27234 The cross-reference to this label is now in the clipboard and can be pasted
27235 to the actual cursor position via the menu
27237 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
27249 \begin_layout Standard
27250 Here is our cross-reference: Item
27251 \begin_inset space ~
27255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27257 reference "enu:Second-item"
27264 \begin_layout Standard
27265 It is recommended to use a protected space
27269 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27270 described in section
27271 \begin_inset space ~
27275 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27277 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
27286 between the cross-reference name and the cross-reference to avoid ugly
27287 line breaks between them.
27290 \begin_layout Standard
27291 There are six formats of cross-references:
27294 \begin_layout Description
27295 <reference>: prints the number, this is the default:
27296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27298 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27305 \begin_layout Description
27306 (<reference>): prints the number within two parentheses, this is the style
27307 normally used to reference formulas, especially when the reference name
27309 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27313 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27317 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27319 reference "eq:tanhExp"
27326 \begin_layout Description
27327 <page>: prints the page number: Page
27328 \begin_inset space ~
27332 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27333 LatexCommand pageref
27334 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27341 \begin_layout Description
27343 \begin_inset space ~
27347 \begin_inset space ~
27350 <page>: prints the text “on page” and the page number:
27351 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27352 LatexCommand vpageref
27353 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27358 \begin_inset Newline newline
27361 If the label is on the same page, it prints “on this page”; if the label
27362 is on a facing page in a two-sided document, it prints “on the facing page”;
27363 if it is on the previous page which is not a facing page, it prints “on
27364 the previous page”; if it is on the next page which is not a facing page,
27365 it prints “on the next page”.
27366 The wording of the printed text also depends on the used document class.
27369 \begin_layout Description
27371 \begin_inset space ~
27375 \begin_inset space ~
27379 \begin_inset space ~
27382 <page>: prints the number, the text “on page” and the page number:
27383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27385 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27390 \begin_inset Newline newline
27393 If the label is on the same page, this format behaves like
27399 ; otherwise it behaves like
27403 \begin_inset space ~
27407 \begin_inset space ~
27416 \begin_layout Description
27418 \begin_inset space ~
27421 reference: prints a self defined cross-reference format.
27422 \begin_inset Newline newline
27426 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27429 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27434 This feature is only available when you have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27444 \begin_inset Index idx
27447 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27449 -packages ! prettyref
27455 \begin_inset Index idx
27458 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27460 -packages ! refstyle
27471 \begin_inset Newline newline
27474 You can select which \SpecialChar LaTeX
27475 -package should be used for this feature by setting
27478 Use refstyle (not prettyref) for cross-references
27482 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
27483 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
27491 is the default and preferred because
27495 supports only English documents.
27496 The format is specified by using the command
27508 (refstyle) in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27509 preamble of the document.
27510 For example redefining all references to figures (which have the label
27512 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27520 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27524 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414614
27532 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414616
27536 \begin_inset Newline newline
27543 newref{fig}{refcmd={Image on page
27546 \change_inserted 424524441 1484857490
27550 \begin_inset Newline newline
27553 Please note that neither
27561 (nor \SpecialChar LyX
27562 itself) predefines reference formats for all available types.
27563 This is especially true for the wide variety of mathematical `theorem'
27565 So if you want to make formatted references to, say, Propositions, then
27566 you will need to define the relevant format yourself.
27571 , you might do so as follows:
27572 \begin_inset Newline newline
27579 newrefformat{prop}{Proposition
27586 \begin_inset Newline newline
27589 For more information about
27590 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843645
27591 defining formatted references
27592 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843647
27595 , have a look at the package documentation
27596 \change_deleted 424524441 1484843659
27600 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
27602 key "prettyref,refstyle"
27607 \change_inserted 424524441 1484843594
27609 \begin_inset Newline newline
27612 The `Plural' and `Capitalized' options will be available with formatted
27613 references only if you are using the
27618 See its documentation, again, for more information.
27621 \begin_layout Description
27623 \begin_inset space ~
27626 reference: prints the caption or the name of the reference:
27627 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27628 LatexCommand nameref
27629 reference "fig:Two-distorted-images"
27634 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414460
27638 \begin_layout Description
27640 \change_inserted 424524441 1483817846
27642 \begin_inset space ~
27645 only: prints only the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27646 label for the reference.
27647 This allows for customization, using ERT, if you want to issue a command
27648 that LyX does not support.
27653 , then you may want to use the
27654 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27658 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27661 option, which will output only the part of the reference following the
27663 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27667 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27671 This is the form needed for, e.g.,
27676 \change_deleted 424524441 1483414539
27680 \begin_layout Standard
27681 The number and current page of the referenced document part in the output
27682 is automatically calculated by \SpecialChar LaTeX
27684 The varieties are adjusted in the field
27688 of the cross-reference window, that appears when you click on the cross-referen
27692 \begin_layout Standard
27693 You can only use the style
27697 to reference numbered document parts, while the reference style
27701 is always possible.
27704 \begin_layout Standard
27705 If you want to reference a section, put the label in the section heading;
27706 for floats put the label in the caption; for footnotes put the label in
27708 Referencing formulas is explained in section
27709 \begin_inset space ~
27713 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27715 reference "sec:Formula-Numbering-and"
27722 \begin_layout Standard
27723 Right-clicking on a cross-reference opens a context menu.
27727 \begin_inset space ~
27731 \begin_inset space ~
27736 sets the cursor before the referenced label.
27737 This entry will be renamed in the context menu of the label to
27740 \begin_inset space ~
27745 so that you can use it to set the cursor back to the cross-reference.
27746 You can also go back with the toolbar button
27749 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
27755 \begin_layout Standard
27756 You can change labels at any time.
27757 References to the changed label will automatically be updated so that you
27758 do not need to think about this.
27761 \begin_layout Standard
27762 If a cross-reference refers to a non-existent label, you will see in \SpecialChar LyX
27764 in the cross-reference label and two question marks in the output instead
27768 \begin_layout Standard
27769 References are described in detail in the section
27770 \begin_inset space ~
27780 \begin_inset space ~
27786 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27790 \begin_layout Standard
27792 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27793 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
27796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27798 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27803 It is recommended to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
27809 \begin_inset Index idx
27812 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27814 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27816 -packages ! refstyle
27826 \begin_inset Index idx
27829 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27831 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27833 -packages ! prettyref
27838 does not know all of \SpecialChar LyX
27839 's possible label shortcuts
27843 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27845 \change_inserted 424524441 1483414754
27846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
27850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
27853 is for example \SpecialChar LyX
27854 's shortcut for labels in figure captions.
27859 and is not internationalized.
27869 \begin_layout Section
27870 Table of Contents and other Listings
27871 \begin_inset Index idx
27874 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27881 \begin_inset Index idx
27884 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27885 Navigating ! Outline
27891 \begin_inset Index idx
27894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
27901 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27910 \begin_layout Subsection
27912 \begin_inset CommandInset label
27914 name "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
27921 \begin_layout Standard
27922 The Table of Contents (TOC) is inserted with the menu
27924 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
27925 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
27927 \begin_inset space ~
27931 \begin_inset space ~
27937 It is displayed in \SpecialChar LyX
27939 If you click on it, the
27943 window appears, showing you the TOC entries as outline, which allows you
27944 to move and rearrange sections in your documents.
27945 So this operation is an alternative to the menu
27947 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
27949 \begin_inset space ~
27954 that is described in section
27955 \begin_inset space ~
27959 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27961 reference "subsec:The-Outliner"
27968 \begin_layout Standard
27969 The TOC in the document output lists every numbered section automatically.
27970 If you have declared a short title for a section heading, as described
27972 \begin_inset space ~
27976 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27978 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
27982 , it will be used in the TOC instead of the section heading.
27984 \begin_inset space ~
27988 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
27990 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
27994 describes how the level is adjusted that defines which section types are
27996 Unnumbered sections are not listed in the TOC.
27999 \begin_layout Subsection
28000 List of Figures, Tables, Listings and Algorithms
28001 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28003 name "subsec:List-of-Figures"
28010 \begin_layout Standard
28011 Table, figure, listings and algorithm lists are very much like the table
28013 You can insert them via the
28015 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28019 The list entries are the float captions and the float number.
28022 \begin_layout Section
28023 URLs and Hyperlinks
28024 \begin_inset Index idx
28027 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28034 \begin_inset Index idx
28037 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28046 \begin_layout Subsection
28048 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28057 \begin_layout Standard
28058 Links to web pages or email addresses can be inserted via the menu
28060 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28066 \begin_layout Standard
28067 Here is an example URL: \SpecialChar LyX
28069 \begin_inset Flex URL
28072 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28082 \begin_layout Standard
28083 You cannot change the style of the link text, the URL text will always be
28089 To be able to format the URL text, use hyperlinks as explained in the next
28093 \begin_layout Standard
28094 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
28097 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28102 URLs must not end with a backslash, otherwise you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
28111 \begin_layout Subsection
28113 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28115 name "subsec:Hyperlinks"
28122 \begin_layout Standard
28123 Hyperlinks can be inserted with the menu
28125 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28128 or with the toolbar button
28135 The appearing dialog has two fields:
28144 The name is the printed text for the hyperlink.
28145 The hyperlink type can be a weblink like this:
28146 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28148 name "LyX's homepage"
28149 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28153 , an Email address like this:
28154 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28156 name "lyx-docs mailing list"
28157 target "lyx-docs@lists.lyx.org?subject=LyX's documentation"
28162 , or a link to a file.
28165 \begin_layout Standard
28166 You can start applications via a hyperlink when you insert a weblink by
28168 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28176 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28179 to the link target.
28182 \begin_layout Standard
28183 Hyperlinks will automatically be hyphenated if necessary in the PDF output,
28184 and become clickable in the DVI and PDF-output.
28185 To set the format of the link text, highlight the hyperlink inset and use
28186 the text style dialog.
28187 This is for example a hyperlink with bold sans serif text:
28191 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28193 name "LyX's homepage"
28194 target "http://www.lyx.org"
28201 \begin_layout Standard
28202 The link text color can be changed, when the option
28206 is set in the PDF Properties dialog (menu
28208 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28209 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
28213 The link text is for example set in this document to blue by adding the
28215 \begin_inset Newline newline
28223 \begin_inset Newline newline
28230 in the PDF Properties dialog.
28233 \begin_layout Section
28235 \begin_inset Index idx
28238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28245 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28247 name "sec:Appendices"
28254 \begin_layout Standard
28255 Appendices are created with the menu
28257 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28259 \begin_inset space ~
28263 \begin_inset space ~
28269 This menu sets the document from the current cursor position to the end
28270 as the appendix part of the book.
28271 This part is marked with a red borderline.
28274 \begin_layout Standard
28275 Every chapter (or section) within the appendix part is treated as an appendix,
28276 numbered with a capital Latin letter.
28277 The appendix subsections are numbered with this letter followed by a dot
28278 and the subsection number.
28279 All appendix sections can be referenced as if they were normal sections,
28283 \begin_layout Standard
28285 \begin_inset space ~
28289 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28291 reference "chap:Credits"
28296 \begin_inset space ~
28300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28302 reference "subsec:Export"
28309 \begin_layout Section
28311 \begin_inset Index idx
28314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28321 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28323 name "sec:Bibliography"
28330 \begin_layout Standard
28331 There are two ways of generating the bibliography in a \SpecialChar LyX
28333 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880152
28335 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880151
28339 You can include a bibliography database,
28340 \change_deleted -712698321 1483880276
28345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28346 Known under the name
28347 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28350 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28352 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28362 which is explained in
28363 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28364 the next subsection
28365 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890955
28367 \begin_inset space ~
28371 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28373 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28382 , or you can insert the bibliography manually, using the paragraph environment
28388 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28390 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883190
28394 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883197
28398 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890942
28402 \begin_inset space ~
28406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28408 reference "subsec:Biblio_environment"
28413 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883212
28417 If you want anything other than the numerical citations that are used in
28419 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28421 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880176
28424 author-year citations,
28425 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883518
28426 and if you have more than a handful of references,
28429 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28431 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883526
28432 should seriously consider
28439 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880298
28441 \change_deleted -712698321 1483883190
28444 a bibliography database.
28445 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883092
28449 \begin_layout Standard
28451 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883578
28452 In order to demonstrate the difference between these two approaches, we
28453 use two bibliographies in this document, a
28457 environment and a database-generated bibliography.
28458 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
28459 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
28460 In other words, the database approach relieves you, amongst other things,
28461 from the burden to check which entries you have actually cited.
28466 \begin_layout Subsection
28468 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885645
28469 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28471 name "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
28477 The Bibliography Environment
28480 \begin_layout Standard
28485 environment, every paragraph begins with a gray bibliography box labeled
28487 If you click on it, you will get a dialog in which you can set a
28496 The key is the symbolic name by which you will refer to this bibliography
28499 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880726
28500 Each entry needs to be given a unique key, which is one word consisting
28501 of ASCII characters only.
28504 For example, our second entry in the bibliography is a book about \SpecialChar LaTeX
28507 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28511 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28514 , a short form of its title, as the key.
28515 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880732
28519 \begin_layout Standard
28520 You can cross-reference a bibliography entry using the menu
28522 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28525 or the toolbar button
28528 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
28532 A citation reference box is inserted and a citation window will appear
28533 containing the available citations.
28534 Select one or more keys from the list and
28544 The citation reference box will be labeled with the referenced key(s).
28545 If you click on the box, the citation window will appear and you can change
28549 \begin_layout Standard
28550 Citation references appear in the output as the number of the bibliography
28551 entry with surrounding brackets.
28556 for the entry, the label will appear instead of the number.
28557 Here are two examples; the first without a label, the second with the label
28559 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28563 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28569 \begin_layout Standard
28573 Companion Second Edition
28576 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28578 key "latexcompanion"
28585 \begin_layout Standard
28586 The \SpecialChar LyX
28587 -Team members are listed in the Credits:
28588 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28595 \change_inserted -712698321 1483880908
28599 \begin_layout Standard
28601 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881419
28602 You can also produce author-year or author-number citations, using
28607 In order to do so, the label needs to be given the form
28608 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28612 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28616 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28619 Author A and Author B(Year)
28620 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28627 a blank between the author(s) and the opening parenthesis that delimits
28629 Then, if you select
28635 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
28639 \begin_inset Index idx
28642 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28644 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881295
28645 Document ! Settings
28652 Bibliography\SpecialChar menuseparator
28656 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
28658 reference "subsec:Citation-Format"
28665 ), you can select between different author-year or author-number styles.
28670 \begin_layout Standard
28671 To align all entries in the bibliography environment you can set a longest
28674 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
28676 \begin_inset space ~
28684 arg "layout-paragraph"
28688 All entries are then indented in the output by the width of the given label.
28691 \begin_layout Subsection
28692 Bibliography databases
28693 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882661
28694 (Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28698 \begin_inset Index idx
28701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28702 Bibliography ! Databases
28708 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882653
28710 \begin_inset Index idx
28713 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28714 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28723 \begin_inset CommandInset label
28725 name "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
28732 \begin_layout Standard
28733 Bibliography databases are useful if you use the same
28734 \change_deleted -712698321 1483881524
28736 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881525
28739 in different documents.
28743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28744 They are also useful for keeping a database of articles and notes concerning
28746 Most of the database programs mentioned below allow you to store annotations
28747 and reviews along with bibliographical information.
28752 It also makes it very easy to have a uniform layout for all bibliography
28754 You can collect the bibliography of all relevant books and articles of
28755 your working field in a database.
28756 This database can be used for different documents, and by default only
28757 the entries cited in a particular document will appear in the bibliography
28758 list for that document.
28759 This relieves you of the need to keep track of which articles and books
28763 \begin_layout Standard
28764 The database is a text file with the file extension
28765 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28773 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28776 , containing the bibliography in a special format.
28777 The format is explained in
28778 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28784 and in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
28786 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
28788 key "Mittelbach,Kopka,Lamport"
28793 The file can be created using any text editor, but normally one uses a
28794 special program to create and edit the entries in the database.
28795 A list of such programs is maintained on the \SpecialChar LyX
28797 \begin_inset Flex URL
28800 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28802 http://wiki.lyx.org/BibTeX/Programs
28808 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881708
28812 \begin_layout Standard
28814 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885542
28816 supports two different approaches to use bibliography databases in a document.
28817 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28818 is the classic technique that has been the only way to use such databases
28820 It is quite established and mature, and there is a huge range of existing
28821 styles available, but it has its drawbacks, especially when it comes to
28822 more complex bibliographic needs and support for specific languages and
28824 Those are addressed by a rather new and ambitious approach,
28833 reads the same database format than Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28834 (although it has been significantly
28835 extended beyond Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28840 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28842 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882543
28847 can handle any classic Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28848 database, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28849 might conversely fail to correctly
28850 handle databases that use specific
28861 ), but it uses a different framework to generate citations and references
28865 \begin_layout Standard
28867 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882638
28868 Both approaches are described in turn.
28871 \begin_layout Subsubsection
28873 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28874 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28876 \begin_inset Index idx
28879 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28881 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882655
28882 Bibliography ! Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28893 \begin_layout Standard
28895 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882678
28897 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882681
28901 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882690
28902 via Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28907 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
28912 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
28914 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882685
28918 \begin_inset space ~
28924 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
28925 In this window you can add one or more databases and select a
28926 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882797
28927 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28937 Add bibliography to TOC
28939 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
28944 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
28945 in the document or just the cited references.
28948 \begin_layout Standard
28950 \change_inserted -712698321 1483882781
28951 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
28954 style file is a text file with the file extension
28955 \begin_inset Quotes eld
28963 \begin_inset Quotes erd
28966 that controls how the bibliography entries will appear.
28967 Your \SpecialChar LaTeX
28968 distribution should provide several of these, and many publishers
28969 provide their own style files, so that you don't have to take care of the
28971 It is of course possible to write your own style file, but this is something
28976 \begin_layout Plain Layout
28977 For information on how this is done, have a look at
28978 \begin_inset Newline newline
28982 \begin_inset CommandInset href
28984 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxhak.pdf"
28994 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883972
28995 In this document, we used the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29000 , which provides an alpha-numeric style in accordance with the German Standards
29006 \begin_layout Standard
29007 Inserting a citation reference works as described in the previous section.
29008 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883993
29012 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29014 \change_inserted -712698321 1483883999
29016 \begin_inset Index idx
29019 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29021 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884003
29022 Bibliography ! Biblatex
29030 \begin_layout Standard
29032 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884100
29033 Accessing a database via
29037 is almost identical to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29040 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
29045 TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
29047 \begin_inset space ~
29053 A gray box will be inserted and a window appears.
29054 In this window you can add one or more databases, but as opposed to Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29056 you cannot select a
29060 file (we will explain later, why).
29061 As with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29064 Add bibliography to TOC
29066 adds a table of contents entry for the bibliography.
29071 drop box you can select whether to include all the entries in the database
29072 in the document or just the cited references.
29075 \begin_layout Standard
29077 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884492
29082 has two different style files: a bibliography style file (a text file with
29084 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29092 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29095 ) controls how the bibliography entries will look like, and a citation style
29097 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29105 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29108 ) controls the look of the citation references in the text.
29109 Usually, such style files come in pairs, and it makes most sense to use
29110 matching styles, but it is possible to mix any citation style with any
29111 bibliography style.
29114 \begin_layout Standard
29116 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891283
29121 styles are not set in the
29124 \begin_inset space ~
29135 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29136 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29140 However, in the former dialog (in the
29144 field which is only visible if you use
29148 ), you can enter options that change the way the bibliography is displayed
29149 (for instance concerning its heading).
29150 These options are detailed in the
29155 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29166 \begin_layout Standard
29168 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885667
29169 Inserting a citation reference works as described in section
29170 \begin_inset space ~
29174 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29176 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29186 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29188 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885726
29189 Bibliography Processors
29192 \begin_layout Standard
29193 To generate the bibliography from a database, \SpecialChar LyX
29195 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885808
29196 a bibliography processor, that is an external program that reads a database,
29197 sorts the citations and processes the data in a way it can be included
29202 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885822
29204 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885823
29208 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885903
29214 As the whole approach, it has the advantage that it is very mature and
29215 widespread, but the disadvantage that it has severe limitations, due to
29219 \begin_layout Standard
29221 \change_inserted -712698321 1483885977
29222 Meanwhile, some alternatives have been developed that address (some of)
29224 LyX natively supports some of them and lets you select a custom processor.
29225 \change_deleted -712698321 1483885997
29226 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29231 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886029
29232 do this on a general level in
29234 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29235 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29236 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29239 , or for individual documents
29240 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886038
29241 choose which of its variants should be used by \SpecialChar LyX
29250 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29251 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29253 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886043
29258 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29259 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29260 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29266 The following variants are
29267 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886168
29269 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886173
29270 available by default
29275 \begin_layout Description
29277 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886257
29278 a specific, modern processor developed exclusively for
29282 (it does not work with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29290 provides full Unicode support, unlimited memory
29291 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886272
29292 , but does not work with other bibliography packages (e.
29293 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29297 \begin_inset space \space{}
29304 ), only with the package
29307 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886347
29310 and many specific features
29317 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886353
29318 recommended for multilingual texts and for languages that don't use Latin
29320 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886386
29325 approach, it is strongly recommended to use
29334 \begin_layout Description
29335 bibtex the standard; does not allow special characters in bibliography entries
29336 that are not possible to encode in a 7-bit encoding, limited memory, works
29337 with all bibliography packages,
29338 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886412
29340 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886414
29344 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886476
29345 it will probably fail with even moderately sized
29346 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886506
29348 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886506
29354 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886524
29357 bibliographies, due to the limited memory.
29362 \begin_layout Description
29363 bibtex8 allows all characters that are possible to encode in an 8-bit encoding
29364 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886652
29365 (but no Unicode support)
29367 , larger memory than
29371 , works with all bibliography packages
29372 \change_inserted -712698321 1484330876
29373 , although more complex
29377 bibliographies will exceed its limits, and not all
29381 features are supported.
29384 \begin_layout Standard
29386 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331301
29388 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29392 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29395 bibliography processor set in
29397 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29398 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29402 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29406 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29409 bibliography processor in
29411 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29412 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29413 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29416 ), \SpecialChar LyX
29417 selects the most appropriate (available) processor for the current bibliogra
29426 for Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29427 -based bibliography styles).
29428 This should suit most needs.
29433 \begin_layout Standard
29435 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331395
29436 In Japanese documents, a specific processor is used.
29437 By default, this is
29445 variant specifically aimed at Japanese.
29446 You can adjust it in
29448 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
29449 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
29450 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
29458 \begin_layout Standard
29460 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886683
29461 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29463 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331419
29464 Selected bibliography processors
29466 can be controlled with options that you can add below the
29467 \change_deleted -712698321 1484331437
29468 specification of the variants
29469 \change_inserted -712698321 1484331439
29473 Before adding options, it is strongly recommended that you read the manual
29475 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886810
29479 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886842
29482 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29484 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886842
29490 \change_deleted -712698321 1483886972
29492 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
29499 \change_inserted -712698321 1483886836
29511 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887134
29515 \begin_layout Subsubsection
29517 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887497
29523 \begin_layout Standard
29525 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887548
29527 supports some specific tasks such as sectioned bibliographies and multiple
29530 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887556
29531 When you select the option
29533 Sectioned bibliography
29537 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29538 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
29541 dialog, it is possible to have multiple and sectioned bibliographies.
29545 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887559
29547 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887559
29551 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887560
29555 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887564
29558 are explained in detail in section
29560 Customizing Bibliographies
29564 with Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29569 Additional Features
29574 \begin_layout Standard
29576 \change_deleted -712698321 1483882904
29577 We use two bibliographies in this document to show the difference between
29578 the two methods of creating them.
29579 As you can see, the bibliography that is created from a database lists
29580 only the database entries that are referenced in the document.
29581 We used the style file
29585 to get the complicated German reference key scheme in the bibliography.
29590 \begin_layout Subsection
29592 \begin_inset Index idx
29595 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29596 Bibliography ! Citation format
29602 \change_inserted -712698321 1483881374
29604 \begin_inset CommandInset label
29606 name "subsec:Citation-Format"
29615 \begin_layout Standard
29617 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888028
29618 Many different citation formats are common, e.
29619 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29623 numerical citation (as used in this document), alpha-numerical citations
29625 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29629 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29632 ) or author-year citations (as
29633 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29637 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29642 supports these formats via specific citation packages and their style
29646 \begin_layout Standard
29648 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888432
29649 By default, a simple numeric citation style (as in this document) is used.
29652 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29656 \begin_inset Index idx
29659 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29661 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888079
29662 Document ! Settings
29669 \SpecialChar menuseparator
29672 , however, you have a range of other options, depending on your preferred
29673 bibliography approach.
29676 \begin_layout Standard
29678 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888408
29683 environment, your only choice besides manual formatting of the bibliography
29688 , which gives you author-year and author-numerical citations (see above
29690 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29692 reference "subsec:The-Bibliography-Environment"
29699 \begin_layout Standard
29701 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888505
29702 All other choices require a database approach, either Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29708 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
29710 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
29718 Currently, the following options are available:
29721 \begin_layout Itemize
29723 \change_inserted -712698321 1483888574
29730 BibTeX-based approached without any additional packages (simple numeric
29734 \begin_layout Itemize
29736 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889266
29745 package and lets you select a style in the combo boxes
29747 Biblatex citation style
29751 Biblatex bibliography style
29754 Many different style variants are supported.
29759 package can be entered in the
29766 \begin_layout Itemize
29768 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889302
29771 Biblatex (natbib mode)
29778 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29781 natbib compatibility mode
29782 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29786 This is a specific variant that is aimed at users who switch an existing
29791 (see below) or want to emulate
29795 behavior very closely.
29800 , this option has some additional styles.
29801 Style selection and option handling are identical.
29806 styles are also supported by this variant.
29809 \begin_layout Itemize
29811 \change_inserted -712698321 1483889321
29820 package which provides author-year styles particularly suited for law studies.
29823 \begin_layout Itemize
29825 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891582
29834 package which provides citation styles particularly suited for the Humanities.
29839 \begin_layout Standard
29841 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891665
29850 furthermore provide the choice between author-year and author-numerical
29852 You have to select either of it in the dialog.
29857 case, this only affects the appearance in the \SpecialChar LyX
29859 Whether the output uses numerical, author-year or another format such as
29860 alpha-numerical depends only on the selected style (however, when switching
29862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29870 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29874 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29877 , a suitable style is proposed).
29882 , on the other hand, the dialog selection will ultimately determine the
29886 \begin_layout Standard
29888 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890338
29889 For any author-year and author-numerical selection, multiple style variants
29891 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890143
29893 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890144
29896 n the citation reference dialog
29897 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890163
29898 you can set a special citation format
29902 \change_inserted -712698321 1483891709
29903 Some selections also provide further options, such as the option to uppercase
29904 a name prefix such as
29905 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29909 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29913 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29917 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29920 ) or to expand or reduce the number of displayed others (i.
29921 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29924 e., use or don't use
29925 \begin_inset Quotes eld
29929 \begin_inset Quotes erd
29934 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890219
29935 For this feature you need to enable the option
29941 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
29945 \begin_inset Index idx
29948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
29949 Document ! Settings
29959 Setting a citation style for a reference will overwrite the default.
29960 For the global citation format use the Bib\SpecialChar TeX
29961 style files as explained in
29962 the previous section.
29967 \begin_layout Standard
29969 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890476
29970 In the citation dialog,
29971 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890481
29973 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890482
29976 ou can also set text to appear
29977 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890531
29980 after a citation reference,
29981 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890545
29982 in the citation reference window
29983 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890583
29985 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29989 page numbers, which will then be formatted according to the style's needs
29991 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
29996 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30000 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30007 \change_deleted -712698321 1483890682
30009 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890683
30012 example where the text
30013 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30017 \begin_inset space ~
30021 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30024 appears after the reference:
30027 \begin_layout Quote
30029 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30032 key "latexcompanion"
30037 \change_inserted -712698321 1483890690
30041 \begin_layout Standard
30043 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998090
30044 All styles except for
30048 also provide a means to add text that precedes the reference (such as
30049 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30053 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30057 This text is then also included in the parentheses, if the style requires
30061 \begin_layout Standard
30063 \change_inserted -712698321 1484998495
30064 Note that these pre- and postnotes apply to the whole citation.
30065 That is to say, if you refer to multiple references at one, the prenote
30066 will precede the first citation in the list, the postnote will follow the
30072 styles allow for adding pre- and postnotes to any individual reference
30073 in a multi-citation (so-called
30074 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30077 qualified citation lists
30078 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30084 If you use such a style, and if the current reference includes multiple
30086 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30090 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30093 window will display three columns:
30094 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30098 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30102 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30106 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30110 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30114 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30118 If you double-click on an item's
30119 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30123 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30127 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30131 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30134 field, you can add such individual pre- and postnotes.
30136 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30139 General text before
30140 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30144 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30148 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30151 input widgets, you can add pre- and postnotes that apply to the whole list.
30156 \begin_layout Section
30158 \begin_inset Index idx
30161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30168 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30177 \begin_layout Standard
30178 An index entry is created if you use the menu
30180 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30182 \begin_inset space ~
30187 or the toolbar button
30194 A box is inserted containing the text that appears in the index.
30195 The word where the cursor is in or the currently highlighted text is proposed
30196 by \SpecialChar LyX
30197 as the index entry.
30200 \begin_layout Standard
30201 The index list is inserted in the document with the menu
30203 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
30204 List/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
30206 \begin_inset space ~
30212 A light blue box labeled
30213 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30221 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30224 will show the place where the index is printed in the output.
30225 The index list box is not clickable like other \SpecialChar LyX
30229 \begin_layout Standard
30230 We give a short overview of the index commands in the next subsections.
30231 For a detailed description of \SpecialChar LaTeX
30232 's index mechanism, have a look at one of
30233 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30235 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30237 key "latexcompanion,latexguide,latexbook"
30244 \begin_layout Subsection
30245 Grouping Index Entries
30246 \begin_inset Index idx
30249 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30258 \begin_layout Standard
30259 Index entries are often grouped to offer the reader a fast search in the
30261 We want to group for example the index entries for itemized and enumerated
30262 lists under the entry
30263 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30267 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30271 First we create the entry
30272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30280 \begin_inset space ~
30284 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30286 reference "subsec:Lists"
30291 In the text field for the itemized list index entry in section
30292 \begin_inset space ~
30296 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30298 reference "sec:Itemize"
30302 , we insert the command
30305 \begin_layout Standard
30311 \begin_layout Standard
30315 \begin_layout Standard
30321 \begin_layout Standard
30322 for the enumerated list in section
30323 \begin_inset space ~
30327 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30329 reference "sec:Enumerate"
30336 \begin_layout Standard
30337 The exclamation mark
30338 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30342 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30345 marks the grouping levels.
30346 You can have three levels; every index level is indented a bit more.
30347 An index entry for the higher levels is not required.
30348 If we don't have an index entry for
30349 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30353 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30356 , it will be printed anyway, but without a page number.
30359 \begin_layout Subsection
30361 \begin_inset Index idx
30364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30365 Index ! Page ranges
30373 \begin_layout Standard
30374 Normally an index entry will appear with the page number of the indexed
30376 But sometimes you want to index more pages under the same entry.
30377 For example, if we want to index the paragraph environments, we create
30378 an index entry in section
30379 \begin_inset space ~
30383 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30385 reference "sec:Paragraph-Environments"
30392 \begin_layout Standard
30395 Paragraph environments|(
30398 \begin_layout Standard
30399 and another entry at the end of section
30400 \begin_inset space ~
30404 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30406 reference "subsec:LyX-Code"
30413 \begin_layout Standard
30416 Paragraph environments|)
30419 \begin_layout Standard
30421 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30429 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30433 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30441 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30444 respectively start and end the index range.
30445 You can also add the same index entry at different places in the document.
30446 They appear in the output under one entry with a comma separated list of
30447 the pages of the indexed document parts.
30448 An example is the index entry
30449 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30452 Document ! Settings
30453 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30459 \begin_layout Subsection
30461 \begin_inset Index idx
30464 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30465 Index ! Cross referencing
30473 \begin_layout Standard
30474 It is also possible to refer to another index entry.
30475 We referred for example in the index entry
30476 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30480 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30484 \begin_inset space ~
30488 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30490 reference "subsec:Image-Formats"
30494 ) to the index entry
30495 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30499 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30502 in the same section using the entry
30505 \begin_layout Standard
30508 GIF|see{Image formats}
30511 \begin_layout Standard
30512 where the braces have to be inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
30514 The text within the braces is the referenced entry.
30515 The reference will appear in the output without a page number.
30518 \begin_layout Subsection
30520 \begin_inset Index idx
30523 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30524 Index ! Entry order
30532 \begin_layout Standard
30533 If you use accented characters in the index entry the entries might not
30534 follow the rules for the index order.
30535 The index entries are sorted alphabetically but \SpecialChar LaTeX
30540 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30541 The index generating is done in the background by an extra program, see
30543 \begin_inset space ~
30547 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30549 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30558 does not know how to sort accents in different languages.
30559 We have created as an example the three dummy index entries
30560 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30564 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30568 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30572 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30576 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30580 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30584 \begin_inset Index idx
30587 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30588 Dummy entries ! maïs
30594 \begin_inset Index idx
30597 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30598 Dummy entries ! maître
30604 \begin_inset Index idx
30607 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30608 Dummy entries ! maïs@maison
30613 They will be sorted in the order maïs, maître, maison but we want the order
30614 maïs, maison, maître.
30615 To achieve this, we use the command
30618 \begin_layout Standard
30621 previous entry@current entry
30624 \begin_layout Standard
30625 In our case we want to have
30626 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30630 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30634 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30638 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30641 and write therefore for the index entry of maison:
30644 \begin_layout Standard
30650 \begin_layout Standard
30651 The previous entry need not be a real existing entry.
30652 You can also use another word to tell \SpecialChar LaTeX
30654 See the next subsection for an example.
30657 \begin_layout Standard
30658 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
30664 \begin_layout Standard
30665 In some cases the index entry order is not correct when you are using the
30670 to generate the index (see section
30671 \begin_inset space ~
30675 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30677 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30686 would for example print the index entry for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30687 -package aeguill in section
30688 \begin_inset space ~
30692 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30694 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
30698 after the index entries of the other \SpecialChar LaTeX
30699 -packages although all these index
30700 commands start with
30701 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30710 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30714 The reason is that the index entry for aeguill is in a footnote.
30719 bug, add these commands to the preamble of your document:
30722 \begin_layout Standard
30734 \begin_layout Standard
30746 \begin_layout Subsection
30748 \begin_inset Index idx
30751 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30752 Index ! Entry layout
30760 \begin_layout Standard
30761 You can change the appearance of index entries via the text style dialog.
30762 \begin_inset Index idx
30765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30768 This is an italic dummy entry
30773 You can also format the page number using the character
30774 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30778 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30781 followed by a \SpecialChar LaTeX
30782 -command without a backslash.
30783 We can write for example
30786 \begin_layout Standard
30789 italic page number:|textit
30792 \begin_layout Standard
30793 to get the page number in italic.
30794 \begin_inset Index idx
30797 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30798 Dummy entries ! italic page number:|textit
30803 Normally all \SpecialChar LaTeX
30804 -commands begin with a backslash, but in this special case
30806 \begin_inset Quotes eld
30814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
30822 \begin_inset space ~
30828 Have a look at section
30829 \begin_inset space ~
30833 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30835 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
30839 to learn more about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
30843 \begin_layout Standard
30844 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
30847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30852 Formatting single index entries only works when you use the program
30856 to generate the index, see section
30857 \begin_inset space ~
30861 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
30863 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
30872 , this will not work for anything other than bold or italic text.
30877 requires you to define semantic elements before they can be used, see
30878 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30881 key "latexcompanion"
30893 \begin_layout Standard
30894 In general, we encourage you to not format page numbers directly as shown
30896 Instead, you should define a macro in the preamble and use that.
30897 Maybe you want all page references italic that refer to a definition of
30898 the indexed term, so that users can easily find definitions.
30899 If so, put the following in the preamble
30902 \begin_layout Standard
30914 \begin_layout Standard
30918 \begin_layout Standard
30924 \begin_layout Standard
30925 in the index entry.
30926 \begin_inset Index idx
30929 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30930 Dummy entries ! my entry|IndexDef
30935 The advantage is that, if you change your mind later or if your publisher
30936 insists that definitions must not be italic but bold, you just need to
30937 change the macro in the preamble, not every single index entry.
30940 \begin_layout Standard
30941 You can also change the layout for the whole index.
30942 For example, we marked the index list box of this document as bold to get
30943 a bold font for all index entries.
30944 For more advanced tasks you have to set up a so-called
30956 documentation for details,
30957 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
30959 key "makeindex,xindy"
30966 \begin_layout Subsection
30968 \begin_inset Index idx
30971 \begin_layout Plain Layout
30978 \begin_inset CommandInset label
30980 name "subsec:Index-Program"
30987 \begin_layout Standard
30988 If the index generation program
30992 is installed, \SpecialChar LyX
30993 uses it for index generation; otherwise the program
30997 , the program that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
30998 distribution, is used.
31002 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31007 is very old, no longer under development and has many pitfalls, notably
31008 that it was developed with only the English language in mind.
31009 So it fails to sort anything other than a monolingual English text correctly.
31010 We have shown above how to fix this sorting.
31011 However, if you are writing in another than the English language, consider
31021 Both programs can be controlled by options that can be set in \SpecialChar LyX
31023 dialog, see section
31024 \begin_inset space ~
31028 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31030 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
31035 The available options are listed and explained in
31036 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31038 key "makeindex-man,xindy"
31043 In this dialog, you can also specify an alternative program to generate
31047 \begin_layout Standard
31048 If you need specific options or an alternative index program only for a
31049 given document, you can define the program and\SpecialChar breakableslash
31052 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31053 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31057 This is especially useful if you need to pass language-specific options
31058 to the index program or if you need a specific layout style.
31061 \begin_layout Subsection
31065 \begin_layout Standard
31066 In many fields it is common to have more than one index.
31067 For instance, you might need to set up a separate
31068 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31072 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31075 next to the standard index.
31077 does not provide this possibility out of the box, but there are packages
31078 that add this feature.
31085 \begin_inset Index idx
31088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31090 -packages ! splitidx
31095 package to generate multiple indexes.
31096 The package is included in all recent \SpecialChar LaTeX
31101 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31102 If yours does not ship it, consult the \SpecialChar TeX
31104 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31111 Note that the package does not only consist of a \SpecialChar LaTeX
31112 style, but it also includes
31113 specific preprocessor programs that need to be installed as well.
31114 Please consult the package's manual for details.
31122 \begin_layout Standard
31123 To set up \SpecialChar LyX
31124 for the use of multiple indexes, go to
31126 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31127 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
31130 and select the option
31132 Use multiple Indexes
31139 already contains the standard index
31140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31144 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31148 To add further indexes, add the name of the index (in the form that should
31149 also appear as a heading) to the
31153 input field and press the
31158 The new index now also appears in the list.
31159 If you like, you can attribute an alternative \SpecialChar LyX
31160 label color to the new index.
31163 \begin_layout Standard
31164 Once the document changes have been applied, you can find the new index
31167 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31174 menu has a separate entry for each of the defined indexes.
31175 The workflow is basically the same as for the default index, but there
31176 are additional features:
31179 \begin_layout Itemize
31180 If you want to change the attribution of a specific index entry, right-clicking
31181 on the entry's label will open a dialog where you can do that.
31184 \begin_layout Itemize
31185 By right-clicking on an index, you can change its type.
31186 Furthermore, you can specify an index to be a
31187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31191 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31194 If you do that, the heading of that list will be decreased by one level.
31195 For example, if you use a book class, where the standard index heading
31196 is defined as a chapter, subindexes will be defined as sections and can
31197 thus be nested to the non-subindexes.
31200 \begin_layout Section
31201 Nomenclature/Glossary
31202 \begin_inset Index idx
31205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31212 \begin_inset Index idx
31215 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31220 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31231 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
31246 name "sec:Nomenclature"
31253 \begin_layout Standard
31254 Sometimes you need to provide a list of technical terms or symbols that
31255 are mentioned in your document with a brief explanation of them – a so
31256 called nomenclature or glossary.
31259 \begin_layout Standard
31260 To be able to create nomenclatures or glossaries, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31267 \begin_inset Index idx
31270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31272 -packages ! nomencl
31278 You find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
31280 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31286 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31290 \begin_layout Standard
31291 A nomenclature entry is created if you place the cursor after a symbol entry
31292 and then use the menu
31294 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31300 \begin_inset space ~
31305 or the toolbar button
31308 arg "nomencl-insert"
31313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31321 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31324 is inserted and a window pops up asking for the nomenclature entry.
31327 \begin_layout Standard
31328 A nomenclature entry consists of two main entries.
31329 The first is the term or
31333 that you wish to define.
31338 of the term or symbol.
31341 \begin_layout Standard
31342 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
31345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31350 You have to enter valid \SpecialChar LaTeX
31351 -code for all fields of the nomenclature dialog.
31359 \begin_layout Subsection
31360 Nomenclature Definition and Layout
31361 \begin_inset Index idx
31364 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31365 Nomenclature ! Layout
31373 \begin_layout Standard
31374 If you have symbols in formulas, you have to define them in the
31378 field as \SpecialChar LaTeX
31381 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31385 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31393 \begin_inset Newline newline
31401 \begin_inset Newline newline
31407 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31411 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31414 character starts/ends the formula.
31415 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
31416 -command for the Greek letter is the name of the letter beginning with
31418 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31424 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31428 For capital Greek letters, start the command also with a capital letter,
31438 \begin_layout Standard
31439 (A short introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31440 -syntax is given in section
31441 \begin_inset space ~
31445 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
31447 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
31454 \begin_layout Standard
31458 \begin_inset space ~
31463 dialog to format the description text; you have to use \SpecialChar LaTeX
31465 For example the description of the nomenclature entry for the
31466 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31470 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31474 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31477 in this document is:
31478 \begin_inset Newline newline
31483 dummy entry for the character
31488 \begin_inset Newline newline
31500 \begin_inset space ~
31510 font use the command
31539 \begin_layout Standard
31540 To customize the appearance of all symbols add e.
31541 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
31545 \begin_inset space \space{}
31549 \begin_inset Newline newline
31565 \begin_inset Newline newline
31568 to the LaTeX preamble in the document settings.
31569 This command will make the font of all symbols
31576 \begin_inset space ~
31584 \begin_layout Standard
31585 If the characters |
31586 \begin_inset space \space{}
31590 \begin_inset space \space{}
31594 \begin_inset space \space{}
31598 \begin_inset space \space{}
31602 \begin_inset space \space{}
31605 should appear in nomenclature entries they need to be escaped by adding
31606 a quote character in front of them.
31607 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31608 LatexCommand nomenclature
31609 symbol "\"@, \"|, \"!, \"\""
31610 description "The quote sign is output by writing ‘ \"\"\"\" '"
31617 \begin_layout Subsection
31618 Sort Order of Nomenclature Entries
31619 \begin_inset Index idx
31622 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31623 Nomenclature ! Sort order
31631 \begin_layout Standard
31632 The nomenclature entries are sorted alphabetically by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
31633 -code of the symbol
31635 This leads to undesired results when you, for example, have symbols in
31637 Suppose you have nomenclature entries for the symbols
31640 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31641 LatexCommand nomenclature
31643 description "dummy entry for the character \"a\""
31650 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31654 \begin_inset CommandInset nomenclature
31655 LatexCommand nomenclature
31658 description "dummy entry for the character \\textsf{sigma}"
31663 They will be sorted by
31664 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31672 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31676 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31686 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31690 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31693 will be sorted before the
31697 since the character
31698 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31702 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31705 is considered in sorting.
31708 \begin_layout Standard
31709 To control the sort order, you can edit the
31712 \begin_inset space ~
31717 field of the nomenclature dialog.
31718 Then the nomenclature entry will be sorted by this entry and not the symbol
31720 For the example given, you can insert
31724 in this field for the
31725 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31732 will be located before
31733 \begin_inset Formula $\sigma$
31739 \begin_layout Standard
31740 For subgrouping and tips for using sort entries see the
31745 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
31754 \begin_layout Subsection
31755 Nomenclature Options
31756 \begin_inset Index idx
31759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31760 Nomenclature ! Options
31768 \begin_layout Standard
31773 package offers some options to adjust the appearance of the nomenclature.
31774 Here are some of its options; for more have a look at its documentation:
31777 \begin_layout Description
31778 refeq Appends the phrase
31779 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31791 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31794 to every nomenclature entry, where
31800 is the number of the last equation in front of the nomenclature entry
31803 \begin_layout Description
31804 refpage Appends the phrase
31805 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31817 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31820 to every nomenclature entry, where
31826 is the number of the page on which the nomenclature entry appeared
31829 \begin_layout Description
31830 intoc Inserts the nomenclature in the Table of Contents
31833 \begin_layout Standard
31834 To use one or more of the options, add them to the comma-separated document
31835 class options list in the
31837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
31841 In this document the options
31848 \begin_layout Standard
31849 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
31855 \begin_layout Standard
31856 You can also use the first two options above only for certain nomenclature
31857 entries when you add one of the following commands as last entry to the
31862 field in the nomenclature dialog:
31865 \begin_layout Description
31875 \begin_layout Description
31878 nomrefpage Like the
31885 \begin_layout Description
31888 nomrefeqpage Short notation of
31897 \begin_layout Description
31901 \begin_inset space ~
31907 \begin_inset space ~
31912 nomnorefeqpage Turns off the corresponding options
31915 \begin_layout Standard
31917 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31921 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31924 are automatically translated for some document languages.
31925 If not, add these lines to your \SpecialChar LaTeX
31929 \begin_layout Standard
31937 eqdeclaration}[1]{, see equation
31940 \begin_inset Newline newline
31947 pagedeclaration}[1]{, page
31952 \begin_inset Newline newline
31956 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31960 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31964 \begin_inset Quotes eld
31968 \begin_inset Quotes erd
31971 by their translation.
31974 \begin_layout Subsection
31975 Printing the Nomenclature
31976 \begin_inset Index idx
31979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
31980 Nomenclature ! Printing
31988 \begin_layout Standard
31989 To print the nomenclature, use the menu
31991 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
31992 Lists/TOC\SpecialChar menuseparator
31997 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32005 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32008 will show the place where the nomenclature is printed in the output.
32009 By right-clicking on it, the amount of space for symbols can be altered.
32010 You can choose between these settings:
32013 \begin_layout Description
32014 Default a space of 1
32015 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32021 \begin_layout Description
32023 \begin_inset space ~
32027 \begin_inset space ~
32030 width the width of the widest symbol of all nomenclature entries is used
32033 \begin_layout Description
32034 Custom custom space
32037 \begin_layout Standard
32038 In the printed output the title of the nomenclature appears as
32039 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32043 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32047 If you are not happy with the name, you can change it by redefining the
32055 For example, in order to change the name to
32059 , add the following line to the preamble:
32062 \begin_layout Standard
32070 nomname}{List of Symbols}
32073 \begin_layout Subsection
32074 Nomenclature Program
32075 \begin_inset Index idx
32078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32079 Nomenclature ! Program
32085 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32087 name "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
32094 \begin_layout Standard
32100 , that is part of every \SpecialChar LaTeX
32101 distribution, to generate the nomenclature.
32103 's preferences dialog allows you to specify another program or to control
32108 by adding options, see section
32109 \begin_inset space ~
32113 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32115 reference "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
32120 The available options are listed and explained in
32121 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32123 key "nomencl,makeindex"
32130 \begin_layout Section
32132 \begin_inset Index idx
32135 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32142 \begin_inset Index idx
32145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32146 Document ! Branches
32152 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32154 name "sec:Branches"
32161 \begin_layout Standard
32162 Sometimes it is useful to hide some document parts in the output.
32163 For example a teacher who is setting an exam obviously doesn't want the
32164 pupils to see the answers, but having questions and answers in the same
32165 document will make the life of the markers of that exam much easier.
32168 \begin_layout Standard
32169 For these cases \SpecialChar LyX
32170 allows you to put text into branches.
32171 The text will then only appear in the output when its branch is activated.
32172 To create a branch, either select the menu
32174 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32175 Branch\SpecialChar menuseparator
32178 (if you just want to specify a new branch) or go in the
32180 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32187 , where you can specify and change the name of the branch, its activation
32188 state (whether the content of the branch is shown in the output or not),
32189 its background color inside \SpecialChar LyX
32190 and whether the name of the branch should
32191 be appended to the document file name on export if the branch is active
32192 (see below for an example).
32193 Furthermore, the dialog lets you merge two branches (just rename one branch
32194 to the name of the other) and to add
32195 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32199 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32203 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32207 \begin_inset space ~
32210 branches that were added to the document via copy and paste from other documents
32211 , without having been defined) to the document's branch list.
32214 \begin_layout Standard
32215 Text that should be in a branch is set into branch inset boxes.
32216 These boxes are inserted via the menu
32218 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32221 where you can choose a branch.
32222 You can later change the activation state of the branch by right-clicking
32226 \begin_layout Standard
32227 Here is an example, where only the question text appears, the answer branch
32228 is deactivated and therefore does not appear in the output:
32231 \begin_layout Standard
32232 \begin_inset Branch Question
32236 \begin_layout Standard
32237 Question: Who was the first physics Nobel prize winner?
32245 \begin_layout Standard
32246 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32250 \begin_layout Standard
32251 Answer: Wilhelm Conrad Röntgen
32259 \begin_layout Standard
32266 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32267 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32270 , the name of the active branches will be appended to the file name at export.
32271 Consider for example a file
32272 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32276 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32279 which has the above branches.
32281 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32285 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32288 is active, the PDF export file would be called
32289 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32293 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32297 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32301 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32305 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32309 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32312 branch were inactive,
32313 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32317 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32321 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32325 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32328 branch was active, likewise
32329 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32333 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32337 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32341 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32344 branch was active, and
32345 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32348 Exam-Question-Answer.pdf
32349 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32352 if both branches were active.
32353 This helps you to export different versions of your document easily.
32354 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296009
32358 \begin_layout Standard
32360 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32361 As of LyX 2.3.0, there are also
32362 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32366 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32369 branch insets, whose content is output just in case the branch is
32375 \begin_inset Branch Question
32379 \begin_layout Standard
32381 \change_inserted 424524441 1468296217
32382 For example, this material will only appear when the Question branch is
32390 This make it easy to add alternative text for different versions of a document.
32391 To control whether a particular inset is
32392 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32396 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32399 , right-click on the inset button and choose
32400 \begin_inset Quotes eld
32406 \change_inserted 424524441 1468297080
32408 \begin_inset Quotes erd
32412 \change_deleted 424524441 1468296150
32416 \begin_layout Standard
32417 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
32423 \begin_layout Standard
32424 To use conditional output inside places where you cannot insert branch insets,
32425 like inside equations, you can code special \SpecialChar LaTeX
32426 definitions for each branch.
32427 For example you can define for the question branch
32431 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32432 For an introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32433 -syntax, see section
32434 \begin_inset space ~
32438 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
32440 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
32452 \begin_layout Standard
32462 \begin_layout Standard
32472 \begin_layout Standard
32473 and for the answer branch
32476 \begin_layout Standard
32486 \begin_layout Standard
32496 \begin_layout Standard
32497 \begin_inset Branch Question
32501 \begin_layout Standard
32505 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32533 \begin_layout Standard
32534 \begin_inset Branch Answer
32538 \begin_layout Standard
32542 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32570 \begin_layout Standard
32571 Now it is possible to use the
32575 question{\SpecialChar ldots
32582 answer{\SpecialChar ldots
32585 commands to obtain conditional output.
32586 Here is an example formula where only the
32593 \begin_inset Formula
32595 x^{2}-2x-2\Rightarrow\question{x_{1}}\answer{x_{2}}=1\question{+\sqrt{3}}\answer{-\sqrt{3}}.
32603 \begin_layout Standard
32604 Inside math, the same effect can be achieved using math macros, see the
32612 \begin_layout Standard
32613 Each type of branch is allowed to have its specific style defined in layout
32615 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
32619 \begin_inset space \space{}
32622 any branch inset can be automatically wrapped by your own \SpecialChar LaTeX
32624 For this advanced usage, see the
32630 Flex insets and InsetLayout
32635 \begin_layout Section
32637 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32639 name "sec:PDF-Properties"
32644 \begin_inset Index idx
32647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32656 \begin_layout Standard
32659 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
32660 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
32663 dialog allows you to set up special options for the PDF output of your
32665 All these options are provided by the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32671 \begin_inset Index idx
32674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32676 -packages ! hyperref
32681 which will link all cross-references in the DVI- and PDF-output.
32682 This means that the reader of your document will be able to click on a
32683 table of contents entry or on a reference to move to the cross-referenced
32684 part of the document.
32688 \begin_layout Standard
32689 The header information in the dialog tab
32693 is saved together with the PDF as file properties.
32694 Many programs are able to extract this information, for example, automatically
32695 to recognize who the author is and what the PDF is about.
32696 This is very useful to sort, classify or use PDFs for bibliography issues.
32700 \begin_inset space ~
32704 \begin_inset space ~
32709 is set, \SpecialChar LyX
32710 tries to extract the header information from your document title
32711 and author entries.
32715 \begin_inset space ~
32719 \begin_inset space ~
32723 \begin_inset space ~
32728 will open the PDF in fullscreen mode, which is useful for presentations.
32731 \begin_layout Standard
32732 You can specify in the dialog tab
32736 how the links will look and if links for bibliographical backreferences
32741 \begin_inset space ~
32745 \begin_inset space ~
32749 \begin_inset space ~
32754 option allows long links to be split;
32757 \begin_inset space ~
32761 \begin_inset space ~
32765 \begin_inset space ~
32773 \begin_inset space ~
32778 both turn off the default behavior of enclosing all links in frames;
32781 \begin_inset space ~
32786 colors the different links.
32787 The default colors are:
32790 \begin_layout Labeling
32791 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32796 for hyperlinks and URLs
32799 \begin_layout Labeling
32800 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32808 \begin_layout Labeling
32809 \labelwidthstring 00.00.0000
32817 \begin_layout Standard
32818 but you can change these in the field
32823 For example, in this document they were changed with the additional options:
32826 \begin_layout Standard
32829 linkcolor=black, citecolor=black, urlcolor=blue, filecolor=blue
32832 \begin_layout Standard
32837 is set, the hyperlinks will appear in the bibliography after the different
32838 entries, showing, depending on the option selected, the number of the section,
32839 slide or page where the entry is referenced.
32842 \begin_layout Standard
32847 you can specify if PDF-bookmarks should be created for every section of
32848 your document to make it easier for readers to navigate through the document.
32849 You can decide if the bookmarks should be numbered like your document sections
32859 you can specify what sectioning level should be displayed in the bookmarks
32860 when opening the PDF.
32862 \begin_inset space ~
32865 2 will display all sections and subsections, while level
32866 \begin_inset space ~
32869 1 will only display the sections.
32872 \begin_layout Standard
32873 PDF properties are also used in this document.
32874 When you look in its document settings, you can see that some additional
32880 For an explanation of all them we refer you to the hyperref manual
32881 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
32890 \begin_layout Section
32892 Code and the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32894 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32896 name "sec:TeX-Code"
32903 \begin_layout Subsection
32906 \begin_inset Index idx
32909 \begin_layout Plain Layout
32917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
32919 name "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
32926 \begin_layout Standard
32927 As \SpecialChar LyX
32928 uses \SpecialChar LaTeX
32929 in the background, it supports many \SpecialChar LaTeX
32930 commands and constructs,
32933 contains hundreds of packages that provide different commands.
32934 All the time packages are being updated and new ones added.
32935 This has the advantage that you can typeset nearly everything as there
32936 is a \SpecialChar LaTeX
32937 -package for every problem, though \SpecialChar LyX
32938 cannot support all packages and
32942 \begin_layout Standard
32943 But don't worry, you can use any \SpecialChar LaTeX
32944 -command directly in \SpecialChar LyX
32945 inside the \SpecialChar TeX
32949 Code box is created by the menu
32951 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
32953 \begin_inset space ~
32958 or by the toolbar button
32971 The box can be opened by left-clicking and closed by right-clicking on
32979 \begin_layout Standard
32980 You can insert complete or incomplete commands as \SpecialChar TeX
32982 Incomplete means that the command argument can be Standard \SpecialChar LyX
32984 For example, if you want to draw a frame around a word and are therefore
32985 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
32992 , you can write the command part
32998 in a \SpecialChar TeX
32999 Code box before the word and the closing brace
33003 in a second \SpecialChar TeX
33004 Code box behind the word.
33005 The word between the two \SpecialChar TeX
33006 Code boxes is then the argument as it is in the
33010 \begin_layout Standard
33011 \begin_inset Graphics
33012 filename clipart/ERT.png
33020 \begin_layout Standard
33024 \begin_layout Standard
33025 This is a line with a
33029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33052 \begin_layout Standard
33053 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33061 At the end of \SpecialChar LaTeX
33062 -commands without parameters, you have to insert a space
33063 to let \SpecialChar LaTeX
33064 know that the command is finished.
33072 \begin_layout Subsection
33073 A Short Introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33075 \begin_inset Argument 1
33078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33079 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
33086 \begin_inset Index idx
33089 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33097 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33099 name "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
33106 \begin_layout Standard
33107 When you write larger documents or books, you will need to know something
33108 about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33109 -commands that \SpecialChar LyX
33110 uses in the background.
33111 Because \SpecialChar LaTeX
33112 is based on commands, you can
33113 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33117 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33121 This has the advantage that the layout of the document can be changed at
33122 any time if you know the right commands.
33123 For example, imagine you have to write a manual for a product and the deadline
33124 is the end of the day.
33125 Your boss has just complimented you for your good work but wants to have
33126 all caption labels bold.
33127 But you have over a hundred figure and table captions with non-bold labels
33129 Of course it is impossible to change all caption labels manually in one
33133 \begin_layout Standard
33134 Now \SpecialChar LaTeX
33136 As mentioned above, for every problem there exists a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33138 First you have to find out which and therefore look in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33141 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33150 \begin_layout Standard
33151 As result you find that the package
33156 \begin_inset Index idx
33159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33161 -packages ! caption
33167 To use a package, you have to load it in the document preamble (menu
33169 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33172 \SpecialChar menuseparator
33176 \begin_inset space ~
33184 \begin_layout Standard
33189 usepackage[options]{package name}
33192 \begin_layout Standard
33193 All \SpecialChar LaTeX
33194 commands begin with a backslash, the command argument is set within
33195 two braces and the options are set within two brackets.
33196 Note that not all commands have an argument and options.
33199 \begin_layout Standard
33200 In your case the package name is
33205 After a look in the documentation of the package, you know that the option
33210 will change the font of all caption labels to bold.
33211 So you add the command
33214 \begin_layout Standard
33219 usepackage[labelfont=bf]{caption}
33222 \begin_layout Standard
33223 to the preamble and the problem is solved.
33227 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33228 For more commands provided by the
33232 package, have a look at its documentation,
33233 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33247 \begin_layout Standard
33248 Note that some document classes have built-in solutions for well-known problems
33250 For example if you use a
33254 class, you don't need the package
33258 , you can instead write
33261 \begin_layout Standard
33266 setkomafont{captionlabel}{
33271 \begin_layout Standard
33272 in the preamble and the problem is solved.
33273 So if you plan to write a large document, you should have a look at the
33274 documentation of the document class you want to use.
33281 is an example of a command with more than one argument.)
33284 \begin_layout Standard
33285 Commands in the preamble affect the whole document, while commands in the
33286 text affect only the text after the command or only the text used as command
33288 To insert a \SpecialChar LaTeX
33289 -command in text, use the \SpecialChar TeX
33290 Code box as described in the previous
33294 \begin_layout Standard
33295 If you want to learn more about \SpecialChar LaTeX
33296 and its syntax, have a look at the \SpecialChar LaTeX
33299 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
33301 key "latexcompanion,latexguide"
33308 \begin_layout Standard
33309 \begin_inset Newpage cleardoublepage
33315 \begin_layout Standard
33319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33329 \begin_inset Note Note
33332 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33333 switches temporarily to a page style with custom header and footer line
33341 \begin_layout Left Header
33342 \begin_inset Argument 1
33345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33365 \begin_inset Note Note
33368 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33369 defines the header line as described below
33377 \begin_layout Center Header
33378 \begin_inset Argument 1
33381 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33390 \begin_layout Right Header
33391 \begin_inset Argument 1
33394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33398 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33415 \begin_layout Left Footer
33416 \begin_inset Argument 1
33419 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33423 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33440 \begin_layout Center Footer
33441 \begin_inset Argument 1
33444 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33456 \begin_inset Newline newline
33460 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
33466 \begin_layout Right Footer
33467 \begin_inset Argument 1
33470 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33480 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33492 \begin_layout Section
33493 Customized Page Headers and Footers
33494 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33496 name "sec:Customized-Page-Headers"
33501 \begin_inset Index idx
33504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33505 Document ! Header/Footer line
33511 \begin_inset Index idx
33514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33523 \begin_layout Standard
33524 To define a custom page header and footer line for your document, you need
33528 \begin_inset space ~
33539 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33545 \begin_inset space ~
33551 As a second step add in the menu
33553 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
33554 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
33558 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33563 Custom Header/Footerlines
33566 \begin_inset Quotes erd
33570 This module offers the following 6
33571 \begin_inset space ~
33577 \begin_layout Description
33579 \begin_inset space ~
33583 \begin_inset space ~
33587 \begin_inset space ~
33591 \begin_inset space ~
33595 \begin_inset space ~
33601 \begin_layout Description
33603 \begin_inset space ~
33607 \begin_inset space ~
33611 \begin_inset space ~
33615 \begin_inset space ~
33619 \begin_inset space ~
33625 \begin_layout Standard
33626 for the different positions in the header/footer.
33627 These environments can be selected in the environment pull-down box.
33630 \begin_layout Standard
33631 Normally, headers and footers are set up at the beginning of the document.
33632 But you can change them anywhere you want to.
33634 \begin_inset space ~
33638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
33640 reference "fig:Page-layout"
33644 shows the page layout and where the header/footer styles will appear.
33647 \begin_layout Standard
33648 \begin_inset Float figure
33654 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33657 \begin_inset Tabular
33658 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="5" columns="3">
33659 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
33660 <column alignment="left" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33661 <column alignment="center" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33662 <column alignment="right" valignment="top" width="30line%">
33664 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33673 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" usebox="none">
33676 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33682 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" topline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33693 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33702 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33705 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33711 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33714 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33722 <cell multicolumn="1" alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none" width="90line%">
33725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33726 The normal text on the page goes here.
33727 The running header is above the text, and the footer is below (including
33729 Headers/footers typically contain things like the page number, title of
33730 the chapter, company logo but you can use almost anything, except of floats.
33735 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33738 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33744 <cell multicolumn="2" alignment="center" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33747 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33755 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33764 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
33767 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33773 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33776 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33784 <cell alignment="left" valignment="top" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
33787 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" bottomline="true" usebox="none">
33796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33802 <cell alignment="right" valignment="top" bottomline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
33805 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33819 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33820 \begin_inset Caption Standard
33822 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33823 \begin_inset CommandInset label
33825 name "fig:Page-layout"
33829 Page layout with custom header and footer line.
33842 \begin_layout Standard
33843 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
33846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
33851 : some document classes implement their own customized page headers and
33855 \begin_inset space ~
33860 is set to “Default”.
33861 Check what these are before you specify your own customized page headers
33870 \begin_layout Subsection
33874 \begin_layout Standard
33875 To define your header line, add all three header environments.
33876 The things you add to each environment appear on odd numbered pages, the
33877 things in the optional arguments on even numbered pages.
33878 For single-sided documents, the optional arguments will not be used and
33880 If you leave a header environment or its argument empty, nothing appears
33882 Defining the footer line works similarly.
33885 \begin_layout Standard
33886 For the definition, you will need some \SpecialChar LaTeX
33887 -commands that are inserted as \SpecialChar TeX
33891 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
33893 \begin_inset space ~
33901 \begin_layout Description
33904 thepage prints the current page number
33907 \begin_layout Description
33910 Roman{page} prints the current page number with capital roman numerals
33913 \begin_layout Description
33916 roman{page} prints the current page number with small roman numerals
33919 \begin_layout Description
33922 leftmark prints the current section number and title.
33923 If the document has chapters, it prints the current chapter number and
33926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
33930 \begin_inset Quotes prd
33933 because it usually goes in a left header.
33936 \begin_layout Description
33939 rightmark prints the current subsection number and title.
33940 If the document has chapters, it prints the current section number and
33942 It is normally used in the right header.
33945 \begin_layout Subsection
33946 Default header/footer
33949 \begin_layout Standard
33950 The custom header/footer is not empty by default.
33951 The default header contains the chapter and section title and the center
33952 footer has the page number.
33953 In order to remove unwanted entries from the header/footer, include the
33954 relevant header/footer style in your document, but leave it blank.
33955 So, if you do not want a page number in the footer, include a blank
33958 \begin_inset space ~
33966 \begin_layout Subsection
33970 \begin_layout Standard
33971 The header and footer will appear on normal pages.
33972 Some pages are different.
33973 The title page has a header/footer environment of its own, and so does
33974 any page that starts a new part or chapter in your book.
33975 Such pages will not have the custom headers/footers, but that is normal.
33976 There is for example no need to print a header with the chapter name on
33977 the chapter page where the chapter heading is in big bold letters anyway.
33980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
33981 Header and footer decoration line
33984 \begin_layout Standard
33985 By default, you get a 0.4
33986 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
33989 pt thick line below the header and no footer line.
33990 This can be changed in the document preamble with the commands
34002 in the following way:
34005 \begin_layout Standard
34012 headrulewidth}{thickness}
34015 \begin_layout Standard
34016 where thickness is a size in standard units like
34029 If you don't want a line, set the thickness to 0
34030 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34036 \begin_layout Standard
34037 The lines can also be colored, but this requires more knowledge of \SpecialChar LaTeX
34039 If you really need this, have a look at the Internet or in section
34040 \begin_inset space ~
34044 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34053 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34054 Several header/footer lines
34057 \begin_layout Standard
34058 In case you need more than one text line as a header/footer, you can do
34059 this by adding a ragged line break in the style definition.
34060 However, the default height of the header/footer is only the height of
34062 To expand the height, redefine the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34077 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34078 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
34080 \begin_inset space ~
34088 \begin_layout Standard
34095 headheight}{height}
34098 \begin_layout Standard
34103 is a size in standard units (e.
34104 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34108 \begin_inset space \space{}
34116 If you don't know how much space is needed for the height, define your
34117 header/footer and preview your document as a PDF.
34118 Then open the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34119 logfile with the menu
34121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
34123 \begin_inset space ~
34131 \begin_inset space ~
34136 to see if you can find a warning about the package
34141 \begin_inset Index idx
34144 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34146 -packages ! fancyhdr
34152 If there is such a warning, it contains the space that you need at least
34153 for your header/footer.
34156 \begin_layout Subsection
34160 \begin_layout Standard
34161 This example demonstrates what can be done with custom header/footers.
34162 Don't use it for your document as it is just an example.
34163 This example consists of the following definition:
34166 \begin_layout Description
34168 \begin_inset space ~
34177 , empty optional argument
34180 \begin_layout Description
34182 \begin_inset space ~
34185 Header empty, empty optional argument
34188 \begin_layout Description
34190 \begin_inset space ~
34199 in the optional argument
34202 \begin_layout Description
34204 \begin_inset space ~
34213 in the optional argument
34216 \begin_layout Description
34218 \begin_inset space ~
34231 \begin_inset Quotes eld
34235 \begin_inset Newline newline
34239 \begin_inset Formula $\Upsilon=\frac{\sqrt[3]{\aleph}}{\spadesuit}$
34243 \begin_inset Quotes erd
34246 in the optional argument
34249 \begin_layout Description
34251 \begin_inset space ~
34260 , empty optional argument
34263 \begin_layout Description
34266 headrulewidth set to 2
34267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34273 \begin_layout Standard
34274 In principle you can use almost everything in headers/footers, except floats.
34275 For more specialized features, for example, thumb-indexes, see the manual
34281 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34290 \begin_layout Standard
34291 \begin_inset Newpage clearpage
34297 \begin_layout Standard
34301 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34305 pagestyle{headings}
34311 \begin_inset Note Note
34314 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34315 switches back to page style with the default headings
34323 \begin_layout Section
34324 Previewing Snippets of your Document
34325 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34327 name "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
34332 \begin_inset Index idx
34335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34342 \begin_inset Index idx
34345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34354 \begin_layout Standard
34356 allows you to generate previews of sections of your document on the fly
34357 so you can see how they will look in the final document without having
34358 to break your train of thought with viewing the output.
34361 \begin_layout Subsection
34365 \begin_layout Standard
34366 To get previews working, you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34372 \begin_inset Index idx
34375 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34377 -packages ! preview-latex
34382 (on some systems named simply
34387 If it is not already installed, you will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
34389 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
34395 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
34397 You obtain prettier results if you install the program
34405 package; for \SpecialChar LyX
34406 on Windows this program and also the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34407 -package are automatically
34408 installed together with \SpecialChar LyX
34412 \begin_layout Subsection
34416 \begin_layout Standard
34417 If you would for example like to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34418 your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34420 activate the option
34423 \begin_inset space ~
34430 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
34436 \begin_inset space ~
34440 \begin_inset space ~
34443 feel\SpecialChar menuseparator
34450 \begin_inset space ~
34463 \begin_inset space ~
34468 is the multiplication factor for the size.
34471 \begin_layout Standard
34472 If you would like to see everything but your math formulas typeset by \SpecialChar LaTeX
34477 \begin_inset space ~
34485 \begin_inset space ~
34493 \begin_layout Standard
34494 Previews are generated when you load a document into \SpecialChar LyX
34495 and when you finish
34499 \begin_layout Standard
34500 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
34503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34508 Previews of an already loaded document are not in every case immediately
34509 generated by activating the option
34512 \begin_inset space ~
34518 Reopening the document will fix such problems.
34526 \begin_layout Subsection
34527 Selected document parts
34530 \begin_layout Standard
34531 Besides math there are other cases where you might like to see a preview,
34532 for example things that \SpecialChar LyX
34533 cannot render like rotated parts or things that
34534 are not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34536 To do this, insert a preview inset via the menu
34538 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
34542 Insert or paste the stuff that you want to preview into this inset.
34543 The preview will be generated when the cursor is outside the preview inset.
34544 If you click on the preview, you can edit the previewed stuff.
34547 \begin_layout Standard
34548 An example: To create rotated boxes, you use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34555 which is not yet supported by \SpecialChar LyX
34560 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34567 is explained in section
34569 Rotated and Scaled Boxes
34574 \begin_inset space ~
34584 Instead of the \SpecialChar TeX
34585 Code boxes you want to see in \SpecialChar LyX
34586 the final rotated boxes,
34587 for example to adjust the rotation angle to fit with the surrounding text.
34588 Therefore you create a preview inset and copy the text with the rotated
34590 Here is the result:
34593 \begin_layout Standard
34594 \begin_inset Preview
34596 \begin_layout Standard
34601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34605 rotatebox[origin=r]{-60}{
34611 \begin_inset Box Doublebox
34621 height_special "totalheight"
34626 backgroundcolor "none"
34629 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34650 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34654 rotatebox[origin=lb]{60}{
34660 \begin_inset Formula $\int A\,\mathrm{d}x=B$
34667 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34682 \begin_layout Standard
34683 Previewing works also for colors.
34684 In this example a special framed, colored box was created using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34696 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34703 is explained in section
34710 \begin_inset space ~
34723 \begin_layout Standard
34724 \begin_inset Preview
34726 \begin_layout Standard
34730 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34745 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34749 fcolorbox{cyan}{magenta}{
34754 This is text within a colored, framed box.
34758 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34773 \begin_layout Standard
34774 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
34780 \begin_layout Standard
34781 If \SpecialChar LyX
34782 does not show a preview, make sure that you enabled previews as described
34783 above and also make sure that \SpecialChar TeX
34784 Code in the preview inset is valid and that
34785 you loaded the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34786 packages in your document preamble that are required by
34787 the \SpecialChar TeX
34789 If \SpecialChar LyX
34790 cannot create a preview, you will in most cases also not be able to
34791 view your document due to \SpecialChar LaTeX
34793 So if you have to use some \SpecialChar TeX
34794 Code and don't know if it is correct, the preview
34795 inset is a nice method to check it without the need to view the whole document.
34798 \begin_layout Subsection
34803 \begin_layout Standard
34804 You can preview the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34805 source of the whole document or parts of it.
34808 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
34810 \begin_inset space ~
34815 and a window will be shown where you can see the \SpecialChar LaTeX
34817 The window shows the source of the whole paragraph in which the cursor
34819 You can also select document parts in \SpecialChar LyX
34820 's main window, then only this selection
34821 (when it is more than one paragraph) is shown as source code.
34822 To view the whole document as source, enable the corresponding option in
34823 the source view window.
34828 , you can see the changes as you make them in \SpecialChar LyX
34829 ; but note that if you have
34830 several documents open, this will slow things down as \SpecialChar LyX
34832 not just the one which is open at the time.
34835 \begin_layout Section
34836 Advanced Find and Replace
34837 \begin_inset CommandInset label
34839 name "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
34844 \begin_inset Index idx
34847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34854 \begin_inset Index idx
34857 \begin_layout Plain Layout
34866 \begin_layout Subsection
34870 \begin_layout Standard
34871 The advanced find and replace feature of \SpecialChar LyX
34872 allows for searching of complex,
34873 format-sensitive text segments and mathematics contents within \SpecialChar LyX
34875 It is an enhancement of the standard (quick) find and replace feature.
34876 The key-features are:
34879 \begin_layout Itemize
34880 Both searching of text and of mathematical formulas is allowed, where the
34881 latter is done by entering mathematics in the usual way; not only entire
34882 mathematical formulas are found, but also parts occurring within more complex
34886 \begin_layout Itemize
34887 Search may be format-insensitive, so that the searched text is found in
34888 any context/style (standard text, section headings, notes, and even mathematics
34889 ), or it may be format-sensitive, so that, for example, a word entered with
34890 a section heading will only be found within section headings
34893 \begin_layout Itemize
34894 Search may be restricted to mathematics environments only; this is useful
34895 for remangling math notation where one does not want to match any text
34896 outside of mathematics environments
34899 \begin_layout Itemize
34900 Search may be widened to a specific
34905 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34909 \begin_inset space ~
34912 a set of files which may be all the children of the document being edited,
34913 all the open files, or all the manuals available from the
34920 \begin_layout Itemize
34921 Replace may optionally preserve capitalization, so that the replaced text
34922 capitalization is adapted to the matching text (i.
34923 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
34927 \begin_inset space ~
34930 all lowercase, all uppercase, first letter uppercase followed by lowercase)
34933 \begin_layout Subsection
34937 \begin_layout Standard
34938 The advanced find and replace feature is activated through the menu
34940 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
34953 arg "dialog-show findreplaceadv"
34956 ) or the toolbar button
34959 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
34965 Advanced Find and Replace
34970 \begin_layout Subsubsection
34974 \begin_layout Standard
34980 mini-editor a simple word, and search for occurrences of it by clicking
34984 \begin_inset space ~
34989 button at the bottom of the dialog (or just press the
34992 arg "paragraph-break"
34996 The entered word is found both in text mode and in math mode, and in emphasized
34997 , bold or normal face, and in both in section titles and in standard text.
35001 arg "paragraph-break"
35004 repeatedly keeps searching forward while pressing
35008 searches backwards.
35011 \begin_layout Standard
35015 \begin_inset space ~
35020 option allows matches to occur only with the same case as entered in the
35029 \begin_inset space ~
35034 option allows matches to occur only at word boundaries.
35037 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35038 Searching for mathematics
35041 \begin_layout Standard
35042 Mathematical formulas, such as
35043 \begin_inset Formula $x^{2}$
35046 or something more complex like
35047 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}$
35050 , may be searched for by typing them in the
35055 When searching for a formula, it is found both when it is alone and when
35056 it occurs in sub-formulas and nested parts of sub-formulas.
35057 For example the mentioned segments would be found in something like
35058 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{x^{2}}{\sqrt{\frac{x^{2}}{1+x^{2}}}}$
35064 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35068 \begin_layout Standard
35069 It is also possible to search for text with specific styles.
35070 This is done by switching to the
35074 tab of the dialog and unchecking the
35079 This way, entering in the
35086 \begin_layout Itemize
35087 a normal word and searching for it would not find instances of the word
35088 occurring in emphasized or boldface.
35091 \begin_layout Itemize
35092 an emphasized or boldface word and searching for it would find the respective
35093 instances with the same face only, and within the same text style only.
35096 \begin_layout Itemize
35097 a normal word in a section heading, and searching for it, would find occurrences
35098 of it only within section headings.
35099 Also, if the text to search is given an emphasized or bold face, in addition
35100 to a section style, then it is found only when occurring with the same
35104 \begin_layout Itemize
35105 a displayed formula will only find instances of this formula that are also
35106 displayed formulas (and not inline formulas).
35109 \begin_layout Subsubsection
35113 \begin_layout Standard
35114 The entries made in the
35118 editor can be replaced with entries made in the
35121 \begin_inset space ~
35127 In order to find the next occurrence and replace it, click on the
35131 button or alternatively press
35134 arg "paragraph-break"
35141 while the cursor is in the
35144 \begin_inset space ~
35152 \begin_layout Standard
35153 You can replace with fully-featured formatted \SpecialChar LyX
35155 Typical scenarios in which to use this capability might be (just to mention
35159 \begin_layout Itemize
35160 replacing occurrences of a word with a customized formatted version of the
35161 same word, for example replacing occurrences of a name like
35162 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35166 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35169 with its typewriter version
35170 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35178 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35184 \begin_layout Itemize
35185 performing a notation rework of mathematical symbols, for example replacing
35187 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35191 \begin_inset Formula $R$
35195 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35199 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35203 \begin_inset Formula $\mathbb{R}$
35207 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35210 (you may want to enable the
35213 \begin_inset space ~
35221 \begin_inset space ~
35226 options and disable the
35234 tab, in order to avoid replacing all
35235 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35239 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35242 letters occurring in normal text), or occurrences of
35243 \begin_inset Formula $x_{j}^{i}$
35247 \begin_inset Formula $x_{i,\,j}$
35250 , or occurrences of
35251 \begin_inset Formula $x[k]$
35255 \begin_inset Formula $x_{k}$
35261 \begin_layout Subsection
35265 \begin_layout Standard
35266 There is a regular expression (regexp) based searching facility.
35270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35271 A good explanation of regular expressions is given in this Wikipedia entry:
35273 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35275 target "http://en.wikipedia.org/wiki/Regular_expression"
35284 You can search for a regular expression by inserting a regexp inset into
35290 This is done with the context menu
35292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
35293 Insert Regular Expression
35295 while the cursor is in the
35300 Characters entered within regexp insets are matched according to the regular
35301 expression matching rules
35305 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35306 Under the constraint that any (sub)expression must match a well-formed \SpecialChar LyX
35309 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35313 \begin_inset space ~
35316 when matching \SpecialChar LaTeX
35317 code, no segments with unbalanced {} braces are allowed to
35323 , while text entered outside regexp insets is matched exactly against the
35324 same text in the document.
35325 You can cut and paste regexp-mode insets.
35326 Examples of using such a feature may be:
35329 \begin_layout Enumerate
35330 Searching for all fractions with a given denominator: for example, entering
35335 editor the fraction
35336 \begin_inset Formula $\frac{.*}{1+x^{2}}$
35340 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35343 on the numerator is the match-everything regular expression) finds all
35344 fractions with the given denominator.
35347 \begin_layout Enumerate
35348 Searching for all text with a given style: for example, after unchecking
35360 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35365 regular expression and giving it an emphasized or bold face, finds all
35366 emphasized or bold face text respectively.
35367 Also, by inserting a
35368 \begin_inset Formula $.*$
35371 regular expression in a bullet or enumerated list or a section heading,
35372 you can find all bullet or enumerated lists or section headings.
35375 \begin_layout Standard
35376 Finally, references to (sub)expressions in regexp may be used as usual:
35377 Enclosing parts of the expression within round braces
35378 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35381 , and referring back to them through
35382 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35386 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash2$
35390 For example, try searching with the regexp
35391 \begin_inset Newline newline
35394 [[:space:]]([[:alpha:]]+)[[:space:]]
35397 \begin_inset Newline newline
35400 in order to find word repetitions, if there are any.
35403 \begin_layout Standard
35404 The usage of back references in the replaced text is not (yet) implemented.
35407 \begin_layout Standard
35408 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
35411 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35416 Back references work both when occurring within the same regexp, and when
35417 occurring in multiple different regexps, where the numbering of back-referenced
35418 sub-expressions is absolute.
35420 \begin_inset space ~
35424 \begin_inset Formula $\backslash1$
35427 always refers to the first occurrence of
35428 \begin_inset Formula $()$
35431 in all entered regexps.
35439 \begin_layout Section
35441 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35443 name "sec:Spellchecking"
35448 \begin_inset Index idx
35451 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35460 \begin_layout Standard
35462 has a built-in spell checker.
35465 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35472 key or the toolbar button
35475 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
35478 start the spell checking from either the current cursor position or the
35479 beginning of the currently selected text.
35480 A sidebar will appear showing any incorrect (or unknown) word found, allowing
35481 you to edit and replace it in a second line.
35482 Whenever an unknown word is found, the word is highlighted and the text
35483 scrolled so that it is visible.
35484 In the spellchecker sidebar, there is a box showing suggestions for a correctio
35485 n, if any could be found.
35486 Clicking on one of the corrections will copy it to the
35490 field, double-clicking directly invokes the replacement.
35491 Unknown but correctly typed words can be added to the personal dictionary.
35494 \begin_layout Standard
35495 By default, the dictionary file used is determined by the document language
35498 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
35502 You can specify the language of a word in the spellchecker dialog by choosing
35503 a different one at the top of the dialog.
35505 can correctly spell check documents containing multiple languages.
35506 This works if you have set the language of the text parts using the
35509 \begin_inset space ~
35517 arg "dialog-show character"
35520 ) and have the spell checker dictionaries installed.
35522 automatically switches to the appropriate dictionary file.
35525 \begin_layout Standard
35526 All spell-checker dictionaries supported by \SpecialChar LyX
35527 can be downloaded from here:
35528 \begin_inset Newline newline
35532 \begin_inset Flex URL
35535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35537 http://sourceforge.net/projects/lyxwininstaller/files/hunspell/
35543 \begin_inset Newline newline
35547 \begin_inset space ~
35550 files for each language.
35551 To install a dictionary on Windows, copy the 2
35552 \begin_inset space ~
35555 files into \SpecialChar LyX
35556 's installation subfolder
35564 and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35566 \begin_inset Newline newline
35569 With Linux one needs to install the packages for the desired language.
35570 The number of these packages vary depending on the Linux distribution,
35571 but in most cases these are
35587 is the language code.
35590 \begin_layout Subsection
35594 \begin_layout Standard
35597 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35598 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35600 \begin_inset space ~
35603 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
35606 you can set the following things:
35609 \begin_layout Description
35611 \begin_inset space ~
35614 engine Select the library \SpecialChar LyX
35615 should use for spell checking.
35616 Depending on your platform,
35630 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35631 Enchant itself is a wrapper library having different configurable back-ends.
35632 Please consult the documentation or man-page of it to learn more.
35647 \begin_inset space ~
35650 OS can also use Mac's own spellchecker and will use it by default.
35653 \begin_layout Description
35655 \begin_inset space ~
35658 language If this field is not empty, \SpecialChar LyX
35659 will always use the given language
35660 for the spell checking, no matter what the document language is.
35663 \begin_layout Description
35665 \begin_inset space ~
35668 characters Allows you to add non-standard characters that the spell checker
35670 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35674 \begin_inset space \space{}
35678 This should normally not be needed.
35681 \begin_layout Description
35683 \begin_inset space ~
35687 \begin_inset space ~
35690 words Prevents the spell checker from complaining about compounded words
35692 \begin_inset Quotes eld
35696 \begin_inset Quotes erd
35702 \begin_layout Description
35704 \begin_inset space ~
35707 continuously Checks the spelling of your document as you type it.
35708 Misspelled words get underlined with a dotted red line.
35709 By right-clicking on an underlined word, suggestions from the spellchecker
35710 appear in a context menu.
35711 Choosing one of them will replace the misspelled word with the suggested
35715 \begin_layout Description
35717 \begin_inset space ~
35721 \begin_inset space ~
35725 \begin_inset space ~
35728 comments If enabled, the spelling of non-printed document content is checked
35732 \begin_layout Section
35734 \begin_inset Index idx
35737 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
35746 name "sec:Thesaurus"
35753 \begin_layout Standard
35755 provides a multilingual thesaurus.
35756 It uses the same thesaurus framework as LibreOffice, OpenOffice and Firefox
35765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35766 \begin_inset CommandInset href
35768 target "http://lingucomponent.openoffice.org/thesaurus.html"
35777 thesaurus library, which is included in \SpecialChar LyX
35779 Therefore, \SpecialChar LyX
35780 is able to directly access OpenOffice thesaurus dictionaries,
35781 which are available for many languages.
35784 \begin_layout Standard
35785 This section describes how new dictionaries are installed and set up for
35786 the use with \SpecialChar LyX
35790 \begin_layout Subsection
35791 Setting up the thesaurus
35794 \begin_layout Standard
35803 thesauri consist of two files per language: A file with the suffix
35807 containing the data and an index file with the suffix
35812 The standardized file names include the language code for the given language
35814 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35818 \begin_inset space ~
35826 For instance, the US English files are named:
35829 \begin_layout Itemize
35833 \begin_layout Itemize
35837 \begin_layout Standard
35846 and its thesaurus installed, these files should be already on your system
35847 and you just need to point \SpecialChar LyX
35850 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35851 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35852 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35854 \begin_inset space ~
35859 ) to the path where they are installed.
35863 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35864 On Linux, depending on your distribution and the way you installed the dictionar
35865 ies, typical locations are
35871 /usr/share/myspell/dicts/
35875 /usr/share/ooo/thesaurus/
35879 ~/.config/libreoffice/<version>/user/
35882 On Windows, dictionaries are to be found at
35888 LibreOffice-<Version>
35895 On the Mac, the default location is
35897 /Users\SpecialChar breakableslash
35898 <user name>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35899 Library\SpecialChar breakableslash
35900 Application Support\SpecialChar breakableslash
35901 libreoffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35902 <version>\SpecialChar breakableslash
35910 On Windows, you can alternatively also select dictionaries for installation
35911 during the \SpecialChar LyX
35912 installation process, which will then be installed in the correct
35916 \begin_layout Standard
35917 If you want to install new\SpecialChar breakableslash
35918 further thesaurus dictionaries, you can downloaded
35922 \begin_layout Itemize
35923 \begin_inset Flex URL
35926 \begin_layout Plain Layout
35928 http://www.lyx.org/trac/browser/lyxsvn/dictionaries/trunk/thes/
35936 \begin_layout Standard
35937 To install a new dictionary, download the two files for this dictionary
35938 into the thesaurus path (which is set in
35940 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35941 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35942 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35944 \begin_inset space ~
35949 ) and restart \SpecialChar LyX
35951 If this path is not defined yet, you can use a dictionary of your choice
35952 and point \SpecialChar LyX
35956 \begin_layout Standard
35957 Alternatively, you can also install new dictionaries via
35959 LibreOffice\SpecialChar breakableslash
35962 or, on Linux, via your package manager (look for
35968 libreoffice-thesaurus-*
35971 If you do this, make sure that \SpecialChar LyX
35972 is able to find the installed dictionaries,
35974 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
35980 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
35981 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
35982 Paths\SpecialChar menuseparator
35984 \begin_inset space ~
35989 points to the path where you installed these dictionaries.
35992 \begin_layout Subsection
35993 Using the thesaurus
35996 \begin_layout Standard
35997 To start the thesaurus, use the menu
35999 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36002 or the toolbar button
36005 arg "thesaurus-entry"
36008 while the cursor is at the word you want to look up or while a word is
36010 A dialog pops up showing you probably related words that you can use as
36012 The suggestions are grouped into categories.
36013 Note that, for some languages (such as English), the thesaurus does not
36014 only show equivalent words (synonyms), but also generic terms (such as
36023 ), related terms (such as
36026 \begin_inset space ~
36035 ), compounds (such as
36038 \begin_inset space ~
36047 ) and opposites (antonyms) (such as
36056 Generic terms, related terms and antonyms are marked as such.
36059 \begin_layout Standard
36060 The language is automatically chosen from the language at the cursor, but
36061 you can also switch it in the dialog, as you can enter new words to look
36065 \begin_layout Standard
36066 Note that the thesaurus cannot handle phrases (only compounds that are in
36067 the dictionary, such as the above
36071 ), and you have to use the so called lemma form, i.
36072 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36076 \begin_inset space \space{}
36079 the form that is used in the dictionaries (for many languages: first person
36080 singular indicative active for nouns, infinitive for verbs).
36081 For example, looking up the word form
36085 yields no results, while results are shown for the word form
36090 Your best bet is to highlight only the relevant part of such a word (e.
36091 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36095 \begin_inset space \space{}
36106 s); then you will get suggestions without needing to adjust the query in
36107 the dialog, and also the replacement will probably be correct (as only
36108 the highlighted part will be replaced; thus the ending remains).
36111 \begin_layout Section
36113 \begin_inset Index idx
36116 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36123 \begin_inset Index idx
36126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36127 Document ! Change Tracking
36133 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36135 name "sec:Change-Tracking"
36142 \begin_layout Standard
36143 When you work on a document collaboratively it is extremely useful to be
36144 able to see changes that others have made highlighted in the document.
36145 You can then decide if you want to accept a change or not.
36146 This can be achieved by turning on change tracking in the menu
36148 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36150 \begin_inset space ~
36153 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36155 \begin_inset space ~
36163 \begin_layout Standard
36164 Changes made in the document will then be highlighted by strokes and colors:
36178 The color depends on the author that made the change.
36179 You can change the color in
36181 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36182 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36184 \begin_inset space ~
36188 \begin_inset space ~
36193 \SpecialChar menuseparator
36199 \begin_inset Index idx
36202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36203 Color ! Change tracking
36208 The author and the date of the change are shown in \SpecialChar LyX
36209 's status bar when the
36210 cursor is in changed text.
36211 The same information is shown when you use the toolbar button
36214 arg "changes-merge"
36220 \begin_layout Standard
36221 When change tracking is activated, you will see the review toolbar in \SpecialChar LyX
36223 \begin_inset Index idx
36226 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36235 \begin_layout Standard
36236 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36242 \begin_layout Standard
36243 \begin_inset Graphics
36244 filename clipart/ChangesToolbar.png
36252 \begin_layout Standard
36253 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36259 \begin_layout Standard
36260 The review toolbar as shown above contains the following buttons:
36263 \begin_layout Standard
36264 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36270 \begin_layout Standard
36271 \begin_inset Tabular
36272 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="10" columns="2">
36273 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
36274 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36275 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
36276 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36277 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36280 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36285 arg "changes-track"
36293 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36296 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36299 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36301 \begin_inset space ~
36304 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36306 \begin_inset space ~
36315 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36324 arg "changes-output"
36332 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36338 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36340 \begin_inset space ~
36343 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36345 \begin_inset space ~
36349 \begin_inset space ~
36353 \begin_inset space ~
36362 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36363 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36366 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36379 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36382 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36383 Jumps to the next change
36389 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36390 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36393 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36398 arg "change-accept"
36406 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36409 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36412 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36414 \begin_inset space ~
36417 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36419 \begin_inset space ~
36428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36437 arg "change-reject"
36445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36451 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36453 \begin_inset space ~
36456 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36458 \begin_inset space ~
36467 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36468 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36471 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36476 arg "changes-merge"
36484 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36487 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36490 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36492 \begin_inset space ~
36495 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36497 \begin_inset space ~
36506 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36507 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36510 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36515 arg "all-changes-accept"
36523 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36529 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36531 \begin_inset space ~
36534 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36536 \begin_inset space ~
36540 \begin_inset space ~
36549 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36550 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36553 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36558 arg "all-changes-reject"
36566 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36569 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36572 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36574 \begin_inset space ~
36577 Tracking\SpecialChar menuseparator
36579 \begin_inset space ~
36583 \begin_inset space ~
36592 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36593 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36596 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36615 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
36616 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
36618 \begin_inset space ~
36627 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
36628 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36631 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36644 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
36647 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36650 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
36652 \begin_inset space ~
36668 \begin_layout Standard
36669 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
36675 \begin_layout Standard
36676 Not all changes are (yet) visualized, especially no format changes like
36696 \begin_layout Standard
36697 The review toolbar helps you to accept, reject, or merge changes – highlight
36698 the change and press one of the desired toolbar buttons.
36699 When you merge changes, a window pops up showing you information about
36700 the next change after the current cursor position.
36701 So you don't need to highlight a certain change.
36702 Within the merge window you can decide to accept or reject changes and
36703 step to the next change.
36704 This way you can jump through all the changes in the document.
36707 \begin_layout Standard
36708 The toolbar has two buttons to handle notes because notes are often important
36709 to describe a change.
36712 \begin_layout Standard
36713 To show the changes made in the output you need the \SpecialChar LaTeX
36719 \begin_inset Index idx
36722 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36724 -packages ! dvipost
36730 You will find it in the \SpecialChar TeX
36732 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36738 or in the package manager of your \SpecialChar LaTeX
36742 \begin_layout Section
36743 Comparison of Documents
36744 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36746 name "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
36751 \begin_inset Index idx
36754 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36755 Comparison of documents
36763 \begin_layout Standard
36764 You can compare two different \SpecialChar LyX
36767 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36771 The comparison result is a \SpecialChar LyX
36772 file with change tracking enabled showing the
36774 In the comparison dialog you can select from which document \SpecialChar LyX
36776 the document settings for the resulting difference file with the option
36780 \begin_inset space ~
36784 \begin_inset space ~
36788 \begin_inset space ~
36797 \begin_inset space ~
36801 \begin_inset space ~
36805 \begin_inset space ~
36809 \begin_inset space ~
36813 \begin_inset space ~
36817 \begin_inset space ~
36822 enables the change tracking option
36825 \begin_inset space ~
36829 \begin_inset space ~
36833 \begin_inset space ~
36838 to visualize the differences also in the PDF output of the difference file.
36841 \begin_layout Section
36842 International Support
36843 \begin_inset Index idx
36846 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36847 International support
36855 \begin_layout Standard
36856 This section describes how to use \SpecialChar LyX
36857 with any language you want.
36858 For some languages there are special Wiki-pages that explain how to set
36859 up \SpecialChar LyX
36861 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
36863 key "Arabic,Armenian,Farsi,Hebrew,Latvian,Lithuanian,Mongolian,Vietnamese"
36870 \begin_layout Standard
36871 Besides languages, \SpecialChar LyX
36872 also supports phonetic symbols, see section
36873 \begin_inset space ~
36877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36879 reference "subsec:Special-Character"
36886 \begin_layout Subsection
36888 \begin_inset Index idx
36891 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36898 \begin_inset Index idx
36901 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36902 Document ! Settings
36908 \begin_inset Index idx
36911 \begin_layout Plain Layout
36912 Document ! Language
36920 \begin_layout Standard
36923 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
36924 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
36927 dialog lets you set
36929 the language, the quote style and character encoding
36934 \begin_layout Standard
36939 you can choose the character encoding map you want to use for \SpecialChar LaTeX
36944 \begin_inset space ~
36949 is the preferred choice and works well in most cases.
36950 For details about the different encoding options see section
36951 \begin_inset space ~
36955 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36957 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
36964 \begin_layout Subsection
36965 Keyboard mapping configuration
36966 \begin_inset CommandInset label
36968 name "subsec:Keyboard-mapping"
36975 \begin_layout Standard
36976 If you have for example a U.
36977 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
36980 S.-style keyboard and want to write in a language other than English, you
36981 can use an alternate keymap.
36982 For example, if you want to write in Italian, you can configure \SpecialChar LyX
36987 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
36988 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
36989 Editing\SpecialChar menuseparator
36992 dialog allows you to choose up to two keyboard mappings, see section
36993 \begin_inset space ~
36997 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
36999 reference "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
37004 You can choose primary and secondary keyboard languages and then select
37005 which one you want to use.
37008 \begin_layout Standard
37009 Finally, you may just want to change a few key mappings or create an entirely
37010 different keymap (for Vulcan, for instance).
37011 You may, for example, normally write in Italian on a U.
37012 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37015 S.-style keyboard but want to include an occasional quotation in German.
37016 In such a case, you can write your own keyboard mapping or modify an existing
37017 one to support the characters you want.
37018 This and many other customizations are explained in the
37025 \begin_layout Chapter
37028 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37030 name "chap:The-User-Interface"
37037 \begin_layout Standard
37038 This appendix lists all the available menus and describes their functionality.
37039 It is designed as a quick reference if you are searching for a special
37040 topic inside the user's guide.
37043 \begin_layout Section
37045 \begin_inset Index idx
37048 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37057 \begin_layout Standard
37062 menu are the basic operations in addition to some more advanced operations.
37065 \begin_layout Subsection
37069 \begin_layout Standard
37070 Creates a new document.
37073 \begin_layout Subsection
37077 \begin_layout Standard
37078 This menu entry prompts you for a template to use.
37079 Selecting a template will automatically set certain layout features for
37080 the document, features you would otherwise need to change manually.
37083 \begin_layout Subsection
37087 \begin_layout Standard
37091 \begin_layout Subsection
37095 \begin_layout Standard
37096 The submenu shows a list of the recently opened files.
37097 Click there on a file to open it.
37100 \begin_layout Subsection
37104 \begin_layout Standard
37105 Closes the current document.
37108 \begin_layout Subsection
37112 \begin_layout Standard
37113 Closes all opened documents.
37116 \begin_layout Subsection
37120 \begin_layout Standard
37121 Saves the actual document.
37124 \begin_layout Subsection
37128 \begin_layout Standard
37129 Saves the actual document under a new name to create a copy.
37132 \begin_layout Subsection
37136 \begin_layout Standard
37137 Saves all opened documents.
37140 \begin_layout Subsection
37144 \begin_layout Standard
37145 Reloads the actual document from disk.
37148 \begin_layout Subsection
37152 \begin_layout Standard
37153 This is used when multiple people are working on the same document or when
37154 one person wants to keep a careful archive of changes.
37155 It is described in the section
37157 Version Control in \SpecialChar LyX
37162 Additional Features
37167 \begin_layout Subsection
37171 \begin_layout Standard
37172 Here you can import files from older \SpecialChar LyX
37173 versions, HTML files, \SpecialChar LaTeX
37175 files, plain text files and comma separated, table-like text files (CSV).
37176 The files will be imported as a new \SpecialChar LyX
37180 \begin_layout Standard
37181 When using the menu entry
37184 \begin_inset space ~
37189 , line breaks in the text will start a new paragraph; when using the menu
37193 \begin_inset space ~
37197 \begin_inset space ~
37201 \begin_inset space ~
37206 , consecutive lines of text will be imported to one big paragraph.
37207 A new paragraph will begin when there is a blank line in the file.
37210 \begin_layout Subsection
37212 \begin_inset CommandInset label
37214 name "subsec:Export"
37221 \begin_layout Standard
37222 You can export your document to various file formats.
37223 The resulting files are placed in the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
37225 The menu entries are not the same on all installations.
37226 They depend on the programs found by \SpecialChar LyX
37227 during its configuration.
37230 \begin_layout Standard
37231 Here is a list of all available entries; some of them are explained in detail
37233 \begin_inset space ~
37237 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37239 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
37246 \begin_layout Description
37252 \begin_inset space ~
37255 LyX format of the special \SpecialChar LyX
37257 \begin_inset space ~
37260 1.4.x versions for Chinese, Japanese and Korean (CJK)
37261 \begin_inset Newline newline
37264 Since \SpecialChar LyX
37265 1.5.0 CJK support has been fully integrated into \SpecialChar LyX
37269 \begin_layout Description
37270 DocBook text file with code in the language SGML that is used for the markup
37276 \begin_layout Description
37278 \begin_inset space ~
37281 (XML) text file with code in the language XML that is used for the markup
37287 \begin_layout Description
37288 DraftDVI \SpecialChar LaTeX
37289 's native DVI-format.
37290 This format is not suitable if you have special characters or spaces in
37291 files paths or file names in your document.
37293 use this format internally as a pre-stage to export to
37300 \begin_layout Description
37301 DVI DVI-format that also allows the useage of special characters or spaces
37302 in files paths or file names
37305 \begin_layout Description
37307 \begin_inset space ~
37314 ) DVI-format using the program
37316 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37319 ; supports Unicode and the usage of non-\SpecialChar TeX
37323 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37326 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37331 not all DVI-viewers are currently able to display this output format properly.
37339 \begin_layout Description
37341 \begin_inset space ~
37344 (cropped) the same as
37348 but with cropped page margins.
37351 \begin_layout Description
37353 \begin_inset space ~
37356 Dot text file with code in the programming language
37360 which is used to draw visualizations of graphs via the program
37365 \begin_layout Description
37369 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
37372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37377 the exported file will be stored in a subdirectory.
37385 \begin_layout Description
37387 \begin_inset space ~
37391 \begin_inset space ~
37394 Word) HTML-format specialized so that the result can be imported to
37398 ; as a consequence of this formulas will be embedded as bitmap fonts and
37406 \begin_layout Description
37410 \begin_inset space ~
37419 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37420 source that is compilable with the program
37422 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37426 \begin_layout Description
37430 \begin_inset space ~
37435 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37436 source, additionally all images used in the document
37437 will be converted to a format that is readable by the
37441 program (GIF, JPG, PDF, PNG)
37444 \begin_layout Description
37448 \begin_inset space ~
37453 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37454 source code, additionally all images used in the document
37455 will be converted to the EPS-format, only this format is readable by the
37463 \begin_layout Description
37467 \begin_inset space ~
37476 text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37477 source that is compilable with the program
37483 \begin_layout Description
37485 \begin_inset space ~
37489 \begin_inset space ~
37496 ) text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37497 source and also code in the syntax of the music notation
37503 \begin_layout Description
37505 \begin_inset space ~
37508 z.y.x \SpecialChar LyX
37509 -Document in a format readable by the \SpecialChar LyX
37511 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37515 \begin_inset space \space{}
37520 \begin_inset space ~
37524 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37528 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37532 \begin_inset Quotes eld
37536 \begin_inset Quotes erd
37539 represent the version number)
37542 \begin_layout Description
37544 \begin_inset space ~
37548 \begin_inset space ~
37551 (zip|tar.gz) creates a zip-archive or a tar.gz-archive file (depending upon
37552 your system) that contains your document and all files that are necessary
37553 to compile it (images, child documents, Bib\SpecialChar TeX
37557 \begin_layout Description
37558 LyXHTML HTML-format using \SpecialChar LyX
37559 's internal XHTML engine
37562 \begin_layout Description
37564 \begin_inset space ~
37568 \begin_inset space ~
37572 \begin_inset space ~
37576 \begin_inset space ~
37579 XML Office Open XML file, to be opened with
37584 For the conversion the program
37593 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37596 \begin_layout Description
37597 NoWeb text file with code in the format of the literate programming language
37602 \begin_layout Description
37604 \begin_inset space ~
37607 (Pandoc) OpenDocument file, to be opened with
37609 LibreOffice, OpenOffice, KOffice, Abiword
37612 For the conversion the program
37621 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37624 \begin_layout Description
37626 \begin_inset space ~
37629 (tex4ht) OpenDocument file.
37630 For the conversion the program
37639 is a third-party product and may not work in all cases.
37642 \begin_layout Description
37644 \begin_inset space ~
37647 (cropped) the same as
37650 \begin_inset space ~
37655 but with cropped page margins
37658 \begin_layout Description
37662 \begin_inset space ~
37667 PDF-format using the program
37671 , produces internally a DVI-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37674 \begin_layout Description
37678 \begin_inset space ~
37682 \begin_inset space ~
37690 \begin_inset space ~
37695 but with a reduced pixel resolution of 150
37696 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
37700 \begin_inset space \space{}
37703 useful for e-books to be read on tablet PCs or for large documents as intermedia
37707 \begin_layout Description
37711 \begin_inset space ~
37716 PDF-format using the program
37718 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
37721 , produces PDF-files directly
37724 \begin_layout Description
37728 \begin_inset space ~
37733 PDF-format using the program
37737 , produces PDF-files directly
37740 \begin_layout Description
37744 \begin_inset space ~
37749 PDF-format using the program
37753 , produces internally a PostScript-file which is then converted to a PDF-file
37756 \begin_layout Description
37760 \begin_inset space ~
37765 PDF-format using the program
37770 , produces PDF-files directly
37773 \begin_layout Description
37777 \begin_inset space ~
37785 \begin_layout Description
37789 \begin_inset space ~
37793 \begin_inset space ~
37798 text format, the document will first be converted to Postscript format
37799 and then exported as text using the program
37804 \begin_layout Description
37809 PostScript format using the program
37817 options see section
37818 \begin_inset space ~
37822 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37824 reference "subsec:General-output"
37831 \begin_layout Description
37832 Sweave text file with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
37833 source and also code in the statistical programming
37847 it is possible to use
37851 -commands in \SpecialChar LaTeX
37855 \begin_layout Standard
37856 If one of the menu entries
37863 \begin_inset space ~
37872 is missing, you need to update your \SpecialChar LaTeX
37874 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
37876 \begin_inset space ~
37880 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37882 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
37887 \begin_inset Index idx
37890 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37891 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
37900 \begin_layout Subsection
37904 \begin_layout Standard
37905 This menu entry will only appear if you have a fax program installed (on
37906 Windows you additionally need to register its program path to \SpecialChar LyX
37909 \begin_inset space ~
37913 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37915 reference "sec:Paths"
37920 With this menu entry you can send your document to a fax program like
37929 The default format of the sent file is PostScript.
37930 The format can be changed in \SpecialChar LyX
37931 's preferences as described in section
37932 \begin_inset space ~
37936 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37938 reference "subsec:Converters"
37945 \begin_layout Subsection
37946 New and Close Window
37949 \begin_layout Standard
37950 Opens or closes a new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
37954 \begin_layout Subsection
37958 \begin_layout Standard
37959 Prompts you to save all unsaved documents and then exits.
37962 \begin_layout Section
37964 \begin_inset Index idx
37967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
37976 \begin_layout Subsection
37980 \begin_layout Standard
37981 Described in section
37982 \begin_inset space ~
37986 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
37988 reference "sec:Undo-and-Redo"
37995 \begin_layout Subsection
37996 Cut, Copy, Paste, Paste Recent, Paste Special
37999 \begin_layout Standard
38000 Described in section
38001 \begin_inset space ~
38005 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38007 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38014 \begin_layout Subsection
38018 \begin_layout Standard
38019 Selects the content of the inset in which the cursor currently is.
38020 If the cursor is outside an inset, the whole document will be selected.
38023 \begin_layout Subsection
38027 \begin_layout Standard
38028 Selects the whole document.
38031 \begin_layout Subsection
38032 Find & Replace (Quick)
38035 \begin_layout Standard
38036 Described in section
38037 \begin_inset space ~
38041 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38043 reference "sec:Basic-Editing-Features"
38050 \begin_layout Subsection
38051 Find & Replace (Advanced)
38054 \begin_layout Standard
38055 Described in section
38056 \begin_inset space ~
38060 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38062 reference "sec:Advanced-Find-and"
38069 \begin_layout Subsection
38070 Move Paragraph Up/Down
38073 \begin_layout Standard
38074 This shifts the paragraph in which the cursor currently is one paragraph
38078 \begin_layout Subsection
38082 \begin_layout Standard
38083 Described in section
38084 \begin_inset space ~
38088 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38090 reference "subsec:Fine-Tuning-with-the"
38097 \begin_layout Subsection
38099 \begin_inset Index idx
38102 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38103 Paragraph ! Settings
38111 \begin_layout Standard
38112 Enables you to set the paragraph alignment, line spacing and label width.
38113 These settings only affect the paragraph in which the cursor is currently
38117 \begin_layout Standard
38118 You can also prevent the first line of the paragraph being indented if you
38119 have chosen to separate paragraphs with
38125 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38126 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38128 \begin_inset space ~
38136 \begin_layout Subsection
38137 Table and Rows & Columns
38140 \begin_layout Standard
38141 These menus only appear if the cursor is inside a table.
38142 It allows you to create multicolumn and multirow cells, add or remove borders
38143 of a cell and to set the alignment of the cell.
38146 \begin_layout Subsection
38150 \begin_layout Standard
38151 This menu only appears if the cursor is inside an inset.
38152 It will dissolve this inset.
38153 This means that the inset is deleted and its content is left as normal
38157 \begin_layout Subsection
38161 \begin_layout Standard
38162 This menu is only active if the cursor is inside an inset or a formula.
38163 Here you can change the properties of the inset or the formula.
38166 \begin_layout Subsection
38167 Increase/Decrease List Depth
38170 \begin_layout Standard
38171 These menus are only active if the cursor is in an environment that can
38173 They increase/decrease the environment nesting level as explained in section
38174 \begin_inset space ~
38178 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38180 reference "sec:Nesting"
38185 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38187 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
38194 \begin_layout Subsection
38197 Start New Environment/Start New Parent Environment
38200 \begin_layout Standard
38201 These menus are only visible if it is possible to have two consecutive environme
38202 nts of the same type.
38204 \begin_inset space ~
38208 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38210 reference "subsec:Separate-Nestings"
38214 for an explanation.
38217 \begin_layout Section
38219 \begin_inset Index idx
38222 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38231 \begin_layout Standard
38232 At the bottom of the
38236 menu the opened documents are listed.
38239 \begin_layout Subsection
38240 Open/Close all Insets
38243 \begin_layout Standard
38244 Opens/closes all insets in your document.
38247 \begin_layout Subsection
38248 Unfold/Fold Math Macros
38251 \begin_layout Standard
38252 Unfolds/folds the current math macro.
38255 \begin_layout Standard
38256 Math macros are described in the
38263 \begin_layout Subsection
38267 \begin_layout Standard
38268 Shows the outline window as described in sections
38269 \begin_inset space ~
38273 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38275 reference "sec:Navigating"
38280 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38282 reference "subsec:Table-of-Contents"
38289 \begin_layout Subsection
38293 \begin_layout Standard
38294 Opens a window showing the source code of the actual document, as described
38296 \begin_inset space ~
38300 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38302 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
38309 \begin_layout Subsection
38313 \begin_layout Standard
38314 Opens a window showing console messages.
38315 This is useful for debugging \SpecialChar LyX
38317 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38320 e., hunt for errors in the program) or to see what is going on in the background
38321 while \SpecialChar LaTeX
38322 is processing the document.
38325 \begin_layout Subsection
38327 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38329 name "subsec:Toolbars"
38334 \begin_inset Index idx
38337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38346 \begin_layout Standard
38347 In this menu entry you can set the appearance of the different toolbars.
38348 All toolbars and the
38351 \begin_inset space ~
38356 can be turned on and off.
38361 state is denoted in the menu with a checkmark.
38373 \begin_inset space ~
38385 \begin_inset space ~
38390 toolbars can additionally be set to the state
38394 , denoted in the menu with the suffix
38401 \begin_layout Standard
38406 state the toolbar is permanently shown; in the
38410 state the toolbar is only shown when the cursor is in a certain environment
38411 or when a certain feature is enabled.
38412 That means that the review toolbar will only be shown if change tracking
38413 is activated, the math and table toolbars are only shown if the cursor
38414 is inside a formula or table respectively.
38417 \begin_layout Standard
38419 's toolbars and their buttons are explained in section
38420 \begin_inset space ~
38424 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38426 reference "sec:Toolbars"
38433 \begin_layout Subsection
38437 \begin_layout Standard
38441 \begin_inset space ~
38445 \begin_inset space ~
38449 \begin_inset space ~
38453 \begin_inset space ~
38457 \begin_inset space ~
38461 \begin_inset space ~
38466 will split \SpecialChar LyX
38467 's main window vertically while
38470 \begin_inset space ~
38474 \begin_inset space ~
38478 \begin_inset space ~
38482 \begin_inset space ~
38486 \begin_inset space ~
38490 \begin_inset space ~
38495 will split it horizontally.
38496 This allows you to view documents at the same time to compare them, or
38497 to view the same document, but at different positions.
38498 You can even split the main window several times to view, for example,
38499 three or more documents at the same time.
38500 To close a split view, use the menu
38503 \begin_inset space ~
38507 \begin_inset space ~
38515 \begin_layout Subsection
38519 \begin_layout Standard
38520 Closes a split view.
38523 \begin_layout Subsection
38527 \begin_layout Standard
38528 Using this menu entry or pressing F11 removes the menu bar and all toolbars
38529 so that you will see nothing but your text.
38530 It furthermore displays \SpecialChar LyX
38531 's main window fullscreen.
38532 To return from fullscreen to the normal view, press F11, or right-click
38533 and turn off the fullscreen mode in the context menu.
38536 \begin_layout Section
38538 \begin_inset Index idx
38541 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38550 \begin_layout Subsection
38554 \begin_layout Standard
38555 Inserts math constructs that are explained in chapter
38556 \begin_inset space ~
38560 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38562 reference "chap:Mathematical-Formulas"
38573 \begin_layout Subsection
38575 \begin_inset CommandInset label
38577 name "subsec:Special-Character"
38584 \begin_layout Standard
38585 Here you can insert the following characters:
38588 \begin_layout Description
38593 dialog which allows you to insert any character that can be output by your
38596 By default groups of characters are displayed in character categories;
38597 the available characters depend on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38598 -packages you have installed.
38599 You can get a complete display by checking
38602 \begin_inset space ~
38608 \begin_inset Newline newline
38612 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
38615 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38620 Not all characters will be visible in the
38624 dialog because none of the screen fonts that you can set in the preferences
38625 dialog (see section
38626 \begin_inset space ~
38630 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38632 reference "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
38636 ) can display every character.
38644 \begin_layout Description
38645 Ellipsis Inserts an ellipsis: \SpecialChar ldots
38649 \begin_layout Description
38651 \begin_inset space ~
38655 \begin_inset space ~
38658 Sentence Inserts an end of sentence period as described in section
38659 \begin_inset space ~
38663 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38665 reference "subsec:Abbreviations"
38672 \begin_layout Description
38674 \begin_inset space ~
38677 Quote Inserts this quote: ", no matter what quote style you selected in
38680 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38681 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38687 \begin_layout Description
38689 \begin_inset space ~
38692 Quote Inserts a single quote in the quotation marks style selected in the
38695 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
38696 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
38702 \begin_layout Description
38704 \begin_inset space ~
38707 Hyphen Inserts a hyphen that is protected from line breaks: \SpecialChar nobreakdash
38711 \begin_layout Description
38713 \begin_inset space ~
38716 Slash Inserts a slash where a line break can also occur: \SpecialChar breakableslash
38720 \begin_layout Description
38722 \begin_inset space ~
38725 Space Inserts a character representing a single space (the one you get when
38731 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38737 \begin_layout Description
38739 \begin_inset space ~
38742 Separator Inserts the menu separator sign: \SpecialChar menuseparator
38746 \begin_layout Description
38748 \begin_inset space ~
38752 \begin_inset Index idx
38755 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38762 \begin_inset Index idx
38765 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38766 Language ! Phonetic symbols
38771 Inserts a box where you can insert symbols from the International Phonetic
38772 Alphabet (IPA) and opens a toolbar which provides a large set of these
38774 To use this feature you must have the \SpecialChar LaTeX
38780 \begin_inset Index idx
38783 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38791 \begin_inset Newline newline
38794 More information about this feature can be found in the
38800 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
38806 \begin_layout Description
38807 Logos Inserts the logos of the programs \SpecialChar LyX
38809 , \SpecialChar LaTeX
38810 and \SpecialChar LaTeX2e
38814 \begin_layout Subsection
38818 \begin_layout Standard
38819 Opens a submenu with the following options:
38822 \begin_layout Description
38823 Superscript Inserts a superscript: test
38824 \begin_inset script superscript
38826 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38835 \begin_layout Description
38836 Subscript Inserts a subscript: test
38837 \begin_inset script subscript
38839 \begin_layout Plain Layout
38848 \begin_layout Description
38850 \begin_inset space ~
38853 Space Inserts a protected space as described in section
38854 \begin_inset space ~
38858 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38860 reference "subsec:Protected-Space"
38867 \begin_layout Description
38869 \begin_inset space ~
38872 Space Inserts an inter-word space as described in section
38873 \begin_inset space ~
38877 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38879 reference "subsec:Inter-word-Space"
38886 \begin_layout Description
38888 \begin_inset space ~
38891 Space Inserts a thin space as described in section
38892 \begin_inset space ~
38896 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38898 reference "subsec:Thin-Space"
38905 \begin_layout Description
38907 \begin_inset space ~
38910 Space Inserts a character to visualize that there is or should be a space.
38912 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
38916 \begin_inset space \space{}
38919 useful if you need to indicate a space in a command sequence.
38920 An example from the \SpecialChar LyX
38926 \begin_inset Quotes eld
38929 To insert a fraction use the command
38934 \begin_inset space \textvisiblespace{}
38938 \begin_inset Formula $\downarrow$
38944 \begin_inset Quotes erd
38947 The visible space is hereby the character before the
38954 \begin_layout Description
38956 \begin_inset space ~
38959 Space Inserts horizontal space as described in section
38960 \begin_inset space ~
38964 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38966 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Space"
38973 \begin_layout Description
38975 \begin_inset space ~
38978 Line Inserts a horizontal line as described in section
38979 \begin_inset space ~
38983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
38985 reference "subsec:Horizontal-Lines"
38992 \begin_layout Description
38994 \begin_inset space ~
38997 Space Inserts vertical space as described in section
38998 \begin_inset space ~
39002 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39004 reference "subsec:Vertical-Space"
39011 \begin_layout Description
39012 Phantom Inserts a Phantom space as described in section
39013 \begin_inset space ~
39017 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39019 reference "subsec:Phantom-Space"
39026 \begin_layout Description
39028 \begin_inset space ~
39031 Point Inserts a hyphenation point as described in section
39032 \begin_inset space ~
39036 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39038 reference "subsec:Hyphenation"
39045 \begin_layout Description
39047 \begin_inset space ~
39050 Break Inserts a ligature break as described in section
39051 \begin_inset space ~
39055 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39057 reference "subsec:Ligatures"
39064 \begin_layout Description
39066 \begin_inset space ~
39070 \begin_inset space ~
39073 Break Inserts a forced line break as described in section
39074 \begin_inset space ~
39078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39080 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39087 \begin_layout Description
39089 \begin_inset space ~
39092 Break Inserts a forced line break that right justifies the remaining text
39093 as described in section
39094 \begin_inset space ~
39098 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39100 reference "subsec:Forced-Line-Breaks"
39107 \begin_layout Description
39109 \begin_inset space ~
39112 Page Inserts a forced page break as described in section
39113 \begin_inset space ~
39117 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39119 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39126 \begin_layout Description
39128 \begin_inset space ~
39131 Break Inserts a forced page break that shares the extra space among paragraph
39132 breaks instead of leaving it at the bottom of the page, as described in
39134 \begin_inset space ~
39138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39140 reference "subsec:Forced-Page-Breaks"
39147 \begin_layout Description
39149 \begin_inset space ~
39152 Page Inserts a clear page break as described in section
39153 \begin_inset space ~
39157 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39159 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39166 \begin_layout Description
39168 \begin_inset space ~
39172 \begin_inset space ~
39175 Page Inserts a clear doublepage break as described in section
39176 \begin_inset space ~
39180 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39182 reference "subsec:Clear-Page-Breaks"
39189 \begin_layout Subsection
39193 \begin_layout Standard
39194 Various lists can be inserted with this menu entry.
39198 \begin_inset space ~
39219 are described in section
39220 \begin_inset space ~
39224 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39226 reference "sec:toc"
39235 is described in section
39236 \begin_inset space ~
39240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39242 reference "sec:Index"
39250 is described in section
39251 \begin_inset space ~
39255 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39257 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39263 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
39266 is described in section
39267 \begin_inset space ~
39271 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39273 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
39280 \begin_layout Subsection
39284 \begin_layout Standard
39285 To insert floats, as described in section
39286 \begin_inset space ~
39290 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39292 reference "sec:Floats"
39296 and in detail the chapter
39303 \begin_inset space ~
39311 \begin_layout Subsection
39315 \begin_layout Standard
39316 To insert notes, described in section
39317 \begin_inset space ~
39321 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39323 reference "sec:Notes"
39330 \begin_layout Subsection
39334 \begin_layout Standard
39335 Inserts a branch inset, if any, and allowing you to create and insert a
39337 Branches are described in section
39338 \begin_inset space ~
39342 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39344 reference "sec:Branches"
39351 \begin_layout Subsection
39355 \begin_layout Standard
39356 Inserts document class-specific insets.
39357 Such insets only exist if they are defined in the layout file for a certain
39359 An example is the document class
39360 \begin_inset Quotes eld
39364 \begin_inset Quotes erd
39367 with three custom insets.
39370 Flex insets and InsetLayout
39374 Installing New Document Classes, The Layout file format
39380 manual explains how custom insets are defined.
39383 \begin_layout Subsection
39385 \begin_inset Index idx
39388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39397 \begin_layout Standard
39398 This menu entry allows you to insert or include the contents of other files
39400 For more information see chapter
39402 External Document Parts
39405 \begin_inset space ~
39411 \begin_layout Subsection
39413 \begin_inset Index idx
39416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39425 \begin_layout Standard
39426 Inserts a box in a certain style.
39427 Boxes are described in detail in the chapter
39434 \begin_inset space ~
39442 \begin_layout Subsection
39446 \begin_layout Standard
39451 dialog as described in section
39452 \begin_inset space ~
39456 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39458 reference "sec:Bibliography"
39465 \begin_layout Subsection
39469 \begin_layout Standard
39474 as described in section
39475 \begin_inset space ~
39479 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39481 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39488 \begin_layout Subsection
39492 \begin_layout Standard
39497 as described in section
39498 \begin_inset space ~
39502 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39504 reference "sec:Cross-References"
39511 \begin_layout Subsection
39513 \begin_inset Index idx
39516 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39523 \begin_inset Index idx
39526 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39527 Tables ! Multi-page ! Caption
39535 \begin_layout Standard
39536 Inserts a caption in a float or multi-page table.
39537 Floats are described in section
39538 \begin_inset space ~
39542 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39544 reference "sec:Floats"
39548 ; captions in multi-page tables are described in the section
39550 Multi-page Captions
39555 \begin_inset space ~
39563 \begin_layout Subsection
39567 \begin_layout Standard
39568 Inserts an index entry as described in section
39569 \begin_inset space ~
39573 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39575 reference "sec:Index"
39582 \begin_layout Subsection
39586 \begin_layout Standard
39587 Inserts a nomenclature entry as described in section
39588 \begin_inset space ~
39592 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39594 reference "sec:Nomenclature"
39601 \begin_layout Subsection
39605 \begin_layout Standard
39606 Opens a dialog allowing you to specify the rows and columns of the table.
39607 Tables are described in section
39608 \begin_inset space ~
39612 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39614 reference "sec:Tables"
39618 and in detail in the chapter
39625 \begin_inset space ~
39633 \begin_layout Subsection
39637 \begin_layout Standard
39643 Graphics are described in section
39644 \begin_inset space ~
39648 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39650 reference "sec:Graphics"
39657 \begin_layout Subsection
39661 \begin_layout Standard
39662 Inserts a URL as described in section
39663 \begin_inset space ~
39667 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39669 reference "subsec:URLs"
39676 \begin_layout Subsection
39680 \begin_layout Standard
39681 Inserts a hyperlink as described in section
39682 \begin_inset space ~
39686 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39688 reference "subsec:Hyperlinks"
39695 \begin_layout Subsection
39699 \begin_layout Standard
39700 Inserts a footnote as described in section
39701 \begin_inset space ~
39705 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39707 reference "sec:Footnotes"
39714 \begin_layout Subsection
39718 \begin_layout Standard
39719 Inserts a marginal note as described in section
39720 \begin_inset space ~
39724 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39726 reference "sec:Marginal-Notes"
39733 \begin_layout Subsection
39737 \begin_layout Standard
39738 Is only visible if the cursor is in front, in or behind a section heading,
39739 title or caption of a float.
39740 Inserts a short title as described in section
39741 \begin_inset space ~
39745 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39747 reference "sec:Short-Titles"
39754 \begin_layout Subsection
39759 \begin_layout Standard
39760 Inserts a \SpecialChar TeX
39761 Code box as described in section
39762 \begin_inset space ~
39766 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39768 reference "subsec:TeX-Code-Boxes"
39775 \begin_layout Subsection
39777 \begin_inset Index idx
39780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39789 \begin_layout Standard
39790 Inserts a program listings box.
39791 Program listings are explained in the chapter
39793 Program Code Listings
39798 \begin_inset space ~
39806 \begin_layout Subsection
39810 \begin_layout Standard
39811 Inserts the actual date.
39812 The format depends on the date format of the language that is used for
39816 offers various ways to insert a date which are explained and also compared
39824 \begin_inset space ~
39832 \begin_layout Subsection
39836 \begin_layout Standard
39837 Inserts a preview inset as described in section
39838 \begin_inset space ~
39842 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
39844 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
39851 \begin_layout Section
39853 \begin_inset Index idx
39856 \begin_layout Plain Layout
39865 \begin_layout Standard
39866 This menu lists the existing chapters, sections, figures, tables, etc.
39867 \begin_inset space ~
39870 of the current document.
39871 This allows you to navigate easily through your document.
39874 \begin_layout Subsection
39878 \begin_layout Standard
39879 With this menu entry you are able to define your own bookmarks.
39880 This is useful when you are working on a large document and often have
39881 to jump, for example, between section
39882 \begin_inset space ~
39886 To create bookmarks for this example, go to section
39887 \begin_inset space ~
39890 2.5 and use the submenu
39893 \begin_inset space ~
39897 \begin_inset space ~
39904 \begin_inset space ~
39910 \begin_inset space ~
39914 \begin_inset space ~
39920 Now you can jump easily between these sections by using the menu or by
39924 arg "bookmark-goto 1"
39930 arg "bookmark-goto 2"
39933 .You can also use bookmarks to jump between several opened documents.
39936 \begin_layout Standard
39937 The saved bookmarks are valid till the document is closed.
39941 \begin_inset space ~
39946 allows you to clear bookmarks while the submenu
39949 \begin_inset space ~
39954 jumps to the position in the document where you recently changed something.
39957 \begin_layout Subsection
39958 Next Note, Change, Cross-reference
39961 \begin_layout Standard
39962 Jump to the next note, change, or cross-reference after the current cursor
39966 \begin_layout Subsection
39970 \begin_layout Standard
39971 Only active if the cursor is in front of a cross-reference.
39972 Sets the cursor before the referenced label.
39973 (It is the same as if you right-click on a cross-reference box and use
39977 \begin_inset space ~
39981 \begin_inset space ~
39989 \begin_layout Subsection
39993 \begin_layout Standard
39994 Allows you to jump directly to the corresponding text part in the output,
39997 The \SpecialChar LyX
39998 Server\SpecialChar menuseparator
40000 \begin_inset space ~
40008 \begin_inset space ~
40013 manual for a detailed description.
40016 \begin_layout Section
40018 \begin_inset Index idx
40021 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40030 \begin_layout Subsection
40034 \begin_layout Standard
40035 Change Tracking is described in section
40036 \begin_inset space ~
40040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40042 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
40049 \begin_layout Subsection
40057 \begin_layout Standard
40058 After running \SpecialChar LaTeX
40059 by viewing or exporting a document, this menu will be enabled.
40060 It shows the logfile of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40062 You can go to the next error or the next warning, search, copy something
40063 to the clipboard or update the view.
40064 \begin_inset Newline newline
40067 With the help of the logfile, experts can find reasons for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40071 \begin_layout Standard
40074 Open Containing Directory
40076 one can open \SpecialChar LyX
40077 's temporary folder for the document.
40078 This folder contains all converted and created files to generate the output.
40079 Some of these files might be of interest for experts to solve problems
40080 or for writers who need to supply intermediate files.
40081 For example some journals require to send the
40085 file (a text file with the used Bib\SpecialChar TeX
40089 \begin_layout Subsection
40090 Start Appendix Here
40093 \begin_layout Standard
40094 Sets the start of the appendices of the document at the current cursor position
40095 as described in section
40096 \begin_inset space ~
40100 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40102 reference "sec:Appendices"
40109 \begin_layout Subsection
40111 \begin_inset space ~
40117 \begin_layout Standard
40118 This menu entry generates the output in the format you have specified as
40119 default output format for the document (menu
40121 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40122 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40123 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40125 \begin_inset space ~
40129 \begin_inset space ~
40135 \begin_inset space ~
40139 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40141 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40145 ) or in the \SpecialChar LyX
40148 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40149 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40151 \begin_inset space ~
40154 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40156 \begin_inset space ~
40159 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40161 \begin_inset space ~
40165 \begin_inset space ~
40171 \begin_inset space ~
40175 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40177 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40181 ) and opens it in an appropriate viewer.
40182 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40184 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40185 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40187 \begin_inset space ~
40190 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40192 \begin_inset space ~
40195 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40199 \begin_inset space ~
40203 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40205 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40210 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40211 when it is first configured.
40212 The default output format is
40215 \begin_inset space ~
40223 \begin_layout Subsection
40224 View (Other Formats)
40227 \begin_layout Standard
40228 With this menu you can view your document in alternative output formats.
40229 The menu contains a list of available formats in which you can view the
40230 actual document with an external program.
40231 The menu entries are not the same on all installations — it depends on
40232 the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40233 programs that are found when \SpecialChar LyX
40235 All possible formats are listed in section
40236 \begin_inset space ~
40240 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40242 reference "subsec:Export"
40247 You should at least see the menu entry
40252 If it is missing, you need to update or repair your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40254 After updating you have to reconfigure \SpecialChar LyX
40256 \begin_inset space ~
40260 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40262 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40267 \begin_inset Index idx
40270 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40271 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40280 \begin_layout Standard
40281 Invoking a view menu will start a viewer program.
40282 The viewer can be set or changed in the preferences (menu
40284 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40285 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40287 \begin_inset space ~
40290 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40292 \begin_inset space ~
40295 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40299 \begin_inset space ~
40303 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40305 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40310 The default viewers are set by \SpecialChar LyX
40311 when it is first configured.
40314 \begin_layout Subsection
40316 \begin_inset space ~
40322 \begin_layout Standard
40323 This menu entry allows you to update the view with your latest changes (in
40324 the default output format) without opening a new viewer window.
40327 \begin_layout Subsection
40328 Update (Other Formats)
40331 \begin_layout Standard
40332 With this menu you can update the view of alternative output formats of
40333 your document without opening a new viewer window.
40336 \begin_layout Subsection
40337 View Master Document
40340 \begin_layout Standard
40341 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40343 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40347 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40357 \begin_inset space ~
40362 manual for more information on this topic).
40363 This item allows you to view the master document from within its child.
40364 That is, if you are working on a child document which is a chapter of a
40368 \begin_inset space ~
40372 \begin_inset space ~
40377 generates the output of the whole book, while
40381 will just output the chapter alone.
40384 \begin_layout Standard
40385 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40386 in the document settings (menu
40388 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40389 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40390 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40392 \begin_inset space ~
40396 \begin_inset space ~
40402 \begin_inset space ~
40406 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40408 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40412 ) or in the preferences (menu
40414 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40415 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40417 \begin_inset space ~
40420 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40422 \begin_inset space ~
40425 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40427 \begin_inset space ~
40431 \begin_inset space ~
40437 \begin_inset space ~
40441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40443 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40450 \begin_layout Subsection
40451 Update Master Document
40454 \begin_layout Standard
40455 This menu item is only visible if your document is included to another document,
40457 \begin_inset Quotes eld
40461 \begin_inset Quotes erd
40471 \begin_inset space ~
40476 manual for more information on this topic).
40477 This item allows you to update the view of a master document from within
40478 its child without the need to switch to the master document itself.
40481 \begin_layout Standard
40482 The format used by this function is the default output format as specified
40483 in the document settings (menu
40485 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
40486 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
40487 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
40489 \begin_inset space ~
40493 \begin_inset space ~
40499 \begin_inset space ~
40503 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40505 reference "sec:Doc-Formats"
40509 ) or in the preferences (menu
40511 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
40512 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
40514 \begin_inset space ~
40517 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
40519 \begin_inset space ~
40522 Formats\SpecialChar menuseparator
40524 \begin_inset space ~
40528 \begin_inset space ~
40534 \begin_inset space ~
40538 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40540 reference "sec:File-Formats"
40547 \begin_layout Subsection
40549 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40551 name "subsec:Compressed"
40558 \begin_layout Standard
40559 Un/compresses the current document.
40560 For documents under version control it is strongly recommended to disable
40561 compression (see the
40563 Additional Features
40565 manual for details).
40568 \begin_layout Subsection
40572 \begin_layout Standard
40573 Toggles the read-only state for the document.
40576 \begin_layout Subsection
40580 \begin_layout Standard
40581 The document settings are described in appendix
40582 \begin_inset space ~
40586 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40588 reference "chap:The-Document-Settings"
40595 \begin_layout Section
40597 \begin_inset Index idx
40600 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40609 \begin_layout Subsection
40613 \begin_layout Standard
40614 Spell checking is explained in section
40615 \begin_inset space ~
40619 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40621 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
40628 \begin_layout Subsection
40632 \begin_layout Standard
40633 The thesaurus is described in section
40634 \begin_inset space ~
40638 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40640 reference "sec:Thesaurus"
40647 \begin_layout Subsection
40649 \begin_inset Index idx
40652 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40659 \begin_inset Index idx
40662 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40671 \begin_layout Standard
40672 Returns the number of the words and characters in the actual document or
40673 the highlighted document part.
40676 \begin_layout Subsection
40682 \begin_inset Index idx
40685 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40686 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40695 \begin_layout Standard
40696 Generates with the help of the program
40698 Chk\SpecialChar TeX
40701 a log of possible \SpecialChar LaTeX
40702 -errors and displays it in a dialog.
40703 This feature is not available on Windows.
40706 \begin_layout Subsection
40712 \begin_inset Index idx
40715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40725 \begin_layout Standard
40726 Shows you a list of the document classes and styles installed in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
40731 \begin_inset space ~
40736 to see the full filename paths.
40739 \begin_layout Subsection
40741 \begin_inset Index idx
40744 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40753 \begin_layout Standard
40754 Opens a dialog to compare \SpecialChar LyX
40755 files as described in section
40756 \begin_inset space ~
40760 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40762 reference "sec:Comparison-of-Documents"
40769 \begin_layout Subsection
40771 \begin_inset Index idx
40774 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40787 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40792 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40805 \begin_inset Index idx
40808 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40809 Reconfiguration of \SpecialChar LyX
40818 \begin_layout Standard
40819 Reconfigures \SpecialChar LyX
40820 ; that is, \SpecialChar LyX
40821 looks for \SpecialChar LaTeX
40822 -packages and programs it needs; see
40824 \begin_inset space ~
40828 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40830 reference "sec:Basic-LyX-Setup"
40837 \begin_layout Subsection
40841 \begin_layout Standard
40846 dialog as described in detail in appendix
40847 \begin_inset space ~
40851 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40853 reference "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
40860 \begin_layout Section
40862 \begin_inset Index idx
40865 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40874 \begin_layout Standard
40875 This menu lists the documentation files of \SpecialChar LyX
40876 in the language of \SpecialChar LyX
40878 If a file is not available in this language, the English version will be
40882 \begin_layout Standard
40886 \begin_inset space ~
40891 shows a \SpecialChar LyX
40892 document with information about the \SpecialChar LaTeX
40893 packages and classes found
40894 by \SpecialChar LyX
40896 \begin_inset space ~
40900 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40902 reference "sec:LaTeX-Setup"
40909 \begin_layout Standard
40913 \begin_inset space ~
40918 gives information about the copyright, the credits and the \SpecialChar LyX
40923 \begin_layout Section
40925 \begin_inset CommandInset label
40927 name "sec:Toolbars"
40934 \begin_layout Standard
40935 How to show or hide toolbars is explained in section
40936 \begin_inset space ~
40940 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
40942 reference "subsec:Toolbars"
40949 \begin_layout Standard
40950 It is also possible to define custom toolbars.
40951 This is described in the
40953 Additional Features
40958 \begin_layout Subsection
40960 \begin_inset Index idx
40963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
40972 \begin_layout Standard
40973 \begin_inset Graphics
40974 filename clipart/StandardToolbar.png
40982 \begin_layout Standard
40983 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
40989 \begin_layout Standard
40990 The standard toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
40995 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41007 \begin_inset Note Note
41010 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41011 This is necessary to left align the following longtables.
41016 manual for more information.
41024 \begin_layout Standard
41025 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41031 \begin_layout Standard
41032 \begin_inset Tabular
41033 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="1" columns="2">
41034 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41035 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41036 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
41038 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41041 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41042 \begin_inset Graphics
41043 filename clipart/ToolbarEnvBox.png
41053 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41056 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41057 pull-down box for the environments
41070 \begin_layout Standard
41071 \begin_inset VSpace -10mm
41077 \begin_layout Standard
41079 \begin_inset Tabular
41080 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="22" columns="2">
41081 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41082 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41083 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41084 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41085 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41088 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41101 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41104 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41107 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41114 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41115 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41118 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41131 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41134 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41137 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41144 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41161 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41164 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41167 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
41174 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41175 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41178 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41183 arg "dialog-show spellchecker"
41191 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41194 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41197 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
41204 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41205 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41208 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41213 arg "spelling-continuously"
41221 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41224 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41225 Spellcheck continuously
41231 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41232 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41235 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41248 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41251 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41254 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41261 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41262 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41265 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41278 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41281 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41284 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41291 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41292 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41295 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41308 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41311 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41314 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41321 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41322 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41325 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41338 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41341 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41344 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41351 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41352 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41368 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41374 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41381 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41382 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41385 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41390 arg "dialog-show findreplace"
41398 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41401 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41404 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41406 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41410 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41414 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41423 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41424 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41427 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41430 arg "dialog-toggle findreplaceadv"
41438 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41441 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41444 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41446 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41450 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41454 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
41463 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41464 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41467 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41472 arg "bookmark-goto 0"
41480 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41483 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41486 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
41487 Bookmarks\SpecialChar menuseparator
41494 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41495 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41498 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41511 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41514 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41515 Emphasize text, function of the
41517 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41519 \begin_inset space ~
41522 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41531 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41532 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41535 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41548 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41551 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41552 Set text to noun style, function of the
41554 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41556 \begin_inset space ~
41559 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41568 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41569 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41572 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41577 arg "textstyle-apply"
41585 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41589 Format text using the current settings in the
41591 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41593 \begin_inset space ~
41596 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
41605 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41606 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41609 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41622 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41625 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41628 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41629 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
41631 \begin_inset space ~
41640 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41641 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41644 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41649 arg "dialog-show-new-inset graphics"
41657 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41660 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41663 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41670 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41671 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41674 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41677 arg "tabular-insert"
41685 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41688 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41691 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
41698 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41707 arg "dialog-toggle toc"
41715 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41718 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41719 Toggle outline window on/off,
41721 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
41728 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41737 arg "toolbar-toggle math"
41745 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41748 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41749 Toggle math toolbar on/off
41755 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41756 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41759 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41764 arg "toolbar-toggle table"
41772 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41775 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41776 Toggle table toolbar on/off
41789 \begin_layout Subsection
41791 \begin_inset Index idx
41794 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41803 \begin_layout Standard
41804 \begin_inset Graphics
41805 filename clipart/ExtraToolbar.png
41813 \begin_layout Standard
41814 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41820 \begin_layout Standard
41821 The extra toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
41825 \begin_layout Standard
41826 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
41832 \begin_layout Standard
41833 \begin_inset Tabular
41834 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="25" columns="2">
41835 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
41836 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41837 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
41838 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41839 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41842 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41865 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41866 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41869 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41874 arg "layout Enumerate"
41882 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41885 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41892 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41901 arg "layout Itemize"
41909 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41912 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41919 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41920 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41923 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41936 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41939 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41946 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41947 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41950 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41955 arg "layout Description"
41963 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41966 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41973 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
41974 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41977 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41982 arg "depth-increment"
41990 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
41993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
41996 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
41998 \begin_inset space ~
42002 \begin_inset space ~
42011 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42012 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42015 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42020 arg "depth-decrement"
42028 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42031 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42034 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42036 \begin_inset space ~
42040 \begin_inset space ~
42049 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42050 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42053 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42058 arg "float-insert figure"
42066 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42069 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42072 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42073 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42080 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42081 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42084 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42089 arg "float-insert table"
42097 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42100 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42103 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42104 Float\SpecialChar menuseparator
42111 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42128 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42131 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42134 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42141 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42142 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42145 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42150 arg "dialog-show-new-inset ref"
42158 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42161 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42164 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42171 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42172 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42175 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42180 arg "dialog-show-new-inset citation"
42188 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42191 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42194 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42201 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42202 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42205 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42218 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42224 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42226 \begin_inset space ~
42235 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42236 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42239 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42244 arg "nomencl-insert"
42252 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42255 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42258 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42260 \begin_inset space ~
42269 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42270 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42273 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42278 arg "footnote-insert"
42286 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42289 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42292 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42299 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42300 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42303 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42308 arg "marginalnote-insert"
42316 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42319 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42322 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42324 \begin_inset space ~
42333 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42334 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42337 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42350 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42353 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42356 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42357 Note\SpecialChar menuseparator
42359 \begin_inset space ~
42368 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42369 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42372 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42377 arg "box-insert Frameless"
42385 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42388 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42391 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42398 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42399 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42402 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42415 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42421 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42428 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42429 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42432 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42445 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42448 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42451 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42453 \begin_inset space ~
42462 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42463 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42466 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42471 arg "math-macro newmacroname newcommand"
42479 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42482 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42485 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42486 Math\SpecialChar menuseparator
42493 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42494 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42497 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42502 arg "dialog-show-new-inset include"
42510 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42513 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42516 Insert\SpecialChar menuseparator
42517 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
42519 \begin_inset space ~
42528 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42529 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42532 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42537 arg "dialog-show character"
42545 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42548 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42551 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42553 \begin_inset space ~
42556 Style\SpecialChar menuseparator
42563 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42564 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42567 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42572 arg "layout-paragraph"
42580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42586 Edit\SpecialChar menuseparator
42588 \begin_inset space ~
42597 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42598 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42601 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42606 arg "thesaurus-entry"
42614 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42617 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42620 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
42634 \begin_layout Subsection
42635 View/Update Toolbar
42636 \begin_inset Index idx
42639 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42640 Toolbar ! View / Update
42648 \begin_layout Standard
42649 \begin_inset Graphics
42650 filename clipart/ViewToolbar.png
42657 \begin_layout Standard
42658 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42664 \begin_layout Standard
42665 The view/update toolbar as shown above contains from left to right the following
42669 \begin_layout Standard
42670 \begin_inset VSpace defskip
42676 \begin_layout Standard
42677 \begin_inset Tabular
42678 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="7" columns="2">
42679 <features islongtable="true" longtabularalignment="center">
42680 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42681 <column alignment="left" valignment="top">
42682 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42683 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42686 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42699 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42702 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42705 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42712 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42713 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42716 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42721 arg "buffer-update"
42729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42735 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42742 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42743 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42746 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42751 arg "master-buffer-view"
42759 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42762 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42765 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42767 \begin_inset space ~
42776 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42785 arg "master-buffer-update"
42793 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42796 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42799 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42801 \begin_inset space ~
42805 \begin_inset space ~
42814 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42815 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42823 arg "buffer-toggle-output-sync"
42831 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42834 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42837 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42838 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
42839 Output\SpecialChar menuseparator
42840 Synchronize with Output
42846 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42847 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42850 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42863 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42866 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42869 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42870 View (Other Formats)
42876 <row interlinespace="2.5mm">
42877 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42880 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42883 arg "update-others"
42891 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" usebox="none">
42894 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42897 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
42898 Update (Other Formats)
42911 \begin_layout Standard
42912 * These icons might look different for you if you do not use the default
42916 \begin_layout Subsection
42920 \begin_layout Standard
42921 The change tracking toolbar is explained in section
42922 \begin_inset space ~
42926 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
42928 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
42932 , the table toolbar
42933 \begin_inset Index idx
42936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42945 \begin_inset space ~
42950 manual and the math macro toolbar
42951 \begin_inset Index idx
42954 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42967 \begin_layout Chapter
42968 The Document Settings
42969 \begin_inset CommandInset label
42971 name "chap:The-Document-Settings"
42976 \begin_inset Index idx
42979 \begin_layout Plain Layout
42980 Document ! Settings
42988 \begin_layout Standard
42992 \begin_inset space ~
42997 s dialog contains submenus to set properties for the whole document and
42998 is called with the menu
43000 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
43004 You can save your document settings as default with the
43006 Save as Document Defaults
43008 button in any dialog.
43009 This will create a template named
43013 which is automatically loaded by \SpecialChar LyX
43014 when you create a new document without
43018 \begin_layout Standard
43023 resets the document settings to the default of the document class.
43024 This affects mostly class options, the page layout and Numbering & TOC.
43027 \begin_layout Standard
43028 The different submenus of the dialog are explained in the following sections.
43029 There are so many document settings available that it might take a while
43030 to find the one you are looking for.
43031 To find a setting quicker, you can use the search field which is above
43032 the submenus of the dialog.
43034 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
43038 \begin_inset space \space{}
43042 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43046 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43049 , you will see that some submenus will be grayed-out and disabled.
43050 Only the submenus with page settings stay enabled.
43051 The found page settings are labeled red in these submenus.
43054 \begin_layout Section
43058 \begin_layout Standard
43059 Here you set the document class, class options, a graphics driver, and a
43061 Document classes are described in section
43062 \begin_inset space ~
43066 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43068 reference "sec:Document-Classes"
43076 \begin_layout Standard
43080 \begin_inset space ~
43085 you can load you own layout-file, that is not in \SpecialChar LyX
43090 folder and thus not recognized by \SpecialChar LyX
43091 as a layout for a document class.
43092 For more about layout-files, see the chapter
43094 Installing New Document Classes, Types of Layout Files
43103 \begin_layout Standard
43104 Some classes use special class options by default.
43105 If this is the case, they are listed in the field
43109 and you can decide to use them or not.
43110 If you do not know exactly what the default class options are for, it is
43111 recommended you leave them untouched.
43116 is used for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43117 's graphics, color and page layout packages.
43122 , the default driver for the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43124 It is recommended that you use the default unless you know what you are
43129 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43130 When you want to use one of the following drivers
43131 \begin_inset Newline newline
43136 dvi2ps, dvialw, dvilaser, dvitops, psprint, pubps, ln
43139 \begin_inset Newline newline
43142 you first have to activate them in your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43143 distribution, see section
43148 \begin_inset CommandInset href
43150 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/required/graphics/grfguide.pdf"
43162 \begin_layout Standard
43167 document is necessary if the current document is a child or subdocument.
43168 The master document will be used by \SpecialChar LyX
43169 in the background if the child document
43170 is opened without its master.
43171 This way child documents are always compilable.
43172 More about master and child documents is explained in the section
43179 \begin_inset space ~
43187 \begin_layout Standard
43188 There is also an option to suppress the date and one to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43199 \begin_inset Index idx
43202 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43204 -packages ! prettyref
43210 \begin_inset Index idx
43213 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43215 -packages ! refstyle
43220 for cross-references, see section
43221 \begin_inset space ~
43225 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43227 reference "sec:Cross-References"
43234 \begin_layout Section
43238 \begin_layout Standard
43239 This submenu is only visible when your document includes child documents.
43240 Please refer to the section
43243 \begin_inset space ~
43251 \begin_inset space ~
43256 manual for details.
43259 \begin_layout Section
43263 \begin_layout Standard
43264 Modules are explained in section
43265 \begin_inset space ~
43269 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43271 reference "subsec:Modules"
43278 \begin_layout Section
43282 \begin_layout Standard
43284 \begin_inset space ~
43288 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43290 reference "subsec:Local-Layout"
43297 \begin_layout Section
43301 \begin_layout Standard
43302 The document font settings are described in section
43303 \begin_inset space ~
43307 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43309 reference "sec:Fonts-and-Text"
43316 \begin_layout Section
43320 \begin_layout Standard
43321 You can specify if paragraphs should be separated by
43333 \begin_inset space ~
43338 and whether it should be a
43341 \begin_inset space ~
43346 can also be specified here.
43349 \begin_layout Standard
43350 Note that \SpecialChar LyX
43351 will not show two columns or the specified line spacing on screen.
43352 That would be impractical, often unreadable, and is not part of the WYSIWYM
43354 However, it will be as you specified in the output.
43357 \begin_layout Standard
43360 Use justification in \SpecialChar LyX
43363 you can decide if \SpecialChar LyX
43364 justifies the text on screen.
43365 This only affects the text inside \SpecialChar LyX
43369 \begin_layout Section
43373 \begin_layout Standard
43374 This dialog is described in sections
43375 \begin_inset space ~
43379 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43381 reference "subsec:Paper-Size,-Orientation"
43386 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43388 reference "subsec:Document-Layout"
43395 \begin_layout Section
43399 \begin_layout Standard
43400 Here you can adjust the page margins as described in section
43401 \begin_inset space ~
43405 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43407 reference "subsec:Margins"
43414 \begin_layout Section
43416 \begin_inset CommandInset label
43418 name "sec:Language-encodings"
43423 \begin_inset Index idx
43426 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43427 Language ! Encoding
43435 \begin_layout Standard
43436 The document language and quote styles are set here.
43437 The encoding specifies how the document content is exported to \SpecialChar LaTeX
43438 (the \SpecialChar LyX
43440 is always encoded in utf8).
43441 All characters that cannot be encoded using the specified encoding will
43442 be exported as \SpecialChar LaTeX
43443 -commands (this can fail if a \SpecialChar LaTeX
43444 -command is not known for
43445 a particular character).
43448 \begin_layout Standard
43449 If you use the option
43454 determines the encoding of a text part from the language of this text.
43455 If the document contains text in more than one language you may get more
43456 than one encoding in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43458 If you do not use this option then the complete document will always use
43459 exactly one encoding.
43460 Checking this option is the preferred setting.
43463 \begin_layout Standard
43465 also supports Unicode output, which is particularly useful if you need
43466 lots of special symbols or non-alphabetic scripts, respectively.
43467 If you want to use this (and your \SpecialChar LaTeX
43468 installation supports Unicode), choose
43469 one of the four utf8 variants from the list below.
43470 Unfortunately the Unicode support of standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43471 is quite incomplete, so
43472 it is not uncommon that a file with lots of Unicode symbols works fine
43477 (when \SpecialChar LyX
43478 uses its list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43479 -commands), but does not work with a fixed
43480 utf8 encoding (when the list of known \SpecialChar LaTeX
43481 -commands is not used, because all
43482 Unicode symbols can be encoded in utf8).
43483 The situation is much better with Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43484 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43485 , two new alternative engines
43486 to standard \SpecialChar LaTeX
43488 Both engines support Unicode natively.
43490 now also supports these two engines (via the output formats
43493 \begin_inset space ~
43501 \begin_inset space ~
43509 \begin_inset space ~
43515 \begin_inset space ~
43519 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43521 reference "subsec:Output-file-formats"
43526 So if you are using many special or accented characters and
43530 fails, you might try out one of these new engines.
43533 \begin_layout Standard
43537 \begin_inset space ~
43542 determines the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43543 -package that is used for hyphenation and the translation
43545 \begin_inset Quotes eld
43549 \begin_inset Quotes erd
43553 The possible settings are:
43556 \begin_layout Description
43557 Default uses the language package that is selected in
43559 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
43560 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
43564 \begin_inset space ~
43568 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
43570 reference "subsec:Prefs-Language"
43577 \begin_layout Description
43578 Automatic selects the most suitable language package for the view/export
43579 format you will use.
43580 In many cases this will be
43585 \begin_inset Index idx
43588 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43596 If the newer package
43601 \begin_inset Index idx
43604 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43606 -packages ! polyglossia
43611 is more appropriate (is the case when using Xe\SpecialChar TeX
43612 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
43613 and non-\SpecialChar TeX
43615 this package will be used instead of
43622 \begin_layout Description
43624 \begin_inset space ~
43635 would be more appropriate.
43638 \begin_layout Description
43639 Custom allows you to specify a language package command of your choice.
43640 For example if you want to use a language-specific package like
43644 (for German texts), type in
43647 \begin_inset Newline newline
43652 usepackage{ngerman}
43655 \begin_layout Description
43656 None will not use a language package.
43657 This is necessary for some document classes for scientific articles.
43660 \begin_layout Standard
43661 Here is a list with the important encodings:
43664 \begin_layout Description
43666 \begin_inset space ~
43670 \begin_inset space ~
43674 \begin_inset space ~
43681 , but the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43687 \begin_inset Index idx
43690 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43692 -packages ! inputenc
43698 When using this, you probably need to load some additional packages manually
43699 in the preamble and specify the used encoding for text parts in foreign
43700 languages in \SpecialChar TeX
43704 \begin_layout Description
43705 ASCII the ASCII encoding, covers only plain English (7-bit ASCII).
43707 converts all other characters into \SpecialChar LaTeX
43708 commands, which may result in a big
43709 file when lots of \SpecialChar LaTeX
43710 -commands are needed.
43713 \begin_layout Description
43715 \begin_inset space ~
43719 \begin_inset space ~
43722 1256) MS Windows code page for Arabic and Farsi
43725 \begin_layout Description
43727 \begin_inset space ~
43731 \begin_inset space ~
43734 8859-6) for Arabic and Farsi
43737 \begin_layout Description
43739 \begin_inset space ~
43742 (ArmSCII8) for Armenian
43745 \begin_layout Description
43747 \begin_inset space ~
43751 \begin_inset space ~
43754 1257) MS Windows code page for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, the same
43755 as the ISO-8859-13 encoding
43758 \begin_layout Description
43760 \begin_inset space ~
43764 \begin_inset space ~
43767 8859-13) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a superset of the ISO-8859-4
43771 \begin_layout Description
43773 \begin_inset space ~
43777 \begin_inset space ~
43780 8859-4) (latin 4) for Estonian, Latvian and Lithuanian, a subset of the
43781 ISO-8859-13 encoding
43784 \begin_layout Description
43786 \begin_inset space ~
43790 \begin_inset space ~
43794 \begin_inset space ~
43797 1250) MS Windows code page for ISO
43798 \begin_inset space ~
43804 \begin_layout Description
43806 \begin_inset space ~
43810 \begin_inset space ~
43814 \begin_inset space ~
43817 8859-2) (latin 2) covers Albanian, Croatian, Czech, German, Hungarian, Polish,
43818 Romanian, Slovak and Slovenian
43821 \begin_layout Description
43823 \begin_inset space ~
43827 \begin_inset space ~
43830 (EUC-CN) for simplified Chinese, used especially on UNIX OSes, since 2001
43831 this encoding is officially replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030
43832 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43833 you should try to use the encoding Unicode
43834 \begin_inset space ~
43838 \begin_inset space ~
43844 \begin_layout Description
43846 \begin_inset space ~
43850 \begin_inset space ~
43853 (GBK) for simplified Chinese, is the same as the Windows code page CP 936
43854 except for the Euro currency sign, since 2001 this encoding is officially
43855 replaced by the encoding GB18030, as GB18030 is not available for \SpecialChar LaTeX
43857 should try to use the encoding Unicode
43858 \begin_inset space ~
43862 \begin_inset space ~
43868 \begin_layout Description
43870 \begin_inset space ~
43874 \begin_inset space ~
43877 (EUC-TW) for traditional Chinese
43880 \begin_layout Description
43882 \begin_inset space ~
43886 \begin_inset space ~
43889 1251) MS Windows code page for Cyrillic
43892 \begin_layout Description
43894 \begin_inset space ~
43898 \begin_inset space ~
43901 8859-5) covers Belorussian, Bulgarian, Macedonian, Serbian and Ukrainian
43904 \begin_layout Description
43906 \begin_inset space ~
43909 (KOI8-R) standard Cyrillic especially for Russian
43912 \begin_layout Description
43914 \begin_inset space ~
43917 (KOI8-U) Cyrillic for Ukrainian
43920 \begin_layout Description
43922 \begin_inset space ~
43926 \begin_inset space ~
43929 154) Cyrillic for Kazakh
43932 \begin_layout Description
43934 \begin_inset space ~
43938 \begin_inset space ~
43944 \begin_layout Description
43946 \begin_inset space ~
43950 \begin_inset space ~
43953 1255) MS Windows code page for Hebrew, a superset of the ISO-8859-8 encoding
43956 \begin_layout Description
43958 \begin_inset space ~
43962 \begin_inset space ~
43968 \begin_layout Description
43970 \begin_inset space ~
43974 \begin_inset space ~
43977 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
43983 \begin_inset Index idx
43986 \begin_layout Plain Layout
43993 , when using this, set the document language to
43998 \begin_layout Description
44000 \begin_inset space ~
44004 \begin_inset space ~
44007 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44012 , when using this, set the document language to
44015 \begin_inset space ~
44021 \begin_layout Description
44023 \begin_inset space ~
44027 \begin_inset space ~
44030 (EUC-JP) EUC-JP encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44036 \begin_inset Index idx
44039 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44041 -packages ! japanese
44046 , when using this, set the document language to
44051 \begin_layout Description
44053 \begin_inset space ~
44057 \begin_inset space ~
44060 (JIS) JIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44065 , when using this, set the document language to
44070 \begin_layout Description
44072 \begin_inset space ~
44076 \begin_inset space ~
44079 (SJIS) SJIS encoding for Japanese, uses the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44084 , when using this, set the document language to
44089 \begin_layout Description
44091 \begin_inset space ~
44094 (EUC-KR) for Korean
44097 \begin_layout Description
44099 \begin_inset space ~
44103 \begin_inset space ~
44107 \begin_inset space ~
44110 8859-3) (latin 3) covers Esperanto, Galician, Maltese and Turkish
44113 \begin_layout Description
44115 \begin_inset space ~
44119 \begin_inset space ~
44123 \begin_inset space ~
44126 8859-16) (latin 10) covers Albanian, Croatian, Finnish, French, German,
44127 Hungarian, Irish Gaelic, Italian, Polish, Romanian and Slovenian, is designed
44128 to cover many languages and characters with diacritics
44131 \begin_layout Description
44133 \begin_inset space ~
44137 \begin_inset space ~
44143 \begin_layout Description
44145 \begin_inset space ~
44149 \begin_inset space ~
44152 8859-9) (latin 5) for Turkish, is like the ISO-8859-1 encoding where the
44153 Icelandic letters are replaced by Turkish ones
44156 \begin_layout Description
44158 \begin_inset space ~
44162 \begin_inset space ~
44165 (utf8) Unicode utf8 with the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44171 \begin_inset Index idx
44174 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44181 (for the languages Chinese, Japanese and Korean)
44184 \begin_layout Description
44186 \begin_inset space ~
44194 \begin_inset space ~
44197 (utf8) Unicode utf8 to be used with
44204 Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44207 , which use Unicode directly, without the help of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44214 automatically selects this encoding if you export or preview Xe\SpecialChar TeX
44215 or Lua\SpecialChar TeX
44217 Normally you do not need to set this encoding manually.
44220 \begin_layout Description
44222 \begin_inset space ~
44226 \begin_inset space ~
44229 (utf8x) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44235 \begin_inset Index idx
44238 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44245 (comprehensive, including Latin, Greek, Cyrillic and CJK scripts).
44248 \begin_layout Description
44250 \begin_inset space ~
44253 (utf8) Unicode utf8 based on the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44259 \begin_inset Index idx
44262 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44264 -packages ! inputenc
44270 Currently only a limited range of characters (mainly for Latin scripts)
44274 \begin_layout Description
44276 \begin_inset space ~
44280 \begin_inset space ~
44284 \begin_inset space ~
44287 1252) MS Windows code page for ISO
44288 \begin_inset space ~
44294 \begin_layout Description
44296 \begin_inset space ~
44300 \begin_inset space ~
44304 \begin_inset space ~
44307 8859-1) (latin 1) covers the languages Albanian, Catalan, Danish, Dutch,
44308 English, Faroese, Finnish, French, Galician, German, Icelandic, Irish,
44309 Italian, Norwegian, Portuguese, Spanish and Swedish; better use the ISO-8859-15
44313 \begin_layout Description
44315 \begin_inset space ~
44319 \begin_inset space ~
44323 \begin_inset space ~
44326 8859-15) (latin 9) like the ISO-8859-1 encoding, but with the Euro currency
44327 sign, the œ-ligature and some characters used for French and Finnish
44330 \begin_layout Section
44332 \begin_inset Index idx
44335 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44342 \begin_inset Index idx
44345 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44352 \begin_inset Index idx
44355 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44356 Color ! Shaded boxes
44362 \begin_inset Index idx
44365 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44366 Color ! Greyed-out notes
44374 \begin_layout Standard
44375 Here you can alter the font color for the
44379 (default: black), for
44382 \begin_inset space ~
44387 (default: light grey)for the background color for the
44391 (default: white) and for
44394 \begin_inset space ~
44404 sets the color back to the default.
44407 \begin_layout Standard
44408 Clicking any button showing
44416 opens a dialog enabling you to choose from a selection of colors or from
44417 a color-picker or to specify a color using HSL or RGB values.
44418 In the dialog you can add any color to the custom colors to select them
44419 later more quickly.
44422 \begin_layout Standard
44423 Note, if you change the
44426 \begin_inset space ~
44431 font color and use the option
44434 \begin_inset space ~
44439 in the document settings under
44442 \begin_inset space ~
44447 , you probably also need to change the link font color as described in section
44448 \begin_inset space ~
44452 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44454 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44461 \begin_layout Standard
44462 \begin_inset VSpace bigskip
44468 \begin_layout Standard
44472 \begin_inset space ~
44481 background for every page in your document if you use these commands as
44484 \begin_inset space ~
44487 Code after a forced page break:
44490 \begin_layout Itemize
44491 For the page color:
44492 \begin_inset Newline newline
44499 pagecolor{color name}
44502 \begin_layout Itemize
44503 For the text color:
44504 \begin_inset Newline newline
44514 \begin_layout Standard
44515 You are restricted to one of
44551 unless you have defined your own color (see the section
44558 \begin_inset space ~
44564 \begin_inset Newline newline
44567 If you have changed a text or background color, you can use the following
44568 names to refer to them:
44571 \begin_layout Itemize
44577 \begin_inset Newline newline
44582 page_backgroundcolor
44585 \begin_layout Itemize
44589 \begin_inset space ~
44595 \begin_inset Newline newline
44603 \begin_layout Itemize
44607 \begin_inset space ~
44613 \begin_inset Newline newline
44621 \begin_layout Itemize
44625 \begin_inset space ~
44631 \begin_inset Newline newline
44639 \begin_layout Standard
44640 To see how to define and use custom colors, see section
44643 \begin_inset space ~
44651 \begin_inset space ~
44659 \begin_layout Section
44663 \begin_layout Standard
44664 Here you can adjust the
44668 depth of section headings and the section depth in the
44672 as described in section
44673 \begin_inset space ~
44677 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44679 reference "subsec:Numbering-depth"
44686 \begin_layout Section
44690 \begin_layout Standard
44691 Here you can specify if a
44692 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887883
44695 citation style using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44697 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887840
44703 \begin_inset Index idx
44706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44708 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887846
44710 -packages ! biblatex
44722 \begin_inset Index idx
44725 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44737 \begin_inset Index idx
44740 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44742 -packages ! jurabib
44749 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887869
44750 If you use Bib\SpecialChar TeX
44752 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887870
44757 Sectioned bibliography
44759 using the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44765 \begin_inset Index idx
44768 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44770 -packages ! bibtopic
44776 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887945
44778 If you use Biblatex, you can select the style files and specify further
44783 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887949
44785 \change_deleted -712698321 1483887950
44789 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887962
44796 for the generation of the bibliography.
44797 For a further description
44798 \change_inserted -712698321 1483887970
44802 \begin_inset space ~
44806 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44808 reference "sec:Bibliography"
44815 \begin_layout Section
44819 \begin_layout Standard
44820 Here you can define the
44824 that will generate your index and you can define additional indexes (see
44826 \begin_inset space ~
44830 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44832 reference "sec:Index"
44839 \begin_layout Section
44843 \begin_layout Standard
44844 The PDF properties are explained in section
44845 \begin_inset space ~
44849 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
44851 reference "sec:PDF-Properties"
44858 \begin_layout Section
44862 \begin_layout Standard
44863 These options will force \SpecialChar LyX
44864 to use the \SpecialChar LaTeX
44870 \begin_inset Index idx
44873 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44875 -packages ! amsmath
44885 \begin_inset Index idx
44888 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44890 -packages ! amssymb
44900 \begin_inset Index idx
44903 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44915 \begin_inset Index idx
44918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44930 \begin_inset Index idx
44933 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44935 -packages ! mathdots
44945 \begin_inset Index idx
44948 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44950 -packages ! mathtools
44960 \begin_inset Index idx
44963 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44975 \begin_inset Index idx
44978 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44980 -packages ! stackrel
44990 \begin_inset Index idx
44993 \begin_layout Plain Layout
44995 -packages ! stmaryrd
45005 \begin_inset Index idx
45008 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45010 -packages ! undertilde
45015 , or to use them automatically when they are needed.
45018 \begin_layout Description
45019 amsmath is needed for many constructs, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45020 -errors in formulas,
45021 ensure that you have this enabled.
45024 \begin_layout Description
45025 amssymb is needed for some special math symbols like bold or upright Greek
45026 letters, so when you get \SpecialChar LaTeX
45027 -errors in formulas, ensure that you have this
45031 \begin_layout Description
45032 cancel is used for canceled formulas, see section
45035 \begin_inset space ~
45047 \begin_layout Description
45048 esint is used for special integral characters, see section
45051 \begin_inset space ~
45063 \begin_layout Description
45064 mathdots is used for special ellipses, see section
45075 \begin_layout Description
45076 mathtools is used for the math commands
45112 and labeled arrows, see the corresponding sections in the
45119 \begin_layout Description
45120 mhchem is used for chemical equations, see section
45122 Chemical Symbols and Equations
45131 \begin_layout Description
45132 stackrel is used for the math command
45149 \begin_layout Description
45150 stmaryrd is used for a few special math symbols.
45153 \begin_layout Description
45154 undertilde is used for the math command
45162 Accents for one Character
45171 \begin_layout Section
45175 \begin_layout Standard
45176 The float placement options are described in the section
45179 \begin_inset space ~
45187 \begin_inset space ~
45195 \begin_layout Section
45199 \begin_layout Standard
45200 The listings settings are explained in the chapter
45202 Program Code Listings
45207 \begin_inset space ~
45215 \begin_layout Section
45219 \begin_layout Standard
45220 Here you can adjust the characters used for the itemize
45228 set to be used and set the
45233 The itemize environment is described in section
45234 \begin_inset space ~
45238 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45240 reference "sec:Itemize"
45247 \begin_layout Standard
45248 You can furthermore specify a
45251 \begin_inset space ~
45256 by inserting in this field the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45257 command of the desired character.
45258 For example to use the € sign, you have to insert the command
45265 For math symbols you additionally need to enclose the command with $ signs.
45267 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
45271 \begin_inset space \space{}
45275 \begin_inset Formula $\circlearrowright$
45285 To find the command for a math symbol, create a formula and hover the mouse
45286 over the desired symbol in the math toolbar.
45289 \begin_layout Standard
45290 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
45293 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45298 Some characters require to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45299 -packages in the preamble (menu
45302 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
45303 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
45306 \begin_inset space ~
45312 For example for the € sign one needs to add the line
45316 usepackage{textcomp}
45319 For most math symbols it is sufficient to add the line
45323 usepackage{amssymb}
45333 \begin_layout Section
45337 \begin_layout Standard
45338 Branches are described in section
45339 \begin_inset space ~
45343 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45345 reference "sec:Branches"
45352 \begin_layout Section
45354 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45356 name "sec:Doc-Formats"
45363 \begin_layout Standard
45364 Here you can define some output specifics for the current document:
45367 \begin_layout Description
45369 \begin_inset space ~
45373 \begin_inset space ~
45376 Format: The format that is used when you enter
45377 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45381 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45385 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45389 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45393 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45396 View Master Document
45397 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45401 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45404 Update Master Document
45405 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45412 menu or the toolbar.
45413 The default is set in
45415 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45416 Preferences\SpecialChar menuseparator
45418 \begin_inset space ~
45421 Handling\SpecialChar menuseparator
45425 \begin_inset space ~
45429 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45431 reference "sec:File-Formats"
45438 \begin_layout Description
45440 \begin_inset space ~
45444 \begin_inset space ~
45447 Output settings for the menu
45449 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45451 \begin_inset space ~
45457 For a detailed description see section
45459 Reverse DVI/PDF search
45464 \begin_inset space ~
45472 \begin_layout Description
45474 \begin_inset space ~
45478 \begin_inset space ~
45481 Options offers settings for the export format
45489 \begin_inset space ~
45494 will assure that the output follows exactly version
45495 \begin_inset space ~
45498 1.1 of the XHTML standard.
45502 \begin_inset space ~
45507 settings are described in detail in section
45509 Math Output in XHTML
45514 \begin_inset space ~
45523 \begin_inset space ~
45527 \begin_inset space ~
45532 is used for the size of equations in the output.
45535 \begin_layout Description
45537 \begin_inset space ~
45542 Save transient properties
45544 controls whether document settings that are frequently switched or that
45545 are specific to the user are saved with the document.
45546 The properties that are affected by option are currently:
45550 \begin_layout Itemize
45551 the activation of change tracking
45554 \begin_layout Itemize
45555 the output of tracked changes
45558 \begin_layout Itemize
45559 the recording of the document directory path.
45562 \begin_layout Standard
45563 Disabling the option can prevent issues in collaborative work and/or when
45564 using a version control system (for instance unnecessary merge conflicts).
45568 \begin_layout Section
45576 \begin_layout Standard
45577 In this text field you can enter commands to load special \SpecialChar LaTeX
45579 define \SpecialChar LaTeX
45581 The preamble is a thing for \SpecialChar LaTeX
45583 You should not enter commands here until you know exactly what you are
45587 \begin_layout Standard
45588 An introduction to the \SpecialChar LaTeX
45589 -syntax is given in section
45590 \begin_inset space ~
45594 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
45596 reference "subsec:LaTeX-Syntax"
45603 \begin_layout Chapter
45609 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45611 name "chap:The-Preferences-dialog"
45616 \begin_inset Index idx
45619 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45628 \begin_layout Standard
45629 The preferences dialog is called with the menu
45631 Tools\SpecialChar menuseparator
45635 It has the following submenus.
45638 \begin_layout Section
45642 \begin_layout Subsection
45646 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45647 User Interface File
45648 \begin_inset Index idx
45651 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45652 Customization ! of toolbars
45658 \begin_inset Index idx
45661 \begin_layout Plain Layout
45662 Customization ! of menus
45670 \begin_layout Standard
45671 The appearance of the menus and toolbars can be changed by choosing a user
45672 interface (ui) file.
45673 A ui-file is a text file where the toolbars and menus are listed.
45681 \begin_layout Description
45686 specifies the menu entries for the standard menus
45689 \begin_layout Description
45696 the menu entries in popup context menus
45699 \begin_layout Description
45704 specifies the toolbar buttons
45707 \begin_layout Standard
45708 To create your own menu and toolbar layout, start with a copy of these files
45709 and edit the entries.
45712 \begin_layout Standard
45713 The syntax of the .inc-files is straightforward: the
45725 entries must be finished with an explicit
45750 and in the case of the
45751 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45755 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45763 The syntax for the entries is:
45766 \begin_layout Standard
45767 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45773 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45781 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45785 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45790 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45796 \begin_layout Standard
45798 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45801 All the \SpecialChar LyX
45802 -functions are listed in the menu
45804 Help\SpecialChar menuseparator
45806 \begin_inset space ~
45814 \begin_layout Standard
45815 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
45821 \begin_layout Standard
45822 For example, assuming you use the menu
45824 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
45827 quite often and therefore want six available bookmarks, you can add the
45831 \begin_layout Standard
45832 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45838 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45842 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45846 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45850 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45856 \begin_layout Standard
45858 \begin_inset VSpace smallskip*
45862 \begin_inset Quotes eld
45866 \begin_inset Quotes erd
45873 to have the sixth bookmark.
45876 \begin_layout Standard
45880 \begin_inset space ~
45885 allows you to change the appearance of \SpecialChar LyX
45886 's toolbar buttons.
45887 The currently available icon sets are compared in
45888 \begin_inset CommandInset href
45891 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/uploads/LyX/NewInLyX20/themes.png"
45898 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45902 \begin_layout Standard
45905 Enable tool tips in main work area
45907 enables tool tips showing the content of closed insets like index entries
45911 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45915 \begin_layout Standard
45920 is the number of last opened files that \SpecialChar LyX
45921 should display in the menu
45923 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
45925 \begin_inset space ~
45933 \begin_layout Subsection
45937 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45941 \begin_layout Standard
45944 Restore window layouts and geometries
45947 's main window will be opened with the size and layout that was used in
45948 the last \SpecialChar LyX
45952 \begin_layout Standard
45955 Restore cursor positions
45957 sets the cursor to the position in the file where it was at the end of
45961 \begin_layout Standard
45964 Load opened files from last session
45966 opens all files that were opened in the last \SpecialChar LyX
45970 \begin_layout Standard
45973 Clear all session information
45975 deletes all information from previous \SpecialChar LyX
45976 sessions (cursor positions, names
45977 of last opened documents, etc.).
45980 \begin_layout Subsubsection
45982 \begin_inset CommandInset label
45984 name "subsec:Backup documents"
45989 \begin_inset Index idx
45992 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46001 \begin_layout Standard
46004 Backup original documents when saving
46006 creates a backup copy of the file in the state when it was opened or when
46007 it was saved the last time.
46008 It is stored in the
46011 \begin_inset space ~
46017 \begin_inset space ~
46021 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46023 reference "sec:Paths"
46027 ) or in the same folder as your document if no
46030 \begin_inset space ~
46036 The backup file has the file extension
46037 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46045 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46051 \begin_layout Standard
46054 Backup documents, every
46056 , you can specify the time between backup saves.
46059 \begin_layout Standard
46062 Save documents compressed by default
46064 always saves files in a compressed format (see also section
46065 \begin_inset space ~
46069 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46071 reference "subsec:Compressed"
46076 This applies to newly created documents only.
46077 The compression status of existing documents is not changed when saving.
46080 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46081 Windows & work area
46084 \begin_layout Standard
46087 Open documents in tabs
46089 is not checked, every file will be opened in its own new instance of \SpecialChar LyX
46093 \begin_layout Standard
46098 is only active if a \SpecialChar LyX
46103 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46105 \begin_inset space ~
46109 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46111 reference "sec:Paths"
46115 for information about \SpecialChar LyX
46122 If it is checked, \SpecialChar LyX
46123 documents will be opened in the same running instance
46124 of \SpecialChar LyX
46126 Otherwise a new \SpecialChar LyX
46127 instance is created for each file.
46130 \begin_layout Standard
46133 Single close-tab button
46135 is checked, there will only be one close button (
46145 ) at the right side of the tab bar to close tabs.
46146 Otherwise every document tab has its own close button.
46148 \change_inserted 274215730 1469338548
46149 Regardless of this option, one may always close a tab by middle-clicking
46155 \begin_layout Standard
46156 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46159 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46164 For this option you have to restart \SpecialChar LyX
46165 before the change takes effect.
46173 \begin_layout Standard
46178 you one can decide if a document is closed or hidden when its tab or view
46180 Hidden documents are accessible via the menu
46182 View\SpecialChar menuseparator
46186 Not to close documents can be useful if you open files parallel in several
46187 instances of \SpecialChar LyX
46188 and only want to close the view in once instance.
46191 \begin_layout Subsection
46193 \begin_inset Index idx
46196 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46203 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46205 name "subsec:Screen-Fonts"
46212 \begin_layout Standard
46213 These fonts are used to display your documents within \SpecialChar LyX
46217 \begin_layout Standard
46218 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46221 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46226 This section only deals with the fonts
46230 the \SpecialChar LyX
46232 The fonts that appear in the output are independent of these fonts, and
46235 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
46236 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
46247 \begin_layout Standard
46248 By default, \SpecialChar LyX
46265 (depends on the system) as its
46268 \begin_inset space ~
46284 \begin_layout Standard
46285 You can change the font size with the
46292 \begin_layout Standard
46297 are calculated as letter height in units of points.
46299 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46302 points have the size of 1
46303 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46307 \begin_inset space ~
46311 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46313 reference "chap:Units-available-in"
46318 The default font sizes are the same as if a document font size of 10
46319 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46323 The sizes are explained in detail in section
46324 \begin_inset space ~
46328 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46330 reference "subsec:Document-Font"
46337 \begin_layout Standard
46340 Use pixmap cache to speed up font rendering
46342 enabled, \SpecialChar LyX
46343 needs to redraw the screen less often.
46344 This results in better performance, especially on slow systems.
46345 On the other hand, the characters might look more fuzzy on screen.
46346 So whether you enable this or not depends on whether you prefer speed over
46348 Note that the Pixmap Cache is only available and useful under Mac
46349 \begin_inset space ~
46355 \begin_layout Subsection
46357 \begin_inset Index idx
46360 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46361 Color ! \SpecialChar LyX
46368 \begin_inset Index idx
46371 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46380 \begin_layout Standard
46381 Here you can change the screen colors used by \SpecialChar LyX
46382 by choosing an item in the
46383 list and selecting the
46390 \begin_layout Standard
46391 By checking the option
46395 the color scheme of your OS or window manager is used.
46398 cursor, selection, table line, text, URL
46399 \begin_inset space ~
46403 \begin_inset space ~
46408 are then not customizable and thus not listed.
46411 \begin_layout Subsection
46413 \begin_inset Index idx
46416 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46425 \begin_layout Standard
46426 Here you can specify if graphics are displayed inside \SpecialChar LyX
46430 \begin_layout Standard
46435 enables previewing snippets of your document.
46436 This feature is described in section
46437 \begin_inset space ~
46441 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46443 reference "sec:Previewing-snippets-of"
46450 \begin_layout Standard
46451 Checking the option
46454 \begin_inset space ~
46458 \begin_inset space ~
46462 \begin_inset space ~
46467 displays a pilcrow (¶) at the end of every paragraph.
46470 \begin_layout Section
46472 \begin_inset Index idx
46475 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46484 \begin_layout Subsection
46488 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46492 \begin_layout Standard
46495 Cursor follows scrollbar
46497 sets the cursor to the top of the currently displayed document part when
46501 \begin_layout Standard
46502 You can adjust the width of the cursor.
46503 If you set the value to zero, the thickness of the cursor scales relative
46504 to the zoom value you choose for the screen fonts.
46507 \begin_layout Standard
46510 Scroll below end of document
46512 is self-explanatory.
46515 \begin_layout Standard
46516 In \SpecialChar LyX
46517 one can jump from word to word by pressing
46524 Use Mac-style for cursor moving between words
46526 the cursor jumps from the end of a word to the end of the next word.
46527 Normally it jumps from the beginning to the beginning.
46530 \begin_layout Standard
46533 Sort environments alphabetically
46535 sorts the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46538 \begin_layout Standard
46541 Group environments by their category
46543 groups the entries in the pull-down box for the paragraph environments.
46546 \begin_layout Standard
46551 options determine the editing style for math macros, see the section
46562 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46566 \begin_layout Standard
46567 Here you can specify what is hidden in the fullscreen mode.
46572 you can specify the width of the text in fullscreen mode.
46573 This way you can display the text smaller than the screen; the text then
46577 \begin_layout Subsection
46579 \begin_inset Index idx
46582 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46589 \begin_inset Index idx
46592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46593 Settings ! Shortcuts
46601 \begin_layout Standard
46606 specifies the file to be used to bind a \SpecialChar LyX
46608 Several binding files are available, among them:
46611 \begin_layout Description
46612 cua.bind a typical set of PC keyboard shortcuts
46615 \begin_layout Description
46616 (x)emacs.bind a set of bindings similar to those used in the editor programs
46628 \begin_layout Description
46629 mac.bind a set of bindings for
46632 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46640 \begin_layout Standard
46641 There are also binding files designed for special document classes, like
46646 , and binding files for special languages.
46647 The names of language binding files begin with a language code, e.
46648 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
46652 \begin_inset space \space{}
46656 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46660 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46664 If you use \SpecialChar LyX
46665 in a certain language, \SpecialChar LyX
46666 will try to use the appropriate binding
46670 \begin_layout Standard
46671 Some binding files, like
46675 , only have a limited scope.
46676 When looking at the end of the file
46680 , you can see that they are included to keep the overview in the bind-file.
46683 \begin_layout Standard
46687 \begin_inset space ~
46691 \begin_inset space ~
46696 allows you to search for the shortcut provided for a particular function
46697 in the selected key binding file.
46700 \begin_layout Subsubsection
46702 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46704 name "subsec:Editing-Shortcuts"
46709 \begin_inset Index idx
46712 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46713 Key Bindings ! Editing
46721 \begin_layout Standard
46722 To add new or modify existing keybindings to your own taste you can use
46723 the table in the dialog that lists all \SpecialChar LyX
46724 functions and the bound shortcuts.
46725 To find functions easily, they are grouped by categories and the dialog
46728 Show key-bindings containing
46731 In this field you can insert a keyword for a function you want to edit.
46732 Insert there for example as keyword
46733 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46737 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46740 and you get the four different existing shortcuts for the three different
46741 functions that contain
46742 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46746 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46750 As you can see, one function can have more than one shortcut.
46751 All \SpecialChar LyX
46752 functions are also listed in the file
46757 that you will find in the
46764 \begin_layout Standard
46765 For example, to add the shortcut
46773 , select the function and press the
46778 A dialog pops up where you can add the shortcut by using it.
46779 So press Alt+Q to define the shortcut.
46782 \begin_layout Standard
46783 Modifying an existing shortcut is done the same way.
46784 You can also bind multiple functions to one shortcut by starting the \SpecialChar LyX
46786 definition with “command alternatives” and following it with the different
46787 function names as a semicolon separated list.
46789 will then use the first function that is enabled in the current document
46794 \begin_layout Standard
46795 If you don't like a particular shortcut, you can remove it.
46798 \begin_layout Standard
46799 Alternatively you can also edit shortcuts by modifying binding files with
46801 The syntax of the entries is:
46804 \begin_layout Standard
46810 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46814 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46818 \begin_inset Quotes eld
46823 \begin_inset Quotes erd
46829 \begin_layout Subsection
46831 \begin_inset CommandInset label
46833 name "subsec:Keyboard-Map"
46838 \begin_inset Index idx
46841 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46848 \begin_inset Index idx
46851 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46852 Settings ! Keyboard Map
46860 \begin_layout Standard
46861 Normally keyboard settings are made in a menu of your operating system.
46862 For the case thatWhere this is not possible, \SpecialChar LyX
46863 provides keyboard maps.
46864 If, for example, you have a Czech keyboard but want to use it as if it
46865 is a Romanian one, you can enable
46868 \begin_inset space ~
46872 \begin_inset space ~
46877 and select the keyboard map file named
46884 \begin_layout Standard
46893 keyboard map and, if you use the
46897 bindings, you can select the first and second with
46900 arg "keymap-primary"
46906 arg "keymap-secondary"
46909 respectively or toggle between them with
46912 arg "keymap-toggle"
46918 \begin_layout Standard
46919 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
46922 \begin_layout Plain Layout
46927 Keyboard maps can only provide a makeshift solution and don't work on all
46936 \begin_layout Standard
46937 You can also specify the mouse
46939 Wheel scrolling speed
46942 The standard value is 1.0; higher values speed up the scrolling, lower ones
46946 Middle mouse button pasting
46948 you can determine if pressing the middle mouse button (or the mouse wheel)
46949 inserts the content of the clipboard.
46952 \begin_layout Standard
46960 \begin_inset space ~
46964 \begin_inset space ~
46969 you can select a key for zooming.
46970 When this key is pressed and the mouse wheel is rotated, the text is zoomed.
46973 \begin_layout Subsection
46977 \begin_layout Standard
46978 Input completion is described in section
46979 \begin_inset space ~
46983 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
46985 reference "sec:Input-Completion"
46992 \begin_layout Section
46994 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47001 \begin_inset Index idx
47004 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47011 \begin_inset Index idx
47014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47023 \begin_layout Standard
47024 The paths to the various resources used by \SpecialChar LyX
47025 are normally determined during
47027 But there may be reasons why you might want to modify them.
47030 \begin_layout Description
47032 \begin_inset space ~
47035 directory This is \SpecialChar LyX
47036 's working directory.
47037 It is the default when you
47048 \begin_inset space ~
47056 \begin_layout Description
47058 \begin_inset space ~
47061 templates This directory will be opened when you use the menu
47063 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47065 \begin_inset space ~
47069 \begin_inset space ~
47077 \begin_layout Description
47079 \begin_inset space ~
47082 files This directory will be opened when you use the button
47088 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47092 \begin_inset Newline newline
47096 \begin_inset Note Greyedout
47099 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47108 button does not exist when using \SpecialChar LyX
47109 on Mac OS and Windows systems.
47117 \begin_layout Description
47119 \begin_inset space ~
47123 \begin_inset Index idx
47126 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47132 Backup copies will be saved to this directory.
47133 If no directory is given but backups are enabled as described in section
47134 \begin_inset space ~
47138 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47140 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47148 will be used to save the backups.
47149 \begin_inset Newline newline
47152 Backup files have the ending
47153 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47157 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47163 \begin_layout Description
47165 \begin_inset space ~
47168 pipe Here you can enter the name of a so-called UNIX-pipe.
47169 This pipe is used to send data from external programs to \SpecialChar LyX
47171 \begin_inset Newline newline
47178 You add a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
47184 You can edit this file with the program
47193 you have to use the same Unix-Pipe for \SpecialChar LyX
47194 in its preferences under
47197 \begin_inset space ~
47203 If you want to get one entry of the database as citation, select it in
47208 and click on the \SpecialChar LyX
47210 The entry will now be inserted as a citation at the current cursor position
47211 in your \SpecialChar LyX
47217 and \SpecialChar LyX
47218 need to be running the same time.
47219 \begin_inset Newline newline
47222 The pipe is also used for the
47226 feature, see section
47227 \begin_inset space ~
47231 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47233 reference "subsec:Backup documents"
47238 \begin_inset Newline newline
47241 To use the \SpecialChar LyX
47242 Server-Pipe on Windows, you must use this pipe name:
47243 \begin_inset Newline newline
47259 \begin_layout Description
47261 \begin_inset space ~
47264 directory Temporary files will be saved in this directory.
47267 \begin_layout Description
47269 \begin_inset space ~
47272 dictionary Directory where the thesaurus dictionaries are located.
47273 You only need to specify it if the thesaurus does not work or if you want
47274 to use custom/alternative dictionaries.
47277 \begin_layout Description
47279 \begin_inset space ~
47282 dictionary Directory where the dictionaries of the spell checker program
47288 You only need to specify it if you are using
47292 and spell checking does not work or if you want to use custom/alternative
47294 For \SpecialChar LyX
47299 is the only available spell checker and should work without specifying
47303 \begin_layout Description
47305 \begin_inset space ~
47308 prefix This field contains a list of paths to external programs.
47309 When \SpecialChar LyX
47310 needs to use an external program, it looks in this list to see where
47311 to find it on the system.
47312 The path list is automatically set up on Windows and Mac systems when \SpecialChar LyX
47314 is configured; so you normally don't have to modify it.
47316 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47320 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
47323 Linux systems, the path list will need to be set only if there are external
47324 programs you wish to use that are not in your normal system path ($PATH).
47327 \begin_layout Description
47329 \begin_inset space ~
47332 prefix The TEXINPUTS environment variable allows you to use external files
47333 which are included in a \SpecialChar LyX
47334 document via commands in \SpecialChar TeX
47335 code or in the document
47337 This prefix includes by default the document directory (represented by
47339 The prefix can contain any list of paths separated by the default separator
47340 of the OS (':' on UNIX like systems and ';' on Windows).
47341 If files are included, the paths listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix will be
47342 scanned for the input files.
47343 Note that any non-absolute path listed in the TEXINPUTS prefix is considered
47344 to be relative to the directory of your \SpecialChar LyX
47346 It is recommended that you always include '.' as one of the paths; otherwise
47347 compilation may fail for some documents.
47350 \begin_layout Section
47354 \begin_layout Standard
47355 Here you can insert your
47364 These will be used when you have enabled change tracking, as described
47366 \begin_inset space ~
47370 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47372 reference "sec:Change-Tracking"
47376 , to mark changes you make as yours.
47379 \begin_layout Section
47381 \begin_inset Index idx
47384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47385 Language ! Settings
47391 \begin_inset Index idx
47394 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47395 Settings ! Language
47403 \begin_layout Subsection
47405 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47407 name "subsec:Prefs-Language"
47414 \begin_layout Description
47416 \begin_inset space ~
47420 \begin_inset space ~
47423 language Here you can select the language for \SpecialChar LyX
47425 You can find its actual translation status here:
47426 \begin_inset CommandInset href
47428 target "http://www.lyx.org/I18n"
47435 \begin_layout Description
47437 \begin_inset space ~
47440 package determines which \SpecialChar LaTeX
47441 package should be loaded to handle language issues.
47442 Language issues that are handled by this package include proper hyphenation
47443 as well as localization of dates and text strings such as
47444 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47448 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47452 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47456 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47460 The most widespread language package is
47465 \begin_inset Index idx
47468 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47475 ; it is the default language package in classic \SpecialChar LaTeX
47477 More recent typesetting engines such as Xe\SpecialChar TeX
47478 and Lua\SpecialChar TeX
47479 come with the alternative
47485 \begin_inset Index idx
47488 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47490 -packages ! polyglossia
47495 that is more suited to the multi-script support of these engines.
47496 Furthermore, there are also specific language packages for languages not
47502 The available selections are described in section
47503 \begin_inset space ~
47507 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47509 reference "sec:Language-encodings"
47516 \begin_layout Description
47518 \begin_inset space ~
47521 start If a special \SpecialChar LaTeX
47522 -package is needed to write in a certain document language,
47523 you can here specify the command to start the package.
47524 An example is the start command
47530 that is needed to write Arabic using the package
47532 Arab\SpecialChar TeX
47536 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
47551 selectlanguage{$$lang}
47556 \begin_layout Description
47558 \begin_inset space ~
47566 Some packages, like the default, don't have an end command since the start
47567 command toggles the package on and off.
47570 \begin_layout Description
47572 \begin_inset space ~
47576 \begin_inset space ~
47579 separator Defines the default decimal point for use in tables (decimal point
47583 \begin_layout Description
47585 \begin_inset space ~
47589 \begin_inset space ~
47592 unit Defines the unit that is used as default for lengths in \SpecialChar LyX
47596 \begin_layout Description
47598 \begin_inset space ~
47602 \begin_inset space ~
47605 globally When this option is set, the languages used in the document will
47606 be added as options to the document class options, so that they can be
47607 used by all \SpecialChar LaTeX
47609 Otherwise they will only be used as options for the
47616 \begin_layout Description
47618 \begin_inset space ~
47621 begin When this option is set, documents start with the chosen document
47623 When this option is not set, the
47626 \begin_inset space ~
47631 is explicitly set to the beginning of the document in the \SpecialChar LaTeX
47633 This assures that the correct language is used when you use another
47636 \begin_inset space ~
47644 \begin_layout Description
47646 \begin_inset space ~
47652 \begin_inset space ~
47658 When it is not set, the
47661 \begin_inset space ~
47666 is set to the end of the document.
47669 \begin_layout Description
47671 \begin_inset space ~
47675 \begin_inset space ~
47678 languages Text marked formatted in a language different from the document
47679 language will be underlined in blue.
47682 \begin_layout Description
47684 \begin_inset space ~
47688 \begin_inset space ~
47691 support Enables the use of languages, written from right to left (RTL),
47692 like Arabic, Hebrew or Farsi.
47695 \begin_layout Description
47697 \begin_inset space ~
47700 movement When writing RTL, you can define if the left and right arrow keys
47701 move the cursor visually to the left or right, respectively, or logically.
47702 Logical means that the cursor is moved to the left when pressing the right
47703 arrow key and the cursor is inside text in an RTL language.
47706 \begin_layout Subsection
47710 \begin_layout Standard
47711 The spellchecker settings are explained in section
47712 \begin_inset space ~
47716 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47718 reference "sec:Spellchecking"
47725 \begin_layout Section
47729 \begin_layout Subsection
47731 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47733 name "subsec:General-output"
47740 \begin_layout Description
47742 \begin_inset space ~
47745 search Commands that will be used for the menu
47747 Navigate\SpecialChar menuseparator
47749 \begin_inset space ~
47755 For a detailed description see section
47757 Reverse DVI/PDF search
47762 \begin_inset space ~
47770 \begin_layout Description
47772 \begin_inset space ~
47775 Options Options for the program
47779 that is used for the export format
47784 \begin_inset space ~
47788 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
47790 reference "subsec:Export"
47795 Possible options are listed in the
47800 \begin_inset Newline newline
47804 \begin_inset Flex URL
47807 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47809 https://www.tug.org/texinfohtml/dvips.html
47819 \begin_layout Description
47821 \begin_inset space ~
47825 \begin_inset space ~
47828 length sets the maximum number of characters printed in one line when using
47831 File\SpecialChar menuseparator
47832 Export\SpecialChar menuseparator
47834 \begin_inset space ~
47840 Setting the line length to 0 means all text is printed in one endless line.
47843 \begin_layout Description
47845 \begin_inset space ~
47849 \begin_inset Index idx
47852 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47859 \begin_inset Index idx
47862 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47863 Settings ! Date format
47868 The date format can be one or a mixture of the formats listed here:
47869 \begin_inset Newline newline
47873 \begin_inset Flex URL
47876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47878 http://man7.org/linux/man-pages/man1/date.1.html
47884 \begin_inset Newline newline
47887 For example the format
47888 \begin_inset Newline newline
47892 \begin_inset Newline newline
47895 prints the date as day/month/year.
47898 \begin_layout Description
47900 \begin_inset space ~
47904 \begin_inset space ~
47907 export Setting what \SpecialChar LyX
47908 is allowed to overwrite on export.
47911 \begin_layout Subsection
47917 \begin_inset CommandInset label
47919 name "subsec:LaTeX-settings"
47924 \begin_inset Index idx
47927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
47928 Settings ! \SpecialChar LaTeX
47937 \begin_layout Description
47939 \begin_inset space ~
47947 \begin_inset space ~
47951 \begin_inset space ~
47954 encoding This is the default encoding of the document font.
47959 is the default and covers western languages and symbols.
47980 are used for Cyrillic.
47981 Combinations of the encodings are possible, like
47982 \begin_inset Quotes eld
47990 \begin_inset Quotes erd
47994 The font encoding is normally automatically loaded by the language packages
47996 sets up in the background.
47997 So there is no need to change the default encoding.
48000 \begin_layout Description
48002 \begin_inset space ~
48006 \begin_inset space ~
48010 \begin_inset space ~
48014 \begin_inset space ~
48017 options They only have an effect when the program
48021 is used as DVI-viewer, read its manual to find out more.
48024 \begin_layout Standard
48025 Here you can also specify options and commands with parameters for processors.
48026 But before you change something, it is strongly recommended to read the
48027 manuals of the applications.
48030 \begin_layout Description
48032 \begin_inset space ~
48035 generation Settings for the generation of the bibliography, see section
48036 \begin_inset space ~
48040 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48042 reference "subsec:Bibliography-databases"
48049 \begin_layout Description
48051 \begin_inset space ~
48054 generation Settings for the generation of the index, see section
48055 \begin_inset space ~
48059 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48061 reference "subsec:Index-Program"
48068 \begin_layout Description
48070 \begin_inset space ~
48073 command Command for the program that generates the nomenclature, see section
48074 \begin_inset space ~
48078 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48080 reference "subsec:Nomenclature-Program"
48087 \begin_layout Description
48093 \begin_inset space ~
48096 command Command for the program
48098 Check\SpecialChar TeX
48101 that is described in the section
48103 Checking \SpecialChar TeX
48108 Additional Features
48113 \begin_layout Standard
48114 There are additionally the following options:
48117 \begin_layout Description
48119 \begin_inset space ~
48123 \begin_inset space ~
48127 \begin_inset space ~
48131 \begin_inset space ~
48136 \begin_inset space ~
48139 files Uses paths in the notation of Windows, that means that
48140 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48146 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48150 \begin_inset Quotes eld
48154 \begin_inset Quotes erd
48157 to separate folders.
48158 This option is enabled by default when you use \SpecialChar LyX
48160 \begin_inset Index idx
48163 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48170 \begin_inset Index idx
48173 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48182 \begin_layout Description
48184 \begin_inset space ~
48188 \begin_inset space ~
48192 \begin_inset space ~
48196 \begin_inset space ~
48200 \begin_inset space ~
48204 \begin_inset space ~
48207 changes Removes all manually set
48213 Document\SpecialChar menuseparator
48214 Settings\SpecialChar menuseparator
48216 \begin_inset space ~
48221 dialog when changing the document class.
48224 \begin_layout Section
48226 \begin_inset space ~
48230 \begin_inset Index idx
48233 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48242 \begin_layout Subsection
48244 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48246 name "subsec:Converters"
48251 \begin_inset Index idx
48254 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48263 \begin_layout Standard
48264 Here you find the list of defined converter commands to convert material
48265 from one format to another.
48266 You can modify converters or create new ones.
48267 To modify a converter, select it, change the entry of the
48274 \begin_inset space ~
48279 field and press the
48284 To create a new converter, select an existing one, select a different format
48288 \begin_inset space ~
48293 drop-down list, modify the
48297 field and press the
48304 \begin_layout Standard
48307 Converter File Cache
48313 , conversions will be cached as long as specified in the field
48315 Maximum Age (in days
48318 This means that images don't need to be converted again when you reopen
48319 a document; the converted images from the cache will be used instead.
48322 \begin_layout Standard
48323 More about converters, like the flags that can be used in the converter
48324 definition, is described in the section
48335 \begin_layout Subsection
48337 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48339 name "sec:File-Formats"
48344 \begin_inset Index idx
48347 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48354 \begin_inset Index idx
48357 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48366 \begin_layout Standard
48367 Here you find the list of defined file formats that \SpecialChar LyX
48377 programs that should be used for certain formats.
48380 \begin_layout Standard
48381 You can also define the
48383 Default output format
48385 that is used when you use
48387 View, Update, View Master Document
48391 Update Master Document
48397 menu or the toolbar.
48400 \begin_layout Standard
48401 More about formats and their options is described in the section
48412 \begin_layout Standard
48413 Since all conversions from one format to another take place in \SpecialChar LyX
48415 directory, it is sometimes necessary to modify a file before copying it
48416 to the temporary directory so that the conversion may be performed.
48417 This is done by specifying a
48422 More about this is described in the section
48433 \begin_layout Chapter
48434 Units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48436 \begin_inset Index idx
48439 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48446 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48448 name "chap:Units-available-in"
48455 \begin_layout Standard
48457 \begin_inset space ~
48461 \begin_inset CommandInset ref
48463 reference "tab:Units"
48467 explains all the units available in \SpecialChar LyX
48468 and used in this documentation.
48471 \begin_layout Standard
48472 \begin_inset Float table
48478 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48479 \begin_inset Caption Standard
48481 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48482 \begin_inset CommandInset label
48496 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48497 \begin_inset VSpace medskip
48503 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48505 \begin_inset Tabular
48506 <lyxtabular version="3" rows="20" columns="3">
48507 <features tabularvalignment="middle">
48508 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48509 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48510 <column alignment="center" valignment="top">
48512 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48515 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48521 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48524 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48530 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48533 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48542 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48551 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48554 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48560 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48563 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48571 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48574 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48580 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48583 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48589 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48592 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48600 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48603 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48609 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48612 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48618 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48621 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48629 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48632 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48638 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48641 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48643 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48647 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48655 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48658 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48666 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48669 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48675 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48678 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48680 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48684 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48692 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48695 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48703 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48706 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48712 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48715 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48716 scaled point (65536
48717 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48721 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48729 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48732 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48740 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48743 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48749 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48752 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48754 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48758 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48766 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48777 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48780 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48786 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48789 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48791 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48795 \begin_inset Formula $\approx$
48799 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48807 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48810 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48818 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48821 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48827 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48830 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48832 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48836 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
48844 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48847 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48855 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48858 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48864 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48868 % of original image width
48873 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48876 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48884 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48887 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48893 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48896 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48902 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48905 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48915 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48918 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48924 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48927 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48933 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48936 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48946 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48949 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48955 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48958 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48964 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48967 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48977 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48986 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
48989 \begin_layout Plain Layout
48995 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
48998 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49008 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49011 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49017 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49020 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49026 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49039 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49042 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49048 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49051 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49057 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49060 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49070 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49073 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49079 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49082 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49092 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49095 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49103 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49106 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49112 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49115 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49125 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49128 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49136 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49139 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49145 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" usebox="none">
49148 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49150 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49154 \begin_inset space \thinspace{}
49162 <cell alignment="center" valignment="top" topline="true" bottomline="true" leftline="true" rightline="true" usebox="none">
49165 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49184 \begin_layout Chapter
49186 \begin_inset CommandInset label
49188 name "chap:Credits"
49195 \begin_layout Standard
49196 The documentation is a collaborative effort between many different people
49197 (and we would encourage people to contribute!).
49200 \begin_layout Itemize
49203 Alejandro Aguilar Sierra
49206 \begin_layout Itemize
49212 \begin_layout Itemize
49218 \begin_layout Itemize
49224 \begin_layout Itemize
49230 \begin_layout Itemize
49236 \begin_layout Itemize
49242 \begin_layout Itemize
49248 \begin_layout Itemize
49251 Lars Gullik Bjønnes
49254 \begin_layout Itemize
49260 \begin_layout Itemize
49266 \begin_layout Itemize
49272 \begin_layout Itemize
49278 \begin_layout Itemize
49284 \begin_layout Itemize
49290 \begin_layout Itemize
49296 \begin_layout Itemize
49302 \begin_layout Itemize
49303 The \SpecialChar LyX
49305 \begin_inset CommandInset citation
49314 \begin_layout Standard
49315 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
49318 The bibliography on the following page was created with the
49325 \begin_layout Bibliography
49326 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49327 LatexCommand bibitem
49333 The \SpecialChar LyX
49335 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49338 target "http://www.lyx.org/Credits"
49343 \begin_inset Newline newline
49347 \begin_inset Flex URL
49350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49352 http://www.lyx.org/Credits
49360 \begin_layout Bibliography
49361 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49362 LatexCommand bibitem
49363 key "latexcompanion"
49367 Frank Mittelbach and Michel Goossens:
49369 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49370 Companion Second Edition.
49373 Addison-Wesley, 2004
49376 \begin_layout Bibliography
49377 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49378 LatexCommand bibitem
49383 Helmut Kopka and Patrick W.
49386 A Guide to \SpecialChar LaTeX
49390 Addison-Wesley, 2003
49393 \begin_layout Bibliography
49394 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49395 LatexCommand bibitem
49403 : A Document Preparation System.
49406 Addison-Wesley, second edition, 1994
49409 \begin_layout Bibliography
49410 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49411 LatexCommand bibitem
49420 The \SpecialChar TeX
49424 Addison-Wesley, 1984
49427 \begin_layout Bibliography
49428 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49429 LatexCommand bibitem
49434 The \SpecialChar TeX
49436 \begin_inset Newline newline
49440 \begin_inset Flex URL
49443 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49445 http://mirrors.ctan.org/help/Catalogue/bytopic.html
49453 \begin_layout Bibliography
49454 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49455 LatexCommand bibitem
49460 The \SpecialChar LaTeX
49462 \begin_inset Newline newline
49466 \begin_inset Flex URL
49469 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49471 http://www.tex.ac.uk/faq/
49479 \begin_layout Bibliography
49480 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49481 LatexCommand bibitem
49487 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49489 name "Documentation"
49490 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf"
49496 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49500 \begin_inset Newline newline
49504 \begin_inset Flex URL
49507 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49509 http://mirrors.ctan.org/biblio/bibtex/contrib/doc/btxdoc.pdf
49517 \begin_layout Bibliography
49518 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49519 LatexCommand bibitem
49525 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49527 name "Documentation"
49528 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf"
49532 how to use the program
49534 Bib\SpecialChar TeX
49538 \begin_inset Newline newline
49542 \begin_inset Flex URL
49545 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49547 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/info/bibtex/tamethebeast/ttb_en.pdf
49553 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884806
49557 \begin_layout Bibliography
49559 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884882
49560 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49561 LatexCommand bibitem
49567 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49570 target "http://www.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf"
49579 \begin_inset Newline newline
49583 \begin_inset Flex URL
49586 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49588 \change_inserted -712698321 1483884888
49590 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/biblatex/doc/biblatex.pdf
49600 \begin_layout Bibliography
49601 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49602 LatexCommand bibitem
49608 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49610 name "Documentation"
49611 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf"
49620 \begin_inset Newline newline
49624 \begin_inset Flex URL
49627 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49629 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/makeindex.pdf
49637 \begin_layout Bibliography
49638 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49639 LatexCommand bibitem
49640 key "makeindex-man"
49645 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49648 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi"
49657 \begin_inset Newline newline
49661 \begin_inset Flex URL
49664 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49666 http://mirrors.ctan.org/indexing/makeindex/doc/manpages.dvi
49674 \begin_layout Bibliography
49675 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49676 LatexCommand bibitem
49682 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49684 name "Documentation"
49685 target "http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html"
49694 \begin_inset Newline newline
49698 \begin_inset Flex URL
49701 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49703 http://www.xindy.org/documentation.html
49711 \begin_layout Bibliography
49712 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49713 LatexCommand bibitem
49719 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49721 name "Documentation"
49722 target "http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex"
49726 of the AMS \SpecialChar LaTeX
49728 \begin_inset Newline newline
49732 \begin_inset Flex URL
49735 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49737 http://www.ams.org/publications/authors/tex/amslatex
49745 \begin_layout Bibliography
49746 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49747 LatexCommand bibitem
49753 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49755 name "Documentation"
49756 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf"
49760 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49766 \begin_inset Index idx
49769 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49771 -packages ! caption
49777 \begin_inset Newline newline
49781 \begin_inset Flex URL
49784 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49786 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/caption/caption-eng.pdf
49794 \begin_layout Bibliography
49795 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49796 LatexCommand bibitem
49802 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49804 name "Documentation"
49805 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf"
49809 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49815 \begin_inset Index idx
49818 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49820 -packages ! enumitem
49826 \begin_inset Newline newline
49830 \begin_inset Flex URL
49833 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49835 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/enumitem/enumitem.pdf
49843 \begin_layout Bibliography
49844 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49845 LatexCommand bibitem
49851 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49853 name "Documentation"
49854 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf"
49858 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49864 \begin_inset Index idx
49867 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49869 -packages ! fancyhdr
49875 \begin_inset Newline newline
49879 \begin_inset Flex URL
49882 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49884 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/fancyhdr/fancyhdr.pdf
49892 \begin_layout Bibliography
49893 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49894 LatexCommand bibitem
49900 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49902 name "Documentation"
49903 target "http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref"
49907 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49913 \begin_inset Index idx
49916 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49918 -packages ! hyperref
49924 \begin_inset Newline newline
49928 \begin_inset Flex URL
49931 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49933 http://www.ctan.org/pkg/hyperref
49941 \begin_layout Bibliography
49942 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49943 LatexCommand bibitem
49949 \begin_inset CommandInset href
49951 name "Documentation"
49952 target "http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf"
49956 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
49962 \begin_inset Index idx
49965 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49967 -packages ! nomencl
49973 \begin_inset Newline newline
49977 \begin_inset Flex URL
49980 \begin_layout Plain Layout
49982 http://mirrors.ctan.org/macros/latex/contrib/nomencl/nomencl.pdf
49990 \begin_layout Bibliography
49991 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
49992 LatexCommand bibitem
49998 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50000 name "Documentation"
50001 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf"
50005 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50011 \begin_inset Index idx
50014 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50016 -packages ! prettyref
50022 \begin_inset Newline newline
50026 \begin_inset Flex URL
50029 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50031 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/prettyref/prettyref.pdf
50039 \begin_layout Bibliography
50040 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50041 LatexCommand bibitem
50047 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50049 name "Documentation"
50050 target "http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf"
50054 of the \SpecialChar LaTeX
50060 \begin_inset Index idx
50063 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50065 -packages ! refstyle
50071 \begin_inset Newline newline
50075 \begin_inset Flex URL
50078 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50080 http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/macros/latex/contrib/refstyle/refstyle.pdf
50088 \begin_layout Bibliography
50089 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50090 LatexCommand bibitem
50096 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50099 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic"
50103 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50105 \begin_inset Newline newline
50109 \begin_inset Flex URL
50112 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50114 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Arabic
50122 \begin_layout Bibliography
50123 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50124 LatexCommand bibitem
50130 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50133 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian"
50137 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50139 \begin_inset Newline newline
50143 \begin_inset Flex URL
50146 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50148 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Armenian
50156 \begin_layout Bibliography
50157 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50158 LatexCommand bibitem
50164 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50167 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic"
50171 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50172 for Cyrillic languages:
50173 \begin_inset Newline newline
50177 \begin_inset Flex URL
50180 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50182 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Cyrillic
50190 \begin_layout Bibliography
50191 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50192 LatexCommand bibitem
50198 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50201 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi"
50205 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50207 \begin_inset Newline newline
50211 \begin_inset Flex URL
50214 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50216 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Farsi
50224 \begin_layout Bibliography
50225 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50226 LatexCommand bibitem
50232 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50235 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew"
50239 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50241 \begin_inset Newline newline
50245 \begin_inset Flex URL
50248 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50250 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Hebrew
50258 \begin_layout Bibliography
50259 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50260 LatexCommand bibitem
50266 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50269 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese"
50273 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50275 \begin_inset Newline newline
50279 \begin_inset Flex URL
50282 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50284 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Japanese
50292 \begin_layout Bibliography
50293 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50294 LatexCommand bibitem
50300 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50303 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian"
50307 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50309 \begin_inset Newline newline
50313 \begin_inset Flex URL
50316 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50318 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Latvian
50326 \begin_layout Bibliography
50327 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50328 LatexCommand bibitem
50334 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50337 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian"
50341 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50343 \begin_inset Newline newline
50347 \begin_inset Flex URL
50350 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50352 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Lithuanian
50360 \begin_layout Bibliography
50361 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50362 LatexCommand bibitem
50368 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50371 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian"
50375 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50377 \begin_inset Newline newline
50381 \begin_inset Flex URL
50384 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50386 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Mongolian
50394 \begin_layout Bibliography
50395 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50396 LatexCommand bibitem
50402 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50405 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese"
50409 how to set up \SpecialChar LyX
50411 \begin_inset Newline newline
50415 \begin_inset Flex URL
50418 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50420 http://wiki.lyx.org/Windows/Vietnamese
50428 \begin_layout Bibliography
50429 \begin_inset CommandInset bibitem
50430 LatexCommand bibitem
50436 \begin_inset CommandInset href
50439 target "http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20"
50443 about new features in
50449 \begin_inset Newline newline
50453 \begin_inset Flex URL
50456 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50458 http://wiki.lyx.org/LyX/NewInLyX20
50466 \begin_layout Standard
50467 \begin_inset Newpage newpage
50474 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50485 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50501 \begin_inset Note Note
50504 \begin_layout Plain Layout
50511 is the name of the bibliography in the current document language.
50512 It is redefined here with the number 2 at the end to state that the following
50513 bibliography is the second one:
50521 \begin_layout Standard
50522 \begin_inset CommandInset bibtex
50523 LatexCommand bibtex
50524 bibfiles "biblio/LyXDocs"
50525 options "biblio/alphadin"
50532 \begin_layout Standard
50533 The above bibliography is created from a Bib\SpecialChar TeX
50537 \begin_layout Standard
50538 \begin_inset CommandInset nomencl_print
50539 LatexCommand printnomenclature
50545 \begin_inset CommandInset index_print
50546 LatexCommand printindex